4-477-605-15 (1)

Solid-State Memory
Camcorder

Operating Instructions
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly
and retain it for future reference.

PMW-400K
PMW-400L

© 2013 Sony Corporation

 Table of Contents

Foreword ...................................................................................................... 8
Before Use......................................................................................... 8

Chapter 1 : Overview

Features ........................................................................................................ 9
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls...................................... 11
Power Supply .................................................................................. 11
Accessory Attachments................................................................... 12
Operating and Connectors Section.................................................. 13
Monochrome LCD Panel ................................................................ 21
Auto Focus Lens (Supplied with the PMW-400K)......................... 22
Viewfinder....................................................................................... 24
Viewfinder Screen Display........................................................................ 25

Chapter 2 : Preparations

Preparing a Power Supply ........................................................................ 29

Using a Battery Pack....................................................................... 29
Using AC Power ............................................................................. 29
Attaching the Viewfinder .......................................................................... 30
Attaching the Supplied Viewfinder................................................. 30
Adjusting the Viewfinder Position.................................................. 30
Adjusting the Viewfinder Angle ..................................................... 31
Lifting Up the Viewfinder Barrel and Eyepiece ............................. 31
Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus and Screen................................... 32
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket ........................ 33
Attaching a 5-inch Electronic Viewfinder ...................................... 34
Setting the Area of Use .............................................................................. 35
Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock ........................................... 35
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens............................................................ 36
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length ................................................. 36
Preparing the Audio Input System .......................................................... 38
Connecting a Microphone to the MIC IN Connector...................... 38
Connecting Microphones to the AUDIO IN Connectors................ 39
Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner (for a UHF Wireless Microphone
System) ..................................................................................... 40

2 Table of Contents
 Tripod Mounting ....................................................................................... 41
Connecting a Video Light ......................................................................... 42
Using the Shoulder Strap .......................................................................... 42
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position ....................................................... 43

Chapter 3 : Adjustments and Settings

Setting the Video Format .......................................................................... 44

Selecting the Recording Mode ........................................................ 47
Changing the Video Format ............................................................ 47
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance ............................. 47
Adjusting the Black Balance........................................................... 47
Adjusting the White Balance .......................................................... 48
Setting the Electronic Shutter................................................................... 50
Shutter Modes ................................................................................. 50
Selecting the Shutter Mode and Shutter Speed ............................... 51
Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment ............ 52
Zooming ...................................................................................................... 53
Switching between Zoom Modes.................................................... 53
Using Manual Zoom ....................................................................... 53
Using Servo Zoom .......................................................................... 53
Adjusting the Focus ................................................................................... 54
Adjusting in Full MF Mode ............................................................ 54
Adjusting in MF Mode.................................................................... 54
Adjusting in AF Mode .................................................................... 54
Using Macro Mode ......................................................................... 54
Adjusting the Audio Level ........................................................................ 55
Manually Adjusting the Audio Levels of the Audio Inputs from the
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 Connectors ......................................... 55
Manually Adjusting the Audio Level of the MIC IN Connector .... 55
Recording Audio on Channels 3 and 4 ........................................... 56
Setting the Time Data................................................................................ 56
Setting the Timecode....................................................................... 56
Setting the User Bits........................................................................ 57
Synchronizing the Timecode........................................................... 57
Checking Camcorder Settings and Status Information
(Status Screens).................................................................................... 59

Table of Contents 3
 Chapter 4 : Shooting

Handling SxS Memory Cards................................................................... 60

About SxS Memory Cards .............................................................. 60
Loading and Ejecting SxS Memory Cards...................................... 60
Selecting the SxS Memory Card to Use.......................................... 61
Formatting (Initializing) SxS Memory Cards ................................. 61
Checking the Remaining Recording Time...................................... 61
Restoring SxS Memory Cards......................................................... 62
Using a Media Adaptor ............................................................................. 63
XQD Memory Cards ....................................................................... 63
SDHC Cards (FAT Mode only) ...................................................... 63
Handling USB Flash Drives ...................................................................... 64
Formatting (Initializing) USB Flash Drives.................................... 64
Restoring USB Flash Drives ........................................................... 65
Operating via the REMOTE Connector.................................................. 65
Adjusting the Camcorder from the Remote Control Unit............... 65
Operating the Menu from the RM-B170......................................... 67
Operating the Menu from the RM-B750......................................... 67
Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RM-B170/B750 ............... 68
Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RCP-1001/1501............... 77
Using Wi-Fi Connection ............................................................................ 79
Fixing the CBK-WA01 ................................................................... 79
Connecting the IFU-WLM3............................................................ 79
Making a Wi-Fi Connection............................................................ 79
Using the Web Menu ...................................................................... 81
Using Live Logging Functions........................................................ 82
Using the Wi-Fi Remote Commander............................................. 82
Basic Operations ........................................................................................ 84
Playing Recorded Clips................................................................... 85
Deleting Recorded Clips ................................................................. 86
Advanced Operations ................................................................................ 86
Recording Shot Marks..................................................................... 86
Setting OK Marks ........................................................................... 86
Starting to Record from Pre-stored Video
(Picture Cache Function) .......................................................... 87
Recording Time-lapse Video (Interval Rec Function).................... 88
Shooting Stop Motion Animations (Frame Rec Function) ............. 89
Shooting with Slow & Quick Motion ............................................. 90
Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec Function ........................ 91
Framing Shots with the Freeze Mix Function................................. 92
Planning Metadata Operations ................................................................ 93

4 Table of Contents
 Loading a Planning Metadata File into Camcorder’s Internal
Memory..................................................................................... 93
Defining Clip Names in Planning Metadata ................................... 94
Defining Shot Mark Names in Planning Metadata ......................... 95

Chapter 5 : Clip Operations

Clip Playback ............................................................................................. 96

Thumbnail Screen ........................................................................... 96
Playing Clips ................................................................................... 97
Using Thumbnails to Search Inside Clips....................................... 98
Thumbnail Operations ............................................................................ 100
THUMBNAIL Menu Configuration ............................................. 100
Basic THUMBNAIL Menu Operations ........................................ 102
Changing the Thumbnail Screen Type.......................................... 102
Displaying Clip Properties ............................................................ 103
Adding/Deleting a Flag (UDF Only) ............................................ 104
Adding/Deleting the OK Mark (FAT-HD Mode Only)................ 104
Copying Clips ............................................................................... 104
Deleting Clips................................................................................ 105
Displaying the Expand Thumbnail Screen (UDF/exFAT/FAT-HD
Mode only).............................................................................. 105
Displaying the Shot Mark Thumbnail Screen (UDF/exFAT/FAT-HD
Mode Only)............................................................................. 106
Adding and Deleting Shot Marks (UDF/exFAT/FAT-HD Mode
Only) ....................................................................................... 107
Changing Clip Index Pictures (UDF/exFAT/FAT-HD Mode
Only) ....................................................................................... 107
Dividing Clips (FAT-HD Mode Only) ......................................... 107

Chapter 6 : Menu and Detailed Settings

Setup Menu Organization and Levels.................................................... 109

Setup Menu Organization ............................................................. 109
Setup Menu Levels........................................................................ 109
Basic Setup Menu Operations ................................................................ 110
Menu List.................................................................................................. 113
OPERATION Menu...................................................................... 113
PAINT Menu................................................................................. 131
MAINTENANCE Menu ............................................................... 137
FILE Menu .................................................................................... 154
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches ......................................... 158
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 0 Switch ........ 158

Table of Contents 5
 Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 Switch ........ 159
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 and 3 Switches,
the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 Switches, and the COLOR TEMP.
Button...................................................................................... 159
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the RET Button on the
Lens......................................................................................... 162

Chapter 7 : Saving and Loading User Setting Data

Saving and Loading Settings................................................................... 163

Saving Setting Data....................................................................... 163
Loading Setting Data..................................................................... 164
Resetting a File after Changing Its Contents................................. 165
Saving and Loading Scene Files ............................................................. 165
Saving Scene Files ........................................................................ 165
Loading Scene Files ...................................................................... 166
Saving and Loading Lens Files............................................................... 166
Setting Lens File Data................................................................... 166
Saving Lens Files .......................................................................... 166
Loading Lens Files........................................................................ 167
Loading Lens Files Automatically ................................................ 167

Chapter 8 : Connecting External Devices

Connecting External Monitors ............................................................... 168

Operating Clips with a Computer.......................................................... 170
Using the ExpressCard Slot of a Computer .................................. 170
USB Connection with a Computer................................................ 170
Connecting an External Device (i.LINK Connection).......................... 172
Recording the Camera Picture on an External Device.................. 172
Nonlinear Editing .......................................................................... 173
Recording External Input Signals ................................................. 173
Connecting USB Media ........................................................................... 174
Supported USB Media .................................................................. 174
Copying Clips ............................................................................... 174
Displaying the USB Media Thumbnail Screen............................. 175
Configuring a Shooting and Recording System .................................... 176
Tally and Call indication............................................................... 176

6 Table of Contents
Chapter 9 : Maintenance

Testing the Camcorder............................................................................ 177

Maintenance ............................................................................................. 177
Cleaning the Viewfinder ............................................................... 177
Note about the Battery Terminal................................................... 177
Operation Warnings ................................................................................ 178
Error Indication ............................................................................. 178
Warning Indication........................................................................ 179

Appendix
Important Notes on Operation ............................................................... 186
Exchanging the Battery of the Internal Clock ...................................... 188
Output Formats and Limitations ........................................................... 189
Video Formats and Output Signals ............................................... 189
Output Signals and Operation Restrictions When a Camcorder System is
Configured (in HD Mode Only) ....................................................... 193
Specifications............................................................................................ 195
General .......................................................................................... 195
Camera Block................................................................................ 197
Audio Block .................................................................................. 197
Display .......................................................................................... 197
Media Block .................................................................................. 198
Inputs/Outputs ............................................................................... 198
Lens Block (PMW-400K Only) .................................................... 198
Supplied Accessories .................................................................... 199
Recommended Additional Equipment .......................................... 199
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories .................................. 201
About i.LINK ........................................................................................... 202
About License........................................................................................... 203
MPEG-4 AVC Patent Portfolio License ....................................... 203
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License...................................... 203
About Bitmap Fonts ................................................................................ 203
About OpenSSL ....................................................................................... 204
About JQuery,Sizzle.js ............................................................................ 207
Index.......................................................................................................... 208

Table of Contents 7
 Foreword

Before Use
After purchasing the PMW-400 Solid-State
Memory Camcorder, before operating, it is
necessary to set the area of use.
(Unless this setting is made, the camcorder will
not operate.)
For details of these settings, see “Setting the Area of
Use” (page 35).
Note
Before attaching/removing optional components or
accessories to/from the PMW-400 (referred to as “the
camcorder”), be sure to turn the power of the camcorder
off.

8 Foreword
 1 Overview

Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter

440 minutes of HD images at 25Mbps (XAVC-

Features L25 mode). Furthermore, the PMW-400 supports
recording and playback in DVCAM 25 Mbps
format, as well as recording and playback in
MPEG IMX 50 Mbps format.
High-quality uncompressed audio recording
When in UDF HD422, exFAT/XAVC-I mode, or
2/ exFAT/XAVC-L mode, this camcorder can
3-type full-HD (1920 × 1080) CMOS record 4-channel audio in 24-bit, 48 kHz linear
image sensors PCM format. Recording of 4-channel audio in 16-
The PMW-400 Solid-State Memory Camcorder bit, 48 kHz linear PCM format for FAT HD Mode
is provided with three newly developed 2/3-type is possible.
“Exmor” CMOS image sensors with
Support for a file-based workflow
approximately 207 million effective pixels, for
File-based recording in MXF and MP4 formats
full HD resolution (1920 × 1080). The new image
allows material to be handled with great
sensor technology enables the capture of very
flexibility in computer work environments,
high-quality images, with a sensitivity of F12
enabling easy copying, transferring, sharing, and
(59.94i) / F13 (50i) and an S/N ratio of 60 dB by
archiving.
the 3DNR function.
Instant-access thumbnail display with “Expand”
SxS memory cards as recording media function
Each time a recording is started and stopped, the
video and audio signals are recorded as one clip.
A new generation HD recording system Furthermore, thumbnails are automatically
generated for each clip as a visual reference,
HD recording using the “MPEG-2 Long GOP,”
allowing the operator to cue-up to a desired scene
“XAVC Intra,” or “XAVC Long GOP” codec and
simply by guiding the cursor to a thumbnail. For
SD recording in DVCAM format
further convenience, the ‘Expand’ function
The PMW-400 records 1920 × 1080, 1440 × 1080
allows one selected clip in the Thumbnail display
(FAT mode only), and 1280 × 720 HD images
to be divided into 12 equal time intervals, each
using “MPEG-2 Long GOP,” “XAVC Intra,” or
with its own thumbnail identifier. This is useful if
“XAVC Long GOP” codec compression. When
you wish to quickly search for a particular scene
recording with UDF, settings of 50 Mbps (in
within a lengthy clip.
HD422 mode) or 35 Mbps (in HQ mode) are
• XAVC is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
supported. With FAT, settings of 35 Mbps (in HQ
mode) or 25 Mbps (in SP mode) are supported.
With exFAT, the bit rate is set to up to 112 Mbps Multi-format support
(XAVC-I), 50Mbps (XAVC-L50), 35Mbps The camcorder supports interlace format
(XAVC-L35), or 25Mbps (XAVC-L25). recording (1080/59.94i or 1080/50i), progressive
When using a 128 GB SxS memory card, efficient format recording (1080/29.97P, 1080/23.98P,
compression methods allow for recording 720/59.94P, 720/29.97P, 720/23.98P, or 1080/
approximately 120 minutes of HD images at 112 25P, 720/50P, 720/25P), thus offering the
Mbps (in XAVC-I mode), approximately 240 flexibility needed for worldwide HD recording.
minutes of HD images at 50 Mbps (in HD422 It also supports recording and playback of SD
mode, XAVC-L50 mode), approximately 360 signals (both NTSC and PAL). The camcorder
minutes of HD images at 35 Mbps (in HQ mode), has an optional capability to record and play back
approximately 340 minutes of HD images at SD signals in IMX/DVCAM format, and can
35Mbps (XAVC-L35 mode), and approximately output HD signals down-converted to SD.

Features 9
 A special auto focus lens Camcorder system configuration
Chapter 1 Overview

The camcorder is provided with the 2/3-type auto When you install the optional CBK-CE01 50 Pin
focus lens, which ensures high-quality shooting Interface and Digital Extender, you can mount the
in all situations from wide angle to telephoto CA-FB70/TX70 HD Camera Adaptor and
(PMW-400K only). connect the CCU to configure a system for
shooting and recording.
A variety of functions for improved When the CBK-CE01 is installed, you can also
performance under various shooting connect the HDCA-702 MPEG TS Adaptor
instead of the camera adaptor. This allows you to
conditions
convert this camcorder’s HDSDI output to a
• Picture Cache function MPEG HD transport stream.
• Optical ND filters and electrical CC filters
• Hyper gamma Software Downloads
• Slow shutter function
• Frame Recording function When the unit is used with a PC connection,
• Time lapse function (interval recording) download any device drivers, plug-ins, and
• Slow & quick motion function application software you require from the
• Freeze mix function following websites.
• Focus magnification function
• Digital extender function 1) Sony Professional products website:
• Image inversion function U.S.A. http://pro.sony.com
• Assignable switches Canada http://www.sonybiz.ca
• 3.5-inch high-resolution color LCD viewfinder Latin America http://sonypro-latin.com
• Remote control Europe http://www.pro.sony.eu/pro
• Wi-Fi remote control function Middle East, Africa
1) When the optional CBK-CE01 50 Pin Interface and http://sony-psmea.com
Digital Extender is installed Russia http://sony.ru/pro/
Brazil http://sonypro.com.br
Wireless LAN support Australia http://pro.sony.com.au
New Zealand http://pro.sony.co.nz
You can connect this camcorder to a computer Japan http://www.sonybsc.com
over a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi connection) by Asia Pacific http://pro.sony-asia.com
connecting the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Korea http://bp.sony.co.kr
Adapter, CBK-WA101 Wireless Adapter, or China http://pro.sony.com.cn
IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module to the India http://pro.sony.co.in
external device connector.
A Wi-Fi connection allows you to transfer Sony Creative Software, software download
planning metadata and other files between a page:
computer and this camcorder. You can also use http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/
the Live Logging function to add shot marks to download/software_for_sony_equipment
the video currently being shot.

10 Features
 d DC OUT 12V (DC power output)
Locations and Functions connector (4-pin, female)

Chapter 1 Overview
Supplies power for an optional WRR-860C/861/
of Parts and Controls 862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner
(maximum 0.5 A).
Note
Do not connect any equipment other than the UHF
Power Supply synthesized diversity tuner.

e Battery attachment shoe

Adaptor connector (see page 11)
Attach a BP-L80S Battery Pack. Alternatively,
you can attach an AC-DN2B/DN10 AC Adaptor
to operate the camcorder on AC power supply.
For details, see “Preparing a Power Supply”
(page 29).
Note
For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the
camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the BP-L80S
Battery Pack.
Adaptor connector
Enables connection of a CA-FB70/TX70 HD
Camera Adaptor or an HDCA-702 MPEG TS
Adaptor. To connect an adaptor, remove the
cover from the connector and install the optional
CBK-CE01 50 Pin Interface and Digital
Extender.
a LIGHT switch
AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video
light is in the on position, the video light is
turned on automatically while the camcorder
is recording.
MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off
manually, using its own switch.
Note
When the camcorder is set for recording in Picture Cache
mode, it is not possible to turn on the light before
operation to start recording is carried out (or while data
is being stored in memory).

b POWER switch

c DC IN (DC power input) connector

(XLR type, 4-pin, male)

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 11

 i Viewfinder front-to-back positioning
Accessory Attachments knob (LOCK knob) (see page 30).
Chapter 1 Overview

j Fitting for optional microphone holder

(see page 39).

k Shoulder pad
Raise the shoulder pad fixing lever to adjust the
position in the front-to-rear direction (see
page 43).

l LIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin,

female)
A video light with a maximum power
consumption of 50 W, such as the Anton Bauer
Ultralight 2 or equivalent can be connected (see
page 42).

m Lens cable clamp

n MIC IN (microphone input) (+48 V)

a Shoulder strap fitting (see page 42).
connector (XLR type, 5-pin, female)
b Accessory fitting shoe (see page 42). The power (+48 V) is supplied via this connector.

c Viewfinder front-to-back positioning o LENS connector (12-pin)

lever Note

d Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable
(see page 30). to this connector, power off the camcorder first.

e Viewfinder fitting shoe p Tripod mount

q Lens mount (special bayonet mount)

f VF (viewfinder) connector (26-pin,
rectangular) Consult a Sony service representative for
information about available lenses.
g VF (viewfinder) connector (20-pin,
round) r Lens locking lever
Connect the cable of the optional DXF-51 or After inserting the lens in the lens mount, rotate
DXF-20W viewfinder. the lens mount ring with this lever to lock the lens
in position.
For connecting the DXF-51, optional parts are
After locking the lens, be sure to use the lens
required. Consult a Sony service representative for
mount securing rubber to prevent the lens from
information about connecting the DXF-51.
becoming detached.
h Lens mount securing rubber
s Lens mount cap
After locking the lens in position using the lens
Remove by pushing up the lens locking lever.
locking lever, fit this rubber over the lower of the
When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for
two projections. This fixes the lens mount,
protection from dust.
preventing it from coming loose.

12 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

 FILTER selector ND filter
Operating and Connectors Section setting

Chapter 1 Overview
2 1/ ND (attenuates light to
4
Front approximately 1/4)
3 1/ ND (attenuates light to
16
approximately 1/16)
4 1/ ND (attenuates light to
64
approximately 1/64)

You can change the “MAINTENANCE” menu

setting so that different white balance settings can
be stored for different FILTER selector positions.
This allows you to automatically obtain optimum
white balance for the current shooting conditions
in linkage with the filter selection.
For details, see “Adjusting the White Balance”
(page 48).

d MENU knob
Changes the item selection or a setting within the
menu (see page 110).

e AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/

black balance adjustment) switch
a REC START (recording start) button WHITE: Adjust the white balance automatically.
The effect is the same as that of the REC button If the WHITE BAL switch (see page 15) is
on the lens. set to A or B, the white balance setting is
stored in the corresponding memory. If the
b SHUTTER switch WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, the
Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Push to automatic white balance adjustment function
SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter does not operate.
mode setting. When this switch is operated, the BLACK: Adjust the black set and black balance
new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for automatically.
about three seconds. You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even
For details, see when the ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)
“Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 50). function is operating.
If you push the switch to the WHITE side once
Note more during the automatic white balance
When shutter is set to on while the flashband adjustment, the adjustment is cancelled and the
reduce function is set to on, the flashband reduce white balance setting returns to the original
function is set to off and the FBR indication on setting.
the display disappears. When shutter is set to off, If you push the switch to the BLACK side once
the flashband reduce function is set to on and the more during the automatic black balance
FBR indication appears on the display. adjustment, the adjustment is cancelled and the
black balance setting returns to the original
c FILTER selector setting.
When this selector is used, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three f MIC (microphone) LEVEL control (see
seconds. page 55).

FILTER selector ND filter

setting
1 CLEAR

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 13

 “Set,” the alarm tone is audible even when this
Right side (near the front) volume control is at the minimum position.
Chapter 1 Overview

ALARM

Minimum Maximum

d MONITOR (monitor volume

adjustment) knob
Controls the volume of the sound other than the
warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker
or earphones. When the knob is turned to the
minimum position, no sound can be heard.

e MONITOR (audio monitor selection)

switches
By means of combinations of the two switches,
you can select audio that you want to hear through
the built-in speaker or earphones.

Position of down-side switch: CH-1/2

Position of up-side Audio output
switch
CH-1/CH-3 Channel 1 audio
MIX Channels 1 and 2 mixed
audio (stereo) a)
CH-2/CH-4 Channel 2 audio

a ASSIGN. (assignable) 1/2/3 switches Position of down-side switch: CH-3/4

You can assign the desired functions to these Position of up-side Audio output
switches on “OPERATION” > “Assignable SW” switch
in the setup menu (see page 158). CH-1/CH-3 Channel 3 audio
The ASSIGN.1/3 switches are provided with an MIX Channels 3 and 4 mixed
indicator to show whether a function is assigned audio (stereo) a)
to the switch (ON) or not (OFF). CH-2/CH-4 Channel 4 audio

b COLOR TEMP. (color temperature) a) By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE

jack, you can hear the audio in stereo. (Under
button
“MAINTENANCE” > “Audio” in the setup menu,
You can also use this button as an assignable “Headphone Out” must be set to “Stereo.”)
switch (see page 158).
f ASSIGN. (assignable) 0 switch
c ALARM (alarm tone volume You can assign the desired function to this switch
adjustment) knob on “OPERATION” > “Assignable SW” in the
Controls the volume of the warning tone that is setup menu (see page 159).
output via the built-in speaker or optional This is a momentary type switch. Each press of
earphones. When the knob is turned to the the switch turns the function assigned to this
minimum position, no sound can be heard. switch on or off.
However, if “MAINTENANCE” > “Audio” >
“Min Alarm Volume” in the setup menu is set to

14 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

g GAIN selector j MENU ON/OFF switch
Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match This switch is used to display the menu on the

Chapter 1 Overview
the lighting conditions during shooting. The gains viewfinder screen or the test signal screen. Each
corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be time the switch is pushed down, the menu screen
selected on “OPERATION” > “Gain Switch” in is turned on and off.
the setup menu (see page 121). The function of this switch is the same as that of
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting the MENU button in the thumbnail screen
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three operations section.
seconds.
k STATUS ON/SEL/OFF (menu display
h OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic on/page selection/display off) switch
contrast control) switch MENU CANCEL/PRST (preset) /
BARS: Output the color bar signal. ESCAPE switch
CAM: Output the video signal being shot. When When the menu is not displayed, this switch
this is selected, you can switch DCC 1) on and functions as the STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch.
off. When the menu is displayed, the switch functions
1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very as the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch.
bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the
(To use the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
subject, objects in the background will be lost in the
glare. The DCC function will suppress the high
switch, open the cover.)
intensity and restore much of the lost detail and is Use the STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch in the
particularly effective in the following cases. following way.
• Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day
ON/SEL: Each time this switch is pushed
• Shooting a subject indoors, against a background
upward, a window to confirm the menu
through a window
settings and status of the camcorder appears
• Any high contrast scene
on the viewfinder screen (see page 59). Each
i WHITE BAL (white balance memory) page is displayed for about 10 seconds.
switch OFF: To clear the page immediately after display,
push this switch down to the OFF position.
PRST: Adjust the color temperature to the preset
value (the factory default setting: 3200K). Use the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
Use this setting when you have no time to switch in the following way.
adjust the white balance. CANCEL/PRST: Pushing this switch up to this
A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment position after a setting is changed in the setup
settings already stored in A or B. Push the menu displays the message to confirm
AUTO W/B BAL switch (see page 13) on whether the previous settings are cancelled.
the WHITE side, to automatically adjust the Pushing this switch up to this position again
white balance, and save the adjustment cancels the previous settings.
settings in memory A or memory B. Pushing this switch up to this position before
a setting is changed in the setup menu or after
B (ATW 1)): When this switch is set to B and a setting change is cancelled in the setup
“OPERATION” > “White Setting” > “White menu displays the message to confirm
Switch<B>” is set to “ATW” in the setup whether the setting is reset to the initial
menu, ATW is activated. value.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch Pushing this switch up to this position again
even when ATW is in use. resets the settings to the initial value.
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page,
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three which has a hierarchical structure, is opened.
seconds. Each time the switch is pushed to this
1) ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance): The white position, the page returns to one stage higher
balance of the picture being shot is adjusted in the hierarchy.
automatically for varying lighting conditions.
l Cover

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 15

 c WARNING indicator (see page 178).
Right side (near the rear)
d ACCESS lamp
Chapter 1 Overview

Lights up in blue when data is written to or read

from the recording media.

e Protection cover of the audio control

section (see page 17).

f Protection cover of the thumbnail

screen operations section (see page 17).

g F REV (fast reverse) button and

indicator
The playback speed changes in the order ×4 t
×15 t ×24 with each press of the button. The
indicator lights during high-speed playback in the
reverse direction.

h PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator

Press this button during playback to pause,
outputting a still image. At this time the indicator
flashes at a rate of once per second.
Pressing the F REV or F FWD button during
playback or pause starts high speed playback in
the forward or reverse direction.

i F FWD (fast forward) button and

indicator
The playback speed changes in the order ×4 t
×15 t ×24 with each press of the button. The
indicator lights during high-speed playback in the
forward direction.
a Built-in speaker
The speaker can be used to monitor E-E 1) sound j PREV button
during recording, and playback sound during This jumps to the first frame of the current clip.
playback. The speaker also sounds alarms to If you press this together with the F REV button,
reinforce visual warnings (see page 178). the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded
If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE clip on the recording media.
jack, the speaker output is suppressed If you press this button twice in rapid succession,
automatically. the jump is to the first frame of the last preceding
1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric”. In E-E clip (or the first frame of the current clip when no
mode, video and audio signals input to the camcorder preceding clips exist).
are output after passing through internal electric
circuits only. This can be used to check input signals. k STOP button
b Monochrome LCD panel l NEXT button
Displays remaining battery capacity, remaining This jumps to the first frame of the next clip.
media capacity, audio levels, time data, and so on If you press this together with the F FWD button,
(see page 21). the jump is to the first frame of the last recorded
clip on the recording media.

16 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

m EXPAND (expand function) button This button returns to the previous screen when
If you press this button when the thumbnail pressed during thumbnail screen display, expand

Chapter 1 Overview
screen is displayed, the duration of the selected thumbnail screen display, or shot mark thumbnail
clip is divided into fractions, and the first frame of screen display.
each of the divisions is shown in a further
thumbnail display (expand function). For an HD p DISPLAY switch
recorded MP4 clip, its duration is divided into 12. This cycles the data displayed in the time counter
If an SD recorded AVI clip comprises multiple display in the monochrome LCD panel through
files, the divisions are displayed for the individual the sequence COUNTER, TC, and U-BIT (see
files. page 21).
For MP4 clips, each time you press this button the COUNTER: Display the elapsed recording/
division is repeated. Hold down the SHIFT button playback time (hours, minutes, seconds,
and press this button to step back through the frames).
division process. TC: Display timecode.
U-BIT: Display user bits data.
n HOLD (display hold) button
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data q BACKLIGHT button
displayed in the monochrome LCD panel. (The
timecode generator continues running.) Pressing Thumbnail screen operations section and audio
this button again releases the hold. control section
For details of the counter display, see page 21.

o RESET/RETURN button
Resets the value shown in the time counter
display in the monochrome LCD panel.
According to the settings of the PRESET/
REGEN/CLOCK switch (see page 18) and the
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch (see page 18), this
button resets the display as follows.

Settings of switches To reset

DISPLAY switch: Counter to 0:00:00:00
COUNTER
DISPLAY switch: Timecode to 00:00:00:00
TC a THUMBNAIL indicator
PRESET/REGEN/ This lights when thumbnail screen is displayed.
CLOCK switch:
PRESET b THUMBNAIL button
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN Press this button to display the thumbnail screen
switch: SET (see page 96) and to carry out a thumbnail
DISPLAY switch: User bits data a) to 00 00 00 operation.
U-BIT 00 Press once more to return to the original display.
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch: c SET (set) button and arrow buttons
PRESET
Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
settings, and for thumbnail screen operations (see
switch: SET
page 102).
a) Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the When the menu is displayed, press this button to
media, those bits which can be used to record useful select an item or to confirm the setting change.
information for the user such as scene number,
shooting place, etc.
For details, see “Setting the Time Data” (page 56).

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 17

 d MENU button You can also select Shot Mark 0 and Shot Mark 3
Each press of this button turns the setup menu to Shot Mark 9.
Chapter 1 Overview

display on and off. If you have recorded clips by using planning

The function of this button is the same as that of metadata that defined names for Shot Mark 0 to
the MENU ON/OFF switch. Shot Mark 9, the defined names are displayed
instead of the above item names in the list.
e F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/
recording run) switch i SHIFT button
Selects the operating mode of the internal Use this in combination with other buttons.
timecode generator. The operating mode is set as
explained below, depending on the position of the j PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/
switch. CLOCK switch
F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless Selects the type of timecode to record.
of whether the camcorder is recording. Use PRESET: Record new timecode on the media.
this setting when synchronizing the timecode REGEN: Record timecode continuous with the
with external timecode. existing timecode recorded on the media.
SET: Sets the timecode or user bits. Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN: Timecode advances only during R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates in R-
recording. Use this setting to have a RUN mode.
consecutive timecode on the recording CLOCK: Record timecode synchronized to the
media. internal clock. Regardless of the setting of
the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the
For details, see “Setting the Timecode” (page 56)
camcorder operates in F-RUN mode.
and “Setting the User Bits” (page 57).

f LEVEL CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio k AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio

channel 1/2/3/4 recording level) knobs channel 1/2 adjustment method
selection) switches
Adjust the audio levels to be recorded on channels
1, 2, 3, and 4 when the AUDIO SELECT CH1/ Select the audio level adjustment method for each
CH2 and AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switches are of audio channels 1 and 2.
set to MANUAL. AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
g AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 (audio
channel 3/4 adjustment method l AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio
selection) switch channel 1/2/3/4 input selection) switches
Select the audio input signals to be recorded on
Select the audio level adjustment method for each
audio channels 1, 2, 3 and 4.
of audio channels 3 and 4.
FRONT: Audio input signals from the
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
microphone connected to the MIC IN
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
connector
h ESSENCE MARK button REAR: Audio input signals from an audio device
By pressing this button when the thumbnail connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
display of a clip is on the screen, you can view the connectors
following thumbnail display of the shot-marked WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the UHF
frames of that clip, depending on the item portable tuner if it is installed
selected in a list displayed on the screen.
All: Thumbnail display of all frames marked with
essence marks.
Shot Mark1: Thumbnail display of the frames
marked with Shot Mark 1
Shot Mark2: Thumbnail display of the frames
marked with Shot Mark 2

18 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

 c External device connector
Left side and upper section
Connect an optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adapter,

Chapter 1 Overview
CBK-WA101 Wireless Adapter, IFU-WLM3
USB Wireless LAN Module, or USB flash drive.
When connecting the CBK-WA01/CBK-
WA101/IFU-WLM3: You can connect the
camcorder and computer via Wi-Fi
connection (wireless connection).
When connecting a USB flash drive: You can
record, store, or load the following data.
• Planning metadata (see page 93)
• Setting data file (see page 163)
Note
Use this connector only for connecting the CBK-WA01,
CBK-WA101, IFU-WLM3, USB flash drive, or USB
media. Do not connect and use a USB hub or similar
products.
For details on Wi-Fi connection, refer to “Using Wi-
Fi Connection” (page 79).

d SxS memory card slots

These two slots (A and B) can receive SxS
memory cards or other recording media (see
page 60).

e ACCESS lamps
Indicate the state of slots A and B (see page 60).
You can check whether the lamps are lit even
when the slot cover is closed.

HDMI GENLOCK f EJECT buttons (see page 60)

IN

TC IN
g Slot cover
VIDEO
OUT
TC
OUT
Slide to the left and right to open and close.

h SLOT SELECT (SxS memory card

select) button (see page 61).

i HDMI 1) output connector

a ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches
When a video monitor provided with an HDMI
You can assign the desired functions to these
signal input connector is connected to this
switches on “OPERATION” > “Assignable SW”
connector, you can monitor picture being shot
in the setup menu (see page 159).
(camera picture) or playback picture.
Off is assigned to these switches when the
1) The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
camcorder is shipped from the factory.
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
b PC connector Licensing LLC in the United States and other
Used to put this camcorder into USB connection countries.
mode and use it as an external storage device for
a computer. When a computer without
ExpressCard slot is connected to this connector,
every memory card inserted in the camcorder is
recognized as a drive for that computer.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 19

 j GENLOCK IN (genlock signal input)
Rear
connector (BNC type)
Chapter 1 Overview

This connector inputs a reference signal when the

camcorder is to be genlocked or when timecode is to
be synchronized with external equipment. Available
reference signals vary depending on the current
system frequency as shown in the following table.

System frequency Available reference signals

1080/59.94i 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
1080/29.97P 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
1080/23.98P (PsF 1080/23.98PsF, 480/59.94i
output)
1080/23.98P 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
(Pulldown output)
720/59.94P 1080/59.94i, 720/59.94P,
480/59.94i
720/29.97P 1080/59.94i, 720/59.94P,
480/59.94i
720/23.98P 1080/59.94i, 720/59.94P,
480/59.94i
480/59.94i 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
480/29.97P 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
1080/50i 1080/50i, 576/50i
1080/25P 1080/50i, 576/50i
720/50P 1080/50i, 720/50P, 576/50i
720/25P 1080/50i, 720/50P, 576/50i
576/50i 1080/50i, 576/50i
576/25P 1080/50i, 576/50i
a TALLY (back tally) indicators (red)
(Genlock for the camera module supports Light up during recording. They will not light if
horizontal sync signals only.) Adjust the genlock the TALLY switch is set to OFF. These indicators
H-phase (phase of horizontal sync signal) on also flash to indicate warnings (see page 16). The
“MAINTENANCE” > “Genlock” in the setup tally indicator on the front of the viewfinder and
menu. the REC indication on the viewfinder screen light
or flash in the same manner.
k TC IN (timecode input) connector
For details, see “Operation Warnings” (page 178).
(BNC type)
To apply an external lock to the timecode of the b TALLY switch
camcorder, input the reference timecode. Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator
For details, see “Setting the Timecode” (page 56). function.
l VIDEO OUT connector (BNC type) c EARPHONE jack (stereo, minijack)
The output signals can be selected either You can monitor the E-E sound during recording
composite video or HD-Y depending on the and playback sound during playback. When an
setting of “OPERATION” > “Input/Output” > alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound
“Output&i.LINK” in the setup menu. through the earphone. Plugging an earphone into
the jack automatically cuts off the built-in
m TC OUT (timecode output) connector
speaker.
(BNC type)
You can select monaural or stereo on
To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the “MAINTENANCE” > “Audio” in the setup
timecode of this camcorder, connect this connector menu.
to the external VTR’s timecode input connector.

20 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

d AUDIO IN selectors
Select the audio source you connect to the
Monochrome LCD Panel

Chapter 1 Overview
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors.
LINE: When connecting a stereo amplifier or
other external audio signal source
MIC: When connecting a microphone that does
not require 48 V power supply
+48V: When connecting a microphone that
requires 48 V power supply

e HD/SD SDI OUT connectors (BNC type)

The PMW-400 has two HD/SD SDI OUT
connectors. These connectors output an HDSDI
a Timecode status
or SDSDI signal (with embedded audio). The
NDF: Appears when non-drop-frame timecode is
output from these connectors can be turned on or
selected.
off, on “OPERATION” > “Input/Output” > “SDI
EXT-LK: Appears when the internal timecode
Output” in the setup menu.
generator is locked to an external signal input
f AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel to the TC IN (timecode input) connector.
1 and channel 2 input) connectors (XLR
b Counter display mode
type, 3-pin, female)
Shows the type of information selected by the
You can connect audio equipment or a
DISPLAY switch to be displayed in the time
microphone.
counter display.
g Bottom cover COUNTER: Counter values
TC: Timecode
This is provided for protecting the cables
U-BIT: User bits data
connected to the connectors on the rear panel.
By loosening the screws which retain the cover to c Time counter display
the bottom of the camcorder, you can adjust the
Switches displays of time counter values,
position of the cover depending on the size and
timecode, and user bits data, depending on the
shape of the microphone or audio cable plugs.
position of the DISPLAY switch.
After adjusting the position, tighten the screws to
When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the
secure the cover.
timecode value, the timecode is displayed in the
h AUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5- format shown below. When the HOLD button is
pin, male) pressed again to release the hold, the timecode is
displayed in the normal format.
Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio
channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4. The
audio signals are selected by the MONITOR
switch. The three dots indicates that timecode is
displayed in the hold mode.
i REMOTE connector (8-pin)
d HOLD indication
Note
Appears when the timecode generator output is
Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control
displayed in the hold mode.
Unit to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the
camcorder POWER switch.
e Audio level indicators
j i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector (6-pin, Indicate the audio recording or playback levels of
IEEE1394 compliant, S400) channels 1 to 4.
To input and output HDV/DV streams, connect to
an HDV/DV device.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 21

 f Lock icon
Appears when the recording media is write-
Auto Focus Lens (Supplied with
Chapter 1 Overview

protected. the PMW-400K)

g Remaining media capacity indicator
Shows bar segments indicating the remaining
capacity of recording media in the slots.

h Remaining battery capacity indicator

Shows bar segments indicating the remaining
battery capacity.

a PUSH AF (auto focus) button

When the focus adjustment is in the manual mode,
by pressing this button you can use the auto focus
for an instantaneous adjustment to the subject.
When the button is pressed, the auto focus
operates until the image is in focus, then
disengages.
Even when the FOCUS switch is set to A (auto),
by pressing this button, you can restart the auto
focus.

b FOCUS switch
A (auto): The auto focus function is constantly
active. Even with the switch in the A
position, you can manually adjust the focus
by operating the focus ring.
M (manual): The manual mode allows focusing
adjustment with the focus ring.

22 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

In manual mode, auto focus adjustment is also k IRIS switch
possible, by pressing the PUSH AF button. A (auto): The iris is adjusted automatically.

Chapter 1 Overview
M (manual): Adjust the iris with the iris ring.
c MACRO switch
When this switch is in the ON position, the macro l Power zoom lever
mode is enabled, allowing focusing over the whole This is enabled when the ZOOM switch is in the
range (5 cm 1) to ∞ ) including the macro range SERVO position. Press the W end for wide-angle
(from 5 cm 1) to 90 cm from the front of the lens). and the T end for telephoto.
This operation is independent of whether the Press the lever harder for a faster zoom action.
focus adjustment mode is auto or manual.
Notes on auto focus
In the macro range, the auto focusing speed is
• In the following cases, it may be difficult to
lower.
focus on the subject. If this does happen, use
1) At the wide-angle setting
manual focusing.
d Iris ring - If the subject has no contrast
For manual iris adjustment, set the IRIS switch to - If the subject is moving rapidly
the M (manual) position, then turn this ring. - When shooting point light sources, under
street lighting or at night
e Zoom ring - When there are very bright objects close to the
For manual zoom adjustment, set the ZOOM subject
switch to the MANUAL position, then turn this - When shooting through a glass window
ring. • If there are a number of objects within the
screen at close and far range, the focus may not
f Focus ring be on the intended subject. In this case, with the
Turn this ring to adjust the focus. subject on which you want to focus in the center
This ring can be turned endlessly in both of the screen, press the PUSH AF button.
directions. The faster you turn, the faster the • After focusing with the PUSH AF button, if you
focusing mechanism operates, to minimize the operate the zoom or adjust the iris, the depth of
amount of turning required for focusing. field may become shallower, losing crisp focus.
When you slide the focus ring back (toward the In such cases, press the PUSH AF button once
camcorder), the focus mode becomes Full MF more.
mode (see page 54). • If you focus at wide-angle then zoom to
telephoto, the subject may no longer be in focus.
g Flange focal length adjustment button • It may take time until the image is in focus
Press this to adjust the flange focal length (the while using the slow shutter mode.
distance from the lens mounting flange plane to Note on zoom speed
the focusing plane) (see page 36). Depending on the shooting distance, the zoom
speed may fall as the lens approaches the
h Zoom control connector (8-pin) telephoto end.
Connecting an optional zoom servo controller
allows remote control of zooming. m RET (return video) button
You can use this as an assignable switch (see
i ZOOM switch page 162).
SERVO: Motorized zoom. Operate the zoom Use this to check the video when Lens RET is
with the power zoom lever. assigned to this button (factory default setting). If
MANUAL (manual): Manual zoom. Operate the you press this after recording stops, the last few
zoom with the zoom ring. seconds recorded appear on the viewfinder screen
(recording review) (see page 84).
j PUSH AUTO button
Pressing this button (single click) during
When the IRIS switch is in the M position for manual recording or playback records a Shot Mark 1
adjustment, press this button for an instantaneous auto mark, and double-clicking records a Shot Mark 2
adjustment. The iris is automatically adjusted while mark (see page 86).
the button is held down.

Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 23

 n VTR button VTR button on the lens, or the VTR button on the
Use this to start and stop recording. Press once to remote control unit.
Chapter 1 Overview

start recording, then press once more to stop. When an abnormality occurs, the tally indicator
flashes to indicate a warning.

Viewfinder h PEAKING control

Turning this control clockwise adjusts the picture
sharpness, and makes focusing easier. This
control has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.

i CONTRAST control
Adjusts the contrast of the screen. This control
has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.

j BRIGHT control
Adjusts the brightness of the screen. This control
has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.

k TALLY switch
Controls the tally indicator located on the front of
the viewfinder.
HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is set to
high.
OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.
LOW: The tally indicator brightness is set to low.

l ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch

a Plug Controls the zebra pattern display on the
viewfinder screen as follows.
Connect to the VF connector (26-pin) on the
ON: Display a zebra pattern.
camcorder.
OFF: Do not display a zebra pattern.
b Stopper
m DISPLAY switch
Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the
ON: Display text information.
camcorder when it is slid from side to side.
OFF: Do not display text information.
c Eyecup
n MIRROR switch
d Diopter adjustment ring The image display on the monitor screen becomes
Allows for optimal focus adjustment. reversed horizontally or vertically when the
viewfinder barrel is raised up or rotated. Use this
e Eyepiece switch to control the image display in such
You can raise this up when required by the situation. situation.
L/R: Reverse the image horizontally.
f Viewfinder barrel OFF: Do not reverse the image.
You can raise this up or rotate when required by B/T: Reverse the image vertically.
the situation.
o Viewfinder cable
g Tally indicator
p Microphone holder
Lights up when recording is started by a press of
the REC START button on this camcorder, the

24 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls

 b Zoom position (when the lens is
Viewfinder Screen mounted)

Chapter 1 Overview
Indicates the zoom position of the zoom lens in
Display the range from 0 to 99.

c Focus position (when the serial lens is

mounted)
The viewfinder screen displays not only the video Indicates the focus position as distance to the
picture but also characters and messages subject (in units of m).
indicating the camcorder settings and operating
status, a center marker, a safety zone marker, etc. d Green tally
When the menu screen is not displayed and the Lights when the camcorder is the following
DISPLAY switch is set to ON, the items for states.
which an ON setting was made with • “MAINTENANCE” > “Camera Config” > “HD
“OPERATION” > “Super Impose” in the setup SDI Remote I/F” is set to “G-Tally” in the setup
menu or with related switches are displayed at the menu and a recording control signal is output
top and bottom of the screen. from the HD/SD SDI OUT connector.
Not only these indications are displayed on the • Green tally signal received (when a camera
viewfinder screen, but a menu setting enables adaptor is mounted on the camcorder and a
them to be output as video signals. camera control unit is connected)

e Media status
Top of viewfinder screen
Displays the name of the currently active media
slot (A or B).

f Recording mode/operation status

IndicationMeaning
zREC Recording in progress
STBY Standby for recording
zCACHE Standby in Picture Cache mode
zINT REC Recording in progress in Interval
Recording mode
zINT STBY Standby for next recording in
Interval Recording mode
INT STBY Standby in Interval Recording
mode
a Extender settings
zFRM REC Recording in progress in Frame
Indicates the setting of the digital extender Recording mode
function (when optional CBK-CE01 is installed)
zFRM Standby for next recording in
of this camcorder and the setting of the lens STBY Frame Recording mode
extender.
FRM STBY Standby in Frame Recording mode
EX: The lens extender is on.
zS&Q REC Recording in progress in Slow &
08: The lens shrinker is on.
Quick Motion mode
x2D: The digital extender function of this
S&Q STBY Standby in Slow & Quick Motion
camcorder is on. mode
Ex2D: The lens extender and the digital extender
zCALL Being called from a connected
function of this camcorder are both on.
device
Digital extender function can be turned on or off
BREVIEW During recording review
by an assignable switch to which Digital Extender
is assigned.

Viewfinder Screen Display 25

 g Wireless receiver reception level l Number of system lines
When a wireless receiver is installed in the Indicates the number of system lines (1080/720/
Chapter 1 Overview

camcorder, “W” appears together with four 576/480) of video currently being recorded or
segment reception level indicators for each of the played back.
channels (1 to 4) that can be used by the receiver.
The indications are as follows. m Video format
In normal situation: The number of white Indicates the video format (see page 44).
segments indicates the strength of the signal The video aspect ratio (16:9 or 4:3) can also be
level. displayed when the recording format is set to
Muting (for an analog receiver) or error rate DVCAM.
aggravation (for a digital receiver): The
number of gray segments indicates the n Depth of field indication (when the
strength of the signal level. serial lens is mounted)
Reception level over peak: “P” is displayed Error/warning indication
instead of the indicators. 1) A bar indicates the depth of field. The display unit
Tuner battery is low: The channel number and is meters or feet, as selected on “OPERATION”
indicator of the corresponding channel > “Display On/Off” > “Lens Info” in the setup
flash. 1) menu.
1) When an optional DWR-S01D is used An error or warning message is displayed here
depending on the situation.
h Battery remaining/voltage capacity
Under this area, you can also display the name of
Type of power What is displayed
the next clip to be recorded (see page 129).
source
InfoLithium Remaining battery capacity icon o Special recording mode indication
battery and remaining recording time
The following is displayed when the camcorder is
Anton Bauer Remaining battery capacity (%
in a special recording mode.
battery indication)
• Frame Rec (Frame Recording mode)
Other type than Input voltage
• Interval Rec (Interval Recording mode)
above
• S&Q Motion (Slow & Quick Motion mode)
i External power input
p Special recording mode settings
Appears when power is supplied from an external
power source connected to the DC IN connector.
indication
Appears when the camcorder is in a special
j ALAC (magnification chromatic recording mode.
aberration correction) status
Appears when “ALAC” (see page 144) of the
MAINTENANCE menu is set to “AUTO,” and
an ALAC compatible lens is attached to the
camcorder.

k Color temperature
Displays a color temperature calculated from the
gain of R and B, in the range 1.5 K to 50.0 K (in
steps of 0.1 K). The +/– signs may be displayed
depending on the “Offset White” setting (see
page 126).
No display: “Offset White” is “Off.”
+: The value of “Offset White” is greater than
3200K.
–: The value of “Offset White” is less than
3200K.

26 Viewfinder Screen Display

 d Operation status of connected i.LINK
Bottom of viewfinder screen
device

Chapter 1 Overview
Indication Meaning
zREC HDV recording in progress
STBY Standby for HDV recording
zREC DV recording in progress
STBY Standby for DV recording

e Video level indication [M]

Suitable ND filter indication
Clip uploading status indication
An indication is displayed together with an
appropriate ND filter position number when the
light level of the subject is too high or too low.
Indicates the status for clip uploading when an
a TLCS iris control mode optional CBK-WA101 Wireless Adapter is
connected.
Icon TLCS control mode
Backlight mode f Timecode
Caution message
Standard mode Indicates the elapsed recording/playback time,
STD
timecode, user bits data or other information
Spotlight mode
selected by the DISPLAY switch (see page 17).
Also indicates a caution message when caution is
b Focus adjustment mode (when the auto required such as when you try to change settings.
focus lens is mounted)
Indicates the current focus adjustment mode of g Brightness level
the camcorder. Indicates the average brightness level (%) of the
• AF (Auto Focus mode) detection area.
• MF (Manual Focus mode)
• MF* (Manual Focus mode when the MF Assist h External input source
function is on) Indicates the type of external input signal (HDV)
• Full MF (Full Manual Focus mode) to be recorded.

c External device control i Recording of external input

“Rec2” is displayed when “MAINTENANCE” > Indicates “EXT” when an external input is
“Camera Config” > “HD SDI Remote I/F” is set recorded.
to “Chara” in the setup menu and a recording
control signal is output from the HD/SD SDI j Media remaining space indication for
OUT connector. the CBK-WA101 Wireless Adapter (not
“Rec2-P” is displayed when “MAINTENANCE” supplied)
> “Camera Config” > “HD SDI Remote I/F” is set
to “Para Rec” in the setup menu and synchronized k USB media icon indication (see
recording is performed with a compatible device. page 174) or status indication of the
CBK-WA101 Wireless Adapter (not
supplied)

l Electric color temperature filter

Appears when the CC 5600K function is set to on.

Viewfinder Screen Display 27

 m Filter position t Histogram
Indicates the currently selected ND filter position Shows a pixel distribution of video luminance
Chapter 1 Overview

number. (see page 13). (HD mode only).

When Electrical CC is assigned to an assignable
switch, the electrical filter position (A/B/C/D) u Flashband reduce status indication
appears to the right of the ND filter position (1 to Appears when “Flashband Reduce” (see
4). page 124) of the OPERATION menu is set to
“On” and the flashband reduce function is
n White balance memory activated.
Indicates the currently selected white balance
automatic adjustment memory. v Iris position (when the lens is mounted)
ATW: ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) mode Indicates the iris position and the setting for iris
W:A: Memory A mode override (reference value for the lens iris) (see
W:B: Memory B mode page 52).
W:P: Preset mode The iris override setting is indicated by four
3200: When the assignable switch to which Color segments indicator as follows.
Temp SW 3200K has been assigned is on
Reference Indicator
4300: When the assignable switch to which Color
value
Temp SW 4300K has been assigned is on
+0.25 Lower left segment is lit in grey.
5600: When the assignable switch to which Color x
Temp SW 5600K has been assigned is on
+0.5 x Left two segments are lit in grey.
6300: When the assignable switch to which Color x
Temp SW 6300K has been assigned is on
+0.75 x Left two segments and lower
xx right segment are lit in grey.
o Gain value
+1 xx All segments are lit in grey.
Indicates the gain value (in dB) of the video xx
amplifier, as set by the GAIN selector. –0.25 Lower left segment is lit in
s white.
p Recording status indication
–0.5 s Left two segments are lit in
When “OPERATION” > “Super Impose” > s white.
“Super (Rec Status Indicator)” is set to “On” in –0.75 s Left two segments and lower
the setup menu, B marks are displayed as the ss right segment are lit in white.
recording proceeds. –1 ss All segments are lit in white.
ss
q Shutter
Indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode.
For details, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter”
(page 50).

r Audio level meters

Indicate the audio levels of channel 1 and channel
2.

s Remaining media capacity

Indicates the recording time remaining for each of
the media loaded in the slots. The available time
for recording with the current video format
(recording bit rate) is calculated according to the
remaining space of each media and indicated in
time units of minutes. A lock icon appears if the
media is write-protected.

28 Viewfinder Screen Display

 Chapter 2 Preparations
Using a Battery Pack
Preparing a Power

Chapter 2 Preparations
Supply Press the battery pack against the back of the
camcorder, aligning the line on the side of the
battery pack with the line on the camcorder. Then
slide the battery pack down until its “LOCK”
arrow aligns with the line on the camcorder.
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and To detach the battery pack, pull the battery pack
AC adaptors listed below. up by holding the release button in.
• BP-L80S Lithium-ion Battery Pack
When a BP-L80S Battery Pack is used, the WARNING
camcorder can be operated continuously for Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
approximately 270 minutes. sunshine, fire or the like.
• AC power using the AC-DN2B/DN10 AC
Note
Adaptor
The battery pack operating time depends on the
• The fan and battery are consumable parts that
frequency of use of the battery pack, and the ambient
will need periodic replacement.
temperature when used.
When operating at room temperature, a normal
replacement cycle will be about 5 to 7 years. Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger
However, this replacement cycle represents
suitable for each battery.
only a general guideline and does not imply that
the life expectancy of these parts is guaranteed. For details on the battery charging procedure, refer
to the battery charger operation manual.
For details on parts replacement, contact your
dealer. Note on using the battery pack
• The life expectancy of the AC adapter and the A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully
electrolytic capacitor is about 5 years under recharged.
normal operating temperatures and normal
Notes
usage (8 hours per day; 25 days per month). If
usage exceeds the above normal usage • If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the
terminal may be damaged.
frequency, the life expectancy may be reduced
• During recording and playback (while the ACCESS
correspondingly.
lamp on the right-side panel is lit in blue and the
ACCESS lamp in the card slot section is lit in orange),
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for be careful never to remove the battery pack.
battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable • Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing
part. the battery pack.
• Power may not be supplied to the unit properly
if the pins of the battery terminal are bent or
deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they Using AC Power
become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep Mount an AC-DN2B/DN10 on the camcorder in
the unit working properly and to prolong its the same way as a battery pack, then connect to
usable lifetime. the AC power supply.
Contact a Sony service or sales representative The AC-DN2B/DN10 can supply up to 100 W of
for more information about inspections. power.

Preparing a Power Supply 29

 2 Couple the viewfinder connector to the
Attaching the Viewfinder VF connector (26-pin).
VF connector (26-pin)
Chapter 2 Preparations

CAUTION
When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the
camcorder with the eyepiece facing the sun. Direct
sunlight can enter through the eyepiece, be focused in the
viewfinder and cause fire.

Attaching the Supplied Viewfinder

Note
Upward
When attaching the viewfinder, make notes of the
following points.
• Be sure to power off the camcorder before coupling the
viewfinder connector to the camcorder’s VF connector
(26-pin). If you make this connection when the
camcorder power is on, the viewfinder may not
function properly. Detaching the viewfinder
• Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the You can detach the viewfinder by following the
camcorder’s VF connector (26-pin). If the coupling is attaching procedure in reverse order, but there is
loose, noise may appear on the video or the tally an additional action to take: when detaching the
indicator may not operate properly.
viewfinder from the fitting shoe, pull up the
stopper (see page 30).
1 1 Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right
positioning ring, 2 attach the
viewfinder to the viewfinder fitting Adjusting the Viewfinder Position
shoe, and 3 tighten the viewfinder left-
to-right positioning ring. To adjust the viewfinder left-to-right position,
Stopper loosen the left-to-right positioning ring, and to
adjust the front-to-back position, loosen the front-
to-back positioning knob.
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring

Viewfinder left-to-
right positioning
ring

Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob

30 Attaching the Viewfinder

 To raise up the viewfinder barrel
Adjusting the Viewfinder Angle Push the clip on the bottom to release and flip up
the viewfinder barrel.
You can adjust the angle of the viewfinder.
It locks at the 120-degree position.

Chapter 2 Preparations
To reverse the display (image/text indication)
vertically
The viewfinder can be rotated as much as 180
degrees toward the direction facing the subject.
When you do this, the picture and other
information displayed in the viewfinder appear
upside down. To restore the normal display, set
the MIRROR switch on the rear panel of the
viewfinder to B/T.

Lifting Up the Viewfinder Barrel

and Eyepiece
You can view the LCD screen inside the Normally use it in the locked position.
viewfinder or its mirrored image by lifting up the Although you can open it farther from the lock
viewfinder barrel or the eyepiece. position, once return it to the closed position to
This section describes how to lift up the lock it at the 120-degree position again.
viewfinder barrel and detach it. The eyepiece can
also be lifted up and detached in the same way.

LCD screen

Attaching the Viewfinder 31

 To detach the viewfinder barrel
Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus
and Screen

To adjust the viewfinder focus

Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the
viewfinder image is sharpest.
Chapter 2 Preparations

Diopter adjustment ring

You can also attach a commercially available

protection filter, close-up lens, etc. that is 52 mm
in diameter.

To adjust the viewfinder screen

Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the
viewfinder screen with the controls shown below.

1 Push the clip on the bottom to release.

2 Flip up the viewfinder barrel.

3 Slide the knob on the top to the opposite

side of the viewfinder barrel.

4 Detach the viewfinder barrel by

1 PEAKING control
horizontally sliding it. 2 CONTRAST control
To reverse the display (image/text indication) 3 BRIGHT control
horizontally
By setting the MIRROR switch on the rear panel
of the viewfinder to L/R, you can reverse the
picture and other information displayed in the
viewfinder horizontally.

32 Attaching the Viewfinder

 3 Attach the BKW-401 with the supplied
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder bolts.
Rotation Bracket
By fitting an optional BKW-401 Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket, you can rotate the viewfinder
out of the way so that your right leg does not hit
the viewfinder while you are carrying the

Chapter 2 Preparations
camcorder.

1 Loosen the front-to-back viewfinder

positioning levers and the front-to-back
viewfinder positioning knobs, and then
pull the viewfinder slide assembly
forward. Bolts supplied with the BKW-401

4 Adjust the front-to-back position so

that the arm of the BKW-401 does not
touch the handle when it is raised.
Adjust position so that arm
does not touch handle

2 Using a 2.5 mm diameter hexagonal

wrench, detach the viewfinder slide
assembly.

Bolts with
hexagonal
hole

Viewfinder slide assembly

Attaching the Viewfinder 33

 Attaching a 5-inch Electronic Viewfinder
You can attach an optional DXF-51/DXF-C50WA (5-inch) Electronic Viewfinder. To attach it, an
Accessory Shoe Kit (service part number: A-8274-968-B) is required.
For details, consult a Sony service representative.
Note
Chapter 2 Preparations

It is not possible to use the supplied viewfinder and a 5-inch viewfinder at the same time.

Remove the cover of the grip, and attach the shoe and stopper screw of the Accessory Shoe Kit.
Fixing ring

VF cable Guide plate

Shoe a)

Stopper screw a)

a) Supplied with the Accessory Shoe Kit

34 Attaching the Viewfinder

 Setting the Area of Use Setting the Date/Time of
the Internal Clock

You can set or change the date and time of the

Chapter 2 Preparations
When using the camcorder for the first internal clock. The date and time set are reflected
time in the timecode.
You cannot use the camcorder without setting the For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
area of use. Operations” (page 110).

To set the area of use 1 Select “MAINTENANCE” > “Clock

Set” > “Date/Time” in the setup menu.
1 Set the POWER switch to the ON
2 Press the MENU knob.
position.
The Date/Time setting window appears.
The screen for setting the area of use appears
in the viewfinder. 3 Turn the MENU knob to display the
desired value, and press the knob.
2 Press the MENU knob.
The selection shifts to the next item on the
The settings for selectable areas of use are
right.
displayed.

3 Turn the MENU knob to select the

4 To continue the remaining settings,
repeat step 3.
desired area of use.

Setting Area of use 5 Making sure that “SET” is selected,

NTSC Area NTSC area (for areas other press the MENU knob.
The internal clock is set with the date and
than Japan) a)
b)
time set in steps 3 and 4.
NTSC(J) Area NTSC area (Japan)
PAL Area To cancel the setting
PAL area c)
Before executing step 5, push the MENU
a) The composite signal output from this camcorder CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch up to the
is an NTSC signal with a black setup (7.5 IRE). CANCEL/PRST side.
The system frequency is 59.94i.
b) The composite signal output from this camcorder
is an NTSC signal with no black setup. The
system frequency is 59.94i.
c) The composite signal output from this camcorder
is a PAL signal. The system frequency is 50i.

4 Set the following items.

• Time Zone
• Date/Time
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations”
(page 110).

5 Turn the MENU knob to select

“Finish”, then press the MENU knob.
The camcorder is now ready for use.

Setting the Area of Use / Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock 35
 lens is firmly locked. It is recommended that
Mounting and Adjusting the lens mount securing rubber be put on the
lens locking lever as illustrated above.
the Lens
4 Connect the lens cable to the LENS
connector.

5 Secure the lens cable with the cable

Chapter 2 Preparations

Note clamps.
Always power the camcorder off before mounting or
removing a lens.
If you have attached an aberration correction
lens
For information about using the lens, refer to the
The aberration correction function is activated
operation manual for the lens.
automatically. Starting the camcorder with an
aberration correction lens may require more time
Lens mount than normally because of data loading at start-up.
securing rubber The lens supplied with the PMW-400 is an
aberration correction lens. Contact a Sony service
representative for information about other
aberration correction lenses.

Adjusting the Flange Focal Length

If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you
zoom from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the
flange focal length (the distance from the plane of
the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane).
Make this adjustment just one time after
mounting or changing the lens.
When carrying out the adjustment, use the
supplied flange focal length adjustment chart as
the subject.

1 Push the lens locking lever up and About 3 m (10 ft)

remove the lens mount cap from the
lens mount.

2 Align the center pin on the lens with the

center slot in the lens mount, and insert Notes
the lens into the mount. • If you use a subject with insufficient contrast, or
move the camcorder or subject during
3 Holding the lens in place, push the lens adjustment, this will cause an adjustment error.
locking lever down to lock the lens. • Place the subject (the flange focal length
adjustment chart) so that it appears at the center
Caution
of the screen at the telephoto end. Arrange so
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come that no nearby object (no object closer to the
off while the camcorder is being used. This
could cause a serious accident. Make sure the

36 Mounting and Adjusting the Lens

 camera than the chart) enters the screen at the 4 Use manual or power zoom to set the
wide-angle end. lens to telephoto.

Carrying out the adjustment 5 Point the camcorder at the chart by

turning the focus ring and focus on it.
When using the auto focus lens
With the lens supplied with the PMW-400, zoom 6 Set the zoom ring to wide angle.
and focus operations automatically adjust the
7

Chapter 2 Preparations
flange focal length. Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart
is in focus, being careful not to disturb
1 Open the iris, position the supplied the focus ring.
flange focal length adjustment chart
approximately 3 meters (10 ft) away 8 Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays
from the camcorder, and arrange the in focus all the way from wide angle to
lighting to obtain a satisfactory video telephoto.
output.
9 Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing
2 Set the ZOOM switch to SERVO screws.
(power zoom mode).

3 Hold down the flange focal length

adjustment button for 3 seconds.

The flange focal length adjustment starts.

During adjustment
The message “AUTO FB Adjust
EXECUTING” appears on the viewfinder
screen.
If the adjustment completes correctly
The message on the viewfinder screen
changes to “Auto FB Adjust: OK.”
If the flange focal length adjustment does
not complete correctly
Check the subject and lighting conditions,
and repeat the adjustment.
When using a non-auto focus lens

1 Set the iris to manual.

2 Open the iris, position the supplied

flange focal length adjustment chart
approximately 3 meters (10 ft) away
from the camcorder, and arrange the
lighting to obtain a satisfactory video
output.

3 Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or

F.B ring (flange focal length adjustment
ring).

Mounting and Adjusting the Lens 37

 Preparing the Audio
Input System
Chapter 2 Preparations

Connecting a Microphone to the

MIC IN Connector
Attach the supplied microphone to the
microphone holder of the supplied viewfinder.

1 Loosen the screw and open the

microphone holder clamp.
Microphone holder clamp

On how to perform this operation, refer to the

operation manual for the microphone.

3 Plug the microphone cable into the MIC

IN connector, then set the AUDIO IN
switch for the channel on which you
want to record the audio from this
microphone to FRONT.
2 Place the microphone in the
microphone holder.

1 Wind the microphone spacer around

the microphone, while peeling off the
protective sheets on both sides of the
microphone spacer.
2 Place the microphone in the holder so
that “UP” is at the top.
3 Close the microphone holder.
4 Tighten the screw.

4 Secure the microphone cable with the

cable clamp.

38 Preparing the Audio Input System

Connecting Microphones to the
AUDIO IN Connectors
You can connect up to two monaural
microphones to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
connectors, using an optional CAC-12
Microphone Holder.

Chapter 2 Preparations
The following is the procedure for attaching an
electret condenser microphone such as the ECM-
674/678.
On how to attach the CAC-12, refer to the operation
manual for the CAC-12.
2 Connect the microphone cable to the
AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector.
1 Attach the electret condenser
3 Set the switches as follows.
microphone.
• Set the AUDIO IN selectors indicated
1 Loosen the ball joint lock lever. below, depending on the power supply type
2 Wind the microphone spacer (sheet of the microphone.
Internal power supply: MIC
type, supplied with the microphone)
External power supply: +48V
around the microphone, while peeling
• Set the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 switch for the
off the protective sheets on both sides
channel to which the microphone is
of the microphone spacer.
connected to REAR.
3 Place the microphone in the holder so
that “UP” is at the top.
4 Close the microphone holder.
5 Tighten the screw.
6 Position so that the microphone does
not interfere with the viewfinder and
tighten the ball joint lock lever.

1 AUDIO IN selectors
2 Monaural microphone
3 AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 switches
Microphone
4 To AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector

4 Switch the input level to match the

sensitivity of the microphone used.
Switch the input level by changing the setting of
“MAINTENANCE” > “Audio” > “Rear MIC
CH1/CH2 Ref” in the setup menu (factory
default setting is “–60 dB”). For details, see
page 139.

Preparing the Audio Input System 39

 Notes 2 Insert the DWR-S01D or WRR-855S
• If the input level on the camcorder is not at an into the housing slot, and fasten the four
appropriate setting for the microphone sensitivity, loud fixing screws.
sounds may be distorted, and the signal-to-noise ratio DWR-S01D or WRR-855S
may be affected.
• In order for the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors
on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V
power supply, female XLR connectors (3-pin) are
Chapter 2 Preparations

fitted. If the microphone cable has a female connector,

use an adaptor.
• When you detach a CAC-12 Microphone Holder once
you have attached to the camcorder, be careful not to
lose the two screws fixing the CAC-12 (in step 1).
After detaching the CAC-12, be sure to put the two
screws back into their original places.
3 Set the AUDIO IN selector for the
channel to which you want to input
Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner audio signal to WIRELESS (see
(for a UHF Wireless Microphone page 18).
System)
To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system,
power the camcorder off and then fit one of the
following UHF portable tuners.
• DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver
• WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
• WRR-860C/861/862 UHF Synthesized
Diversity Tuner
For details of these units, refer to the operation
manuals for them.
Note
The optional WRR Mount Bracket (service part number:
A-1999-908-B) is required to fit the WRR-862.
For details, contact your vendor or a Sony service
representative

To fit the DWR-S01D or WRR-855S

1 Remove the four fixing screws holding

the cover of the portable tuner/receiver
housing slot located in the rear of the
camcorder, to remove the cover.

40 Preparing the Audio Input System

 Note
Tripod Mounting The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged
position even after the camcorder is removed. If this
happens, press the red button and move the lever as
shown above until the pin returns to the stowed position.
If the pin remains in the engaged position, you will not
be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.

1 Attach the optional VCT-14/U14

Chapter 2 Preparations
Tripod Adaptor to the tripod.

2 Mount the camcorder on the tripod

adaptor.

Slide the camcorder forward along the

groove in the adaptor until it clicks.

3 Make sure that the camcorder is

securely attached by moving it back and
forth.

To remove the camcorder from the tripod

adaptor
Hold down the red button and pull the lever in the
direction of the arrow.

Red button

Lever

Tripod Mounting 41
 Connecting a Video Using the Shoulder
Light Strap

With this camcorder, you can use the Anton

Chapter 2 Preparations

Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light

To attach the shoulder strap
(powered by 12 V with maximum power
consumption of 50 W). 1 Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap
• If you connect the video light to the LIGHT fitting.
connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT Pull up the strap to lock the fitting.
switch to AUTO, you can turn the light on and
off automatically as you start and stop recording
on this camcorder.
• The output of the LIGHT connector on the
camcorder is controlled to 12 V even when the
camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power
(through the DC IN connector or battery pack).
The brightness or color temperature of the light
will not change according to voltage increase.
Notes Clip
• Do not use a video light with power consumption of
over 50 W. 2 Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap
• The brightness or color temperature of the light will fitting on the other side of the grip in the
change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN same way as in step 1.
connector or from the battery pack) is under 12 V.
To remove the shoulder strap
To attach the video light
Press here and pull in the direction
Fit the video light to the accessory fitting shoe on shown by the arrow to release.
the camcorder grip, and connect the video light
cable to the LIGHT connector.
Note
The accessory fitting shoe on the camcorder is of the
1/ -inch tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with
4
a slide-type shoe, use the supplied cold shoe kit.

42 Connecting a Video Light / Using the Shoulder Strap

 Adjusting the Shoulder
Pad Position

You can slide the shoulder pad back and forth

Chapter 2 Preparations
within a 40 mm range. This adjustment helps you
get the best balance for shooting with the
camcorder on your shoulder.

Shoulder pad

1 Raise the lever in the center of the

shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder
pad.

2 Slide the shoulder pad backward or

forward until it is in the most
convenient position.

3 Bring down the lever to lock the

shoulder pad in the selected position.

Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position 43

 Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 110).

Setting the Video Format

Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

The following recording formats can be selected for different combinations of video resolution and system
frequency.

In UDF mode

Setting items of “OPERATION” > “Format” Video format (recording Frame size
HD/SD HD System Rec Format System Frequency a) format/system frequency)
Line
HD 1080 HD422 59.94i HD422 1920/59.94i 1920×1080
50 50i HD422 1920/50i
29.97P HD422 1920/29.97P
25P HD422 1920/25P
23.98P HD422 1920/23.98P
HD420 59.94i HQ 1920/59.94i 1920×1080
HQ1920 50i HQ 1920/50i
29.97P HQ 1920/29.97P
25P HQ 1920/25P
23.98P HQ 1920/23.98P
HD420 59.94i HQ 1440/59.94i 1440×1080
HQ1440 50i HQ 1440/50i
29.97P HQ 1440/29.97P
25P HQ 1440/25P
23.98P HQ 1440/23.98P
720 HD422 59.94P HD422 1280/59.94P 1280×720
50 50P HD422 1280/50P
29.97P HD422 1280/29.97P
25P HD422 1280/25P
23.98P HD422 1280/23.98P
HD420 59.94P HQ 1280/59.94P
HQ1280 50P HQ 1280/50P
23.98P b) HQ 1280/23.98P

44 Setting the Video Format

Setting items of “OPERATION” > “Format” Video format (recording Frame size
HD/SD HD System Rec Format System Frequency a) format/system frequency)
Line
SD — IMX50 59.94i IMX50/59.94i 720×486
50i IMX50/50i 720×576
29.97P c) IMX50/29.97P 720×486
25P c) IMX50/25P 720×576
DVCAM 59.94i DVCAM/59.94i 720×480
50i DVCAM/50i 720×576
29.97P c) DVCAM/29.97P 720×480
25P c) DVCAM/25P 720×576

a) 59.94i/29.97P/59.94P/23.98P: When “OPERATION” > “Format” > “Country” in the setup menu is set to “NTSC

Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

Area” or “NTSC(J) Area”
50i/25P/50P: When “OPERATION” > “Format” > “Country” in the setup menu is set to “PAL Area”
b) Converted to 59.94i by 2-3 pulldown processing and recorded
c) Converted to PsF and recorded

In exFAT mode

Setting items of “OPERATION” > “Format” Video format (recording Frame size
HD/SD HD System Rec Format System Frequency a) format/system frequency)
Line
HD 1080 XAVC-I 59.94i XAVC-I 1920/59.94i 1920×1080
XAVC-L50 XAVC-L50 1920/59.94i
XAVC-L35 XAVC-L35 1920/59.94i
XAVC-L25 XAVC-L25 1920/59.94i
50i XAVC-I 1920/50i
XAVC-L50 1920/50i
XAVC-L35 1920/50i
XAVC-L25 1920/50i
29.97P XAVC-I 1920/29.97P
XAVC-L50 1920/29.97P
XAVC-L35 1920/29.97P
25P XAVC-I 1920/25P
XAVC-L50 1920/25P
XAVC-L35 1920/25P
23.98P XAVC-I 1920/23.98P
XAVC-L50 1920/23.98P
XAVC-L35 1920/23.98P
720 XAVC-I 59.94P XAVC-I 1280/59.94P 1280×720
XAVC-L50 XAVC-L50 1280/59.94P
50P XAVC-I 1280/50P
XAVC-L50 1280/50P
a) 59.94i/29.97P/59.94P/23.98P: When “OPERATION” > “Format” > “Country” in the setup menu is set to “NTSC
Area” or “NTSC(J) Area”
50i/25P/50P: When “OPERATION” > “Format” > “Country” in the setup menu is set to “PAL Area”

Setting the Video Format 45

 In FAT mode

Setting items of “OPERATION” > “Format” Video format (recording Frame size
HD/SD HD System Rec Format System Frequency a) format/system frequency)
Line
HD 1080 HQ 1920 59.94i HQ 1920/59.94i 1920×1080
50i HQ 1920/50i
29.97P HQ 1920/29.97P
25P HQ 1920/25P
23.98P HQ 1920/23.98P
HQ 1440 59.94i HQ 1440/59.94i 1440×1080
50i HQ 1440/50i
29.97P HQ 1440/29.97P
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

25P HQ 1440/25P
23.98P HQ 1440/23.98P
SP 1440 59.94i SP 1440/59.94i
50i SP 1440/50i
23.98P b) SP 1440/23.98P
720 HQ 1280 59.94P HQ 1280/59.94P 1280×720
50P HQ 1280/50P
29.97P HQ 1280/29.97P
25P HQ 1280/25P
23.98P HQ 1280/23.98P
SD — DVCAM 59.94i DVCAM/59.94i 720×480
50i DVCAM/50i 720×576
29.97P c) DVCAM/29.97P 720×480
25P c) DVCAM/25P 720×576
a) 59.94i/29.97P/59.94P/23.98P: When “OPERATION” > “Format” > “Country” in the setup menu is set to “NTSC
Area” or “NTSC(J) Area”
50i/25P/50P: When “OPERATION” > “Format” > “Country” in the setup menu is set to “PAL Area”
b) Converted to 59.94i by 2-3 pulldown processing and recorded
c) Converted to PsF and recorded

46 Setting the Video Format

Selecting the Recording Mode
Adjusting the Black
Select the recording mode between UDF, exFAT,
and FAT.
Balance and the White
Balance
1 Select “OPERATION” > “Format” >
“File System” in the setup menu (see
page 113). Black balance and white balance adjustment
values that are automatically set by the camcorder
2 Turn the MENU knob to select “UDF,” and the various settings are stored in the
“exFAT,” or “FAT,” and press the camcorder memory and retained even when the
knob. power is turned off.
A confirmation message appears.

Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

Black balance adjustment
3 Select “Execute” to execute, or select
The black balance will require adjustment in the
“Cancel” to cancel, and then press the following cases.
MENU knob. • When the camcorder is used for the first time
• When the camcorder has not been used for a
4 Power the camcorder off and on again.
long time
• When the camcorder is used under conditions in
Changing the Video Format which the surrounding temperature has changed
greatly
1 Select “OPERATION” > “Format” in • When the GAIN selector (L/M/H/Turbo) values
the setup menu (see page 113). have been changed with “OPERATION” >
“Gain Switch” in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the item
to change, and press the knob. White balance adjustment
Always readjust the white balance when the
3 Turn the MENU knob to change the
lighting conditions change.
setting, and press the knob.
A confirmation message appears.
Adjusting the Black Balance
4 Select “Execute” to execute, or select
“Cancel” to cancel, and then press the In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are
MENU knob. performed in the following order: black set and
black balance. Manual black balance adjustment
5 When the setting of HD/SD or Country can be selected from the setup menu.
was changed, power the camcorder off
and on again. Note
Automatic black balance adjustment is disabled in the
following case.
• During recording
• In a special recording modes (Picture Cache Rec,
Interval Rec, Frame Rec, Slow & Quick)
• When the shutter mode is SLS

1 Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.

Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 47

 2 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
BLACK and release the switch. Adjusting the White Balance
The message “Executing...” appears during
execution, and changes to “Done” when the
1 Set the switches and selectors as shown
below.
adjustment finishes. Adjustment values are
• GAIN switch: L (set to a gain value that is
saved to memory automatically.
as small as possible)
Notes • OUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM
• During the black balance adjustment, the iris is • WHITE BAL switch: A or B 1)
automatically closed. 1) Adjustment values are saved to memory B only
• During the black balance adjustment, the gain when “OPERATION” > “White Setting” >
selection circuit is automatically activated so you may “White Switch<B>” in the setup menu is set to
see flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not “Memory.”
a fault.
2
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

• Output from the i.LINK connector stops temporarily if Set the FILTER selector to suit the
you execute black balance adjustment during i.LINK lighting conditions as follows.
output. Output from the connector resumes when black
balance adjustment finishes. 3 Place a white test card under the same
lighting conditions as for the subject to
If automatic black balance adjustment be shot and zoom up to it.
cannot be made Alternatively, any white object such as a
cloth or a wall can be used.
Error message Meaning The absolute minimum white area is as
NG: Iris Not The lens iris did not close; follows.
Closed adjustment was impossible. Rectangle centered on the screen. The
NG: Timeout Adjustment could not be lengths of the sides are 70% of the length
completed within the standard and width of the screen.
number of attempts.
NG: Out of The difference between the
Range reference value and the current
value is so great that it exceeds
the range. Adjustment was
impossible.

If any of the above error messages is displayed,

retry the black balance adjustment. Note
If the error message occurs again, an internal Make sure there are not bright spots in the
check is necessary. rectangle.
For information about this internal check, contact
your vendor or a Sony service representative. 4 Adjust the lens iris.
Manually adjusted lens: set the iris to an
Note appropriate setting.
If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS Lens with automatic iris: set the automatic/
connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris. If manual switch on the lens to automatic.
this happens, the black balance will be incorrect.
5 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
WHITE and then release the switch.
The message “Executing...” appears during
execution, and changes to “OK: (color
temperature of subject)” when the
adjustment finishes.
The adjustment values are saved
automatically in the memory selected in
step 1 (A or B).

48 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance

 Note
To change the color temperature when
If the camcorder has a zoom lens with an automatic the ND filter is switched
iris, the iris may hunt 1) during the adjustment. To
prevent this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as You can assign electrical CC (color correction)
IG, IS, or S) on the lens. filters to ND filters (see page 13). This allows you
For details, refer to the lens operation manual. to change the color temperature automatically
when the ND filter is switched.
1) Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of
the image, resulting from repeated response to 1 Set “MAINTENANCE” > “White
automatic iris control. Filter” > “ND Filter C.Temp” in the
If the automatic white balance adjustment setup menu (see page 146) to “On.”
cannot be made
2 To assign an electrical CC filter to
Error message Meaning FILTER selector position number 1,

Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

NG: Low Light The white video level is too low. select “ND FLT C.Temp<1>.” To assign
Either open the lens iris or it to positions 2 to 4, select “ND FLT
increase the gain. C.Temp<2-4>.”
NG: Timeout Adjustment could not be
completed within the standard 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the
number of attempts. desired color temperature.
NG: High Light The white video level is too As you turn the MENU knob, the color
high. Either stop down the lens temperature changes as follows: 3200K y
iris or change the ND filter. 4300K y 5600K y 6300K.
If any of the above error messages is displayed,
retry the white balance adjustment. If the error
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required.
message occurs again, an internal check is
necessary. To switch between electrical CC filters
For information about this internal check, contact
with an assignable switch
your vendor or a Sony service representative. You can assign the function that switches
between electrical CC filters to an assignable
If you have no time to adjust the white switch. This allows you to switch between color
balance temperatures (3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) that
have been assigned to up to four positions (A to
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST. D) with each press of the assignable switch.
This makes it possible to automatically set the Regardless of assignments to assignable
white balance to 5600K (factory default value) by switches, you can also switch between the color
pressing the COLOR TEMP. button. temperatures assigned to each position from a
The color temperature to which the white balance RM-B170/B750 Remote Control Unit.
is set when the COLOR TEMP. button is pressed
can be selected from among 3200K, 4300K, 1 Select “MAINTENANCE” > “White
5600K, and 6300K on OPERATION Filter” in the setup menu (see page 146).
>Assignable SW in the setup menu. You can also
assign color temperatures to the ASSIGN. 1/3 2 Select the position to which to assign a
switches or ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches. CC filter by selecting one of “Electrical
CC<A>” to “Electrical CC <D>,” and
then turn the MENU knob to select the
desired color temperature.
As you turn the MENU knob, the color
temperature changes as follows: 3200K y
4300K y 5600K y 6300K.

Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 49

 To set no color temperature
Select “-----” with “Electrical CC<C>” or
“Electrical CC<D>” selected.
Setting the Electronic
When the assignable switch is pressed, the Shutter
setting for that position is not displayed. For
example, if “-----” is set for one position, then
switching between the remaining three
positions is carried out.
Shutter Modes
3 Repeat step 2 as required.

4 Assign the electrical CC filter switching Standard mode

function (ELECTRICAL CC) to an Select this mode for shooting fast-moving
assignable switch (see page 161). subjects with little blurring.
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

You can set the shutter speed in one of two shutter

White balance memory modes: Speed mode, in which the speed is set in
seconds, and Angle mode, in which the speed is
Values stored in memory are held until the white
set in degrees.
balance is next adjusted even when the camcorder
power is turned off. Speed mode
The camcorder has two white balance memories, System Shutter speed (unit: seconds)
A and B. You can automatically save adjustment frequency
values for each ND filter in the memory that 59.94i 1/ 1/ 1 1 1 1
60, 100, /120, /125, /250, /500,
corresponds to the WHITE BAL switch setting 59.94P 1/ 1
(A or B). The camcorder has four built-in ND 50i 1000, /2000
filters, allowing you to save a total of eight 50P
adjustment values (4 × 2). However, the contents 29.97P 1/ a), 1/ a) 1/ , 1/ 1 1
40 50 , 60 100, /120, /125,
of the memories are not linked to ND filter 1/ , 1/ 1 1
settings in the following cases. 250 500, /1000, /2000
25P 1/ a), 1/ a), 1/ 1/ , 1/ 1
• When the number of memories allocated to 33 50 60, 100 120, /125,
each of A and B is limited to one by setting 1/ , 1/ 1 1
250 500, /1000, /2000
“OPERATION” > “White Setting” > “Filter 23.98P 1/ a), 1/ a), 1/ a), 1/ , 1/ , 1/ ,
White Memory” in the setup menu to “Off.” 32 48 50 60 96 100
1/ 1 1 1 1 1
• When the electrical CC filter switching function 120, /125, /250, /500, /1000, /2000
has been assigned to an assignable switch, or
when a remote control unit has been connected. a) This speed cannot be selected when the camcorder is
in Slow & Quick Motion mode and “OPERATION” >
(In these cases, the contents of white balance
“Rec Function” > “Frame Rate” in the setup menu is
memory are linked to electrical CC filter
set to a value that is greater than the system frequency.
positions (A to D).)
Angle mode
Also, when “OPERATION” > “White Setting” > 180°, 90°, 45°, 22.5°, and 11.25°
“White Switch<B>” in the setup menu is set to
“ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance),” and the ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode
WHITE BAL switch is set to B, the ATW Select this mode for obtaining images with no
function is activated to automatically adjust the horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects
white balance of the picture being shot for such as monitor screens.
varying lighting conditions. As shown in the following tables, the range of
Note shutter speeds that can be set varies depending on
whether the Slow & Quick Motion (S&Q)
While the ATW function is activated, the color
temperature of the subject may differ from the color function is on or off.
temperature that is displayed on the viewfinder screen.

50 Setting the Electronic Shutter

System lines: 1080 2 Turn the MENU knob to select
System Shutter speed (unit: Hz) “Second” or “Degree,” and then press
frequency S&Q: Off S&Q: On the knob.
59.94i 60.00 to 3800 —
50i 50.00 to 3500 — To set the shutter mode and standard-
29.97P 29.99 to 4100 32.01 to 4100 mode shutter speed
23.98P 23.99 to 3700 32.02 to 3700 Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained
25P 25.00 to 3900 32.03 to 3900 even when the camcorder power is turned off.
System lines: 720 1 Push the SHUTTER selector from ON
System Shutter speed (unit: Hz) to SELECT.
frequency S&Q: Off S&Q: On The current shutter setting indication appears
59.94P 60.07 to 4100 32.01 to 4100 for about three seconds.

Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

50P 50.03 to 3900 32.03 to 3900
29.97P 29.99 to 4100 32.01 to 4100 2 Before the shutter setting indication
23.98P 23.99 to 3700 32.02 to 3700 disappears, push the SHUTTER
25P 25.00 to 3900 32.03 to 3900 selector down to SELECT again and
repeat this until the desired mode or
speed appears.
SLS (slow speed shutter) mode
When all modes and speeds are displayed,
Select this mode for shooting subjects in low level the display changes in the following order.
lighting conditions.
Note
Number of accumulated frames Depending on the frame rate setting (see page 117),
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16, 32, 64 some shutter speeds cannot be selected in Slow & Quick
Motion mode. These speeds are replaced by the slowest
Notes selectable shutter speed.
• SLS mode cannot be used when the video format is SP Example: If you perform Slow & Quick Motion
1440/23.98P or when the camcorder is in Slow & shooting when setting the frame rate to 60 and the video
Quick Motion mode. format to HQ1280/29.97P
• It is not possible to output the color bar signal, turn the The shutter speed is indicated as follows.
SLS mode on or off, or change the number of
accumulated frames when the number of accumulated When Slow & Quick Motion mode is off
frames is set to 16, 32 or 64. 1/40t1/50t1/60t1/100t...

When Slow & Quick Motion mode is on

Selecting the Shutter Mode and 1/60t1/60t1/60t1/100t...
Shutter Speed
To set the shutter speed in ECS mode
Notes
• When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as 1 Set the shutter mode to ECS (see the
the shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of previous item).
field.
• The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on the 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the
current system frequency.
desired frequency or number of frames.

To switch between Speed mode and To set the shutter speed in SLS mode
Angle mode
1 Set “OPERATION” > “Shutter” >
1 Select “OPEARTION” > “Shutter” > “Slow Shutter” in the setup menu to
“Shutter Select” in the setup menu (see “On” (see page 127).
page 127).

Setting the Electronic Shutter 51

 2 Select the desired number of
accumulated frames with Changing the Reference
“OPERATION” > “Shutter” > “SLS
Frames” in the setup menu. Value for Automatic Iris
Adjustment
The reference value for automatic iris adjustment
can be changed to aid the shooting of clear
pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent blown-
out highlights. The reference value for the lens
iris can be set within the following range with
respect to the standard value.
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

• 0.25 to 1 (increasing by increments of 0.25):

About 0.25 to 1 stop further open
• –0.25 to –1 (decreasing by increments of 0.25):
About 0.25 to 1 stop further close
Also you can set the area where light detection
occurs.

To change the reference value

1 Set “OPERATION” > “Auto Iris” >

“Iris Override” in the setup menu to
“On” (see page 124).

2 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.

3 Turn the MENU knob to change the

reference value.
Note
Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is
not ECS.

An indicator of the current reference value is

shown at the iris position indication (see
page 28) on the viewfinder screen.
To make the iris more open
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as
seen from the front of the camcorder.
Select one of 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, or 1.
To stop down the iris
Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen
from the front of the camcorder.
Select one of –0.25, –0.5, –0.75, or –1.

The changed reference value is retained until

the power of the camcorder is turned off.
Even if the reference value is changed, it
reverts to the standard value every time the
power is turned on.

52 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment

To set the automatic iris window
Zooming
1 Set “OPERATION” > “Auto Iris” >
“Iris Window Indication” in the setup
menu to “On.”
The current automatic iris window appears
on the viewfinder screen.
If it is not necessary to display the auto iris Switching between Zoom Modes
window on the screen, set to “Off.”
Set the ZOOM switch to SERVO (servo zoom) or
2 Turn the MENU knob to select “Iris MANU (manual zoom).
Window,” and then press the knob.

Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

3 Turn the MENU knob until the desired Using Manual Zoom
auto iris window appears, and then
press the knob. Turn the zoom ring.

Using Servo Zoom

The shaded parts indicate the
Operate the power zoom lever.
area where light detection
The current lens zoom position appears in the
viewfinder, over the range 0 (wide-angle) to 99
If you select “Var,” the following items
(telephoto) (see page 25).
become effective and you can set the window
Push to the W (wide) side when you want wide-
of the desired size. Set the following items
angle, and push to the T (telephoto) side when
with “MAINTENANCE” > “Auto Iris2.”
you want telephoto. The zoom speed increases
Item Setting when you push the lever deeply, and decreases
Iris Var Width The width of the window when you push less deeply.
Iris Var Height The height of the window
Iris Var H The position of the window
Position in the horizontal direction
Iris Var V The position of the window
Position in the vertical direction.
When you exit the menu, the auto iris window
selected in step 3 appears.
Unless you need to keep this window displayed,
set “OPERATION” > “Auto Iris” > “Iris Window
Indication” in the setup menu to “Off.”

To counter problems with very bright

highlights
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too
much, leaving the overall image dark, or the
highlights may be blown out. In such cases,
setting the highlight clip function on reduces the
luminance range, avoiding problems from the
automatic iris correction.
Set “OPERATION” > “Auto Iris” > “Clip High
Light” in the setup menu to “On.”

Zooming 53
 Using the focus ring
Adjusting the Focus Focus by turning the focus ring while viewing the
viewfinder.
The distance indications on the ring are invalid in
MF mode.

Note
One-push auto focus
The lens is designed with an extra margin at the infinity Press the PUSH AF button. Auto focus is enabled
position (∞ ), to compensate for focus drifting due to temporarily.
variations in temperature. When shooting a subject at One-push auto focus ends when the subject is
infinity in MF or Full MF mode, check the picture in the brought into focus.
viewfinder as you focus.
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

MF assist function
Adjusting in Full MF Mode When the MF assist function is on (see page 160),
auto focus starts when you stop adjusting with the
When you slide the focus ring back (toward the focus ring, enabling fine adjustments with the
camcorder), the focus mode becomes Full MF subject at the center of the screen.
mode, in which all focus adjustments are manual. Auto focusing by the MF assist function ends
when the fine adjustments end.
Note
When you slide the focus ring back, the focus instantly
moves to the mark position. Adjusting in AF Mode
Focus by turning the focus ring while viewing the When you slide the focus ring forward, and set the
viewfinder. FOCUS switch to A (auto), the focus mode
The distance indications on the ring are valid in becomes AF mode, in which auto focus is always
Full MF mode. The distances where the picture is active.
in focus correspond to absolute positions of the The distance indications on the ring are invalid in
focus ring. AF mode.

Peaking
Using Macro Mode
You can turn the PEAKING knob on the
viewfinder to use the peaking function. Edges are When the focus mode is MF or AF, you can set
emphasized in the monitor picture, which the MACRO switch to the ON side to enable
facilitates manual focusing. macro mode. Macro mode allows you to focus
The recorded video signals are not affected. over the range that includes the macro area.
Macro mode is disabled in Full MF mode.
Adjusting in MF Mode
When you slide the focus ring forward (toward
the lens hood), and set the FOCUS switch to M
(manual), the focus mode becomes MF mode, in
which focus adjustments are manual but auto
focus is available only when necessary.

54 Adjusting the Focus

 “MAINTENANCE” > “Audio” in the setup
Adjusting the Audio menu,

Level Rear1/WRR Level: Channel 1 recording level

(see page 141)
Rear2/WRR Level: Channel 2 recording level
(see page 141)
When you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to Note
AUTO, the input levels of analog audio signals
When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH1/CH2)
recorded on each channel are adjusted knobs and MIC LEVEL control linked together, if the
automatically. You can also make manual MIC LEVEL control is set to 0, the audio signals on
adjustments. channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position
of the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL
Note

Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

(CH1/CH2) knobs.
Even if you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO,
the input levels of digital audio signals are not adjusted
automatically. Manually Adjusting the Audio
Target audio level for manual audio level Level of the MIC IN Connector
adjustment
Make adjustment using –20 dB as the target level. 1 Set either or both of the AUDIO IN
If the audio level meter shows a maximum level switch(es) to FRONT.
of 0 dB, then it indicates that the input audio level
is excessive. 2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for
the desired channel(s) selected in step 1
to MANUAL.
Manually Adjusting the Audio
Levels of the Audio Inputs from 3 Turn the MIC LEVEL control, and
adjust so that the audio level meter
the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
shows up to –20 dB for a normal input
Connectors volume.
1 To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO
IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector, set the Correspondence between recording level
AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch to adjustments and audio level controls
REAR. You can select which audio level control controls
To adjust both input signals, set both the audio recording level of the front microphone
switches to REAR. input on “MAINTENANCE” > “Audio” in the
setup menu.
2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es)
corresponding to the channel(s) selected MIC CH1 Level: Channel 1 recording level (see
in step 1 to MANUAL. page 140)
MIC CH2 Level: Channel 2 recording level (see
3 With the LEVEL control(s) for the page 140)
channel(s) selected in step 1, adjust so
Note
that the audio level meter shows up to
–20 dB for a normal input volume. When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control
and LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs linked together, if the
LEVEL (CH1/CH2) controls are set to 0, the audio
Correspondence between recording level signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check
adjustments and audio level controls the position of the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs before
adjusting the MIC LEVEL control.
You can select which audio level control controls
the audio recording level of the input to each of
the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors on

Adjusting the Audio Level 55

 Recording Audio on Channels 3
and 4
Setting the Time Data

Selecting the recorded audio

You can select the audio recorded on audio
channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH3/CH4
switches. Note
When picture cache mode is enabled, it is not possible to
CH3 switch Channel 3 recording target set time data, even if you set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
FRONT Front microphone audio switch to SET. If you want to set time data, first exit
REAR Audio signal input to AUDIO IN picture cache mode.
CH-1 connector
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

WIRELESS Wireless microphone audio

Setting the Timecode
CH4 switch Channel 4 recording target The timecode setting range is from 00 : 00 : 00 :
FRONT Front microphone audio 00 to 23 : 59 : 59 : 29 (hours : minutes : seconds :
REAR Audio signal input to AUDIO IN frames).
CH-2 connector
WIRELESS Wireless microphone audio 1 Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.

You can have the selection made automatically, 2 Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
as follows. switch to PRESET.
To automatically select the same audio as on
channels 1 and 2
3 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
SET.
Set “MAINTENANCE” > “Audio” > “Audio
The first (leftmost) digit of timecode flashes.
CH3/4 Mode” of the setup menu to “Ch 1/2.”
4 Use the up and down arrow buttons to
Adjusting the audio recording levels change values, and use the left and right
To adjust automatically arrow buttons to move the flashing
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switch to digit. Repeat until all digits are set.
AUTO. To reset the timecode value to 00:00:00:00
To adjust manually Press the RESET/RETURN button.

1 Set the AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switch 5 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
to MANUAL. F-RUN or R-RUN.
F-RUN: Free run. The timecode generator
2 Select the knobs that adjust the audio keeps running.
levels with the Audio CH3 Level and R-RUN: Recording run. The timecode
Audio CH4 Level items under generator runs only while recording.
“MAINTENANCE” > “Audio” in the To set the drop frame mode/non-drop frame
setup menu. mode
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or non-
Audio CH3 Level: Channel 3 recording drop frame (NDF) mode on MAINTENANCE
level (see page 141) >Timecode in the setup menu.
Audio CH4 Level: Channel 4 recording
level (see page 141)

You can now adjust the levels of audio channels

3 and 4 with the knobs selected here.

56 Setting the Time Data

To make the timecode consecutive
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to Synchronizing the Timecode
R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on the
media normally produces consecutive timecode. Connections for timecode
However, once you remove the media and record synchronization
on another media, the timecode will no longer be
consecutive when you use the original media Connect both the reference video signal and the
again for recording. In this case, to make the external timecode as illustrated below.
timecode consecutive, set the PRESET/REGEN/ Example 1: Synchronizing with an external
CLOCK switch to REGEN. timecode
Saving the real Time in the Timecode
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode.

Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

When it is necessary to set the actual time, use
MAINTENANCE >Clock Set >Date/Time in the
setup menu.
For details, see “Setting the Date/Time of the
External timecode
Internal Clock” (page 35).
Reference video signal

Setting the User Bits

1 GENLOCK IN connector
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal 2 TC IN connector
digits), you can record user information such as
the date, time, or scene number on the timecode
track.

1 Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.

2 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to

SET.
The first (leftmost) digit flashes.

3 Use the up and down arrow buttons to

change values, and use the left and right
arrow buttons to move the flashing
digit. Repeat until all digits are set.
To reset the user bit data to 00 00 00 00
Press the RESET/RETURN button.

4 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to

F-RUN or R-RUN, corresponding to the
desired operating mode for the
timecode generator.
To store the user bit setting in memory
The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is
automatically retained in memory even when the
power is turned off.

Setting the Time Data 57

 Example 2: Interconnecting a number of This operation synchronizes the internal
camcorders (including one reference timecode generator with the external
camcorder) timecode. After about 10 seconds, you can
disconnect the external timecode without
losing the synchronization.
Notes
• When you finish the above procedure, the internal
timecode is immediately synchronized with the
external timecode and the counter display will show
the value of the external timecode. However, wait for
a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before
recording.
• If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

same as the system frequency of the camcorder, the

camcorder cannot be correctly genlocked. In such a
case, the internal timecode is not correctly
synchronized with the external timecode.
User bit settings during timecode
synchronization
When the timecode is synchronized, only the time
data is synchronized with the external timecode
value.
To release the timecode synchronization
First disconnect the external timecode, then set
To another camcorder to be synchronized the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.
To change the power supply from the battery
1 VIDEO OUT connector pack to an external power supply during
2 TC OUT connector
timecode synchronization
3 TC IN connector
4 GENLOCK IN connector To maintain a continuous power supply, connect
the external power supply to the DC IN connector
before removing the battery pack.
To lock the timecode to an external
Camcorder synchronization during timecode
source synchronization
During timecode synchronization, the camcorder
1 Turn on the POWER switch. is genlocked to the reference video signal input
from the GENLOCK IN connector.
2 Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch to PRESET.

3 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to

F-RUN.

4 Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.

5 Supply a timecode signal and a

reference video signal complying with
the SMPTE standard and in proper
phase relationship, to the TC IN
connector and to the GENLOCK IN
connector, respectively.

58 Setting the Time Data

 VIDEO status screen
Checking Camcorder Video Format: Video format
Settings and Status Rec Mode: REC Format
Output&i.LINK: Output&i.LINK setting and
Information (Status i.LINK usage status
Screens) SDI Output: HD/SD SDI OUT connector output
setting
HDMI Output: HDMI connector output setting
Down Converter: SD output down converter
Status screen Information displayed setting (HD mode only)
CAMERA status Settings and status information
related to shooting ASSIGN SWITCH status screen
AUDIO status Settings and status information

Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings

This screen displays the names of the functions
related to audio input and
output
assigned to assignable switches
VIDEO status Settings and status information
related to recording and BATTERY/MEDIA status screen
playback Battery: The remaining battery capacity
ASSIGN Names of functions assigned Charge Count: The number of times the battery
SWITCH status to assignable switches has been charged
BATTERY/ Status of the battery mounted Media A/Media B:
MEDIA status on the camcorder and the • Remaining capacity of media
media status • Recordable time
To display status screens • Approximate writable lifetime (Life)
With no menu is displayed, push the STATUS “Life 100%” is shown for unused media.
ON/SEL/OFF switch up to the ON/SEL side.
Each push selects the next status screen, in the
order given in the table above.

CAMERA status screen

White Bal: White balance status
Gain: GAIN switch status
Zoom Speed: Zoom speed set with the lens
ZOOM button
Zebra: Zebra status
Skin Detail: Skin details status

AUDIO status screen

CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4: Audio level meters
and input sources
Wind Filter: Wind filter settings

Checking Camcorder Settings and Status Information (Status Screens) 59

 Chapter 4 Shooting
Loading and Ejecting SxS Memory
Handling SxS Memory Cards
Cards
To load SxS memory cards

1 Slide the cover to the left to open.

This camcorder records video and audio on SxS
memory cards (not supplied) loaded into one or 2 Insert an SxS memory card into a card
both of its memory card slots. slot.
You can use the camcorder with the following
devices to make recording. 3 Close the cover.
• MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor (when the
ACCESS lamp status indications
recording mode is FAT), or QDA-EX1 XQD
Chapter 4 Shooting

Card slots A and B each have an ACCESS lamp

ExpressCard Adapter (when the recording
to indicate the slot status.
mode is UDF/exFAT/FAT)
Lamp Slot status
Lights in orange Accessing the SxS memory card
About SxS Memory Cards (lights during data reading and
writing)
SxS memory cards that can be used with Lights in green Standby (the loaded SxS
this camcorder memory card is ready for
recording or playback)
Use the following Sony SxS memory cards (SxS
Not lit • No SxS memory card is loaded.
PRO or SxS-1) with this camcorder. • An unusable card is loaded.
SxS PRO+ series • An SxS memory card is loaded,
but the other slot is selected.
SxS PRO series
SxS-1 series To eject SxS memory cards

The memory cards listed above comply with the 1 Open the cover, and then press the
ExpressCard memory card standard. EJECT button to release the lock and
• SxS, SxS PRO and SxS-1 are trademarks of pull the button out.
Sony Corporation.
• The ExpressCard label and logo are property of 2 Press the EJECT button again to eject
the Personal Computer Memory Card the card.
International Association (PCMCIA) and are
licensed to Sony Corporation. Other trademarks Note
and trade names are the property of their Data integrity cannot be guaranteed if you power the
respective owners. camcorder off or remove a memory card while the card
is being accessed. Doing so may corrupt all data recorded
on the card. Always make sure that the ACCESS lamp is
lit green or not lit before you power the camcorder off or
remove a memory card.

60 Handling SxS Memory Cards

 Recording and playback during format execution
Selecting the SxS Memory Card to Even during execution of a format, recording and
Use playback are possible using an SxS memory card
loaded into the other card slot.
When SxS memory cards are loaded in both slot
If the format operation fails
A and slot B, you can press the SLOT SELECT
A format operation may fail because the SxS
button to select the SxS memory card to use.
memory card is write protected, or because it is
The camcorder switches automatically to the
not the type of card specified for use with this
other card if the selected card becomes full during
camcorder.
recording.
In this case, an error message appears. Following
Note the instructions in the error message and
The SLOT SELECT button is disabled during playback. exchange the card for an SxS memory card that
Even when pressed, it does not change the selected slot. can be used with this camcorder.
Button operations are enabled when a thumbnail screen
Notes
(see page 96) is displayed.
• All data is erased when you format a memory card,
including setup files and all of the recorded video data.
Formatting (Initializing) SxS • Use the format function of this camcorder to format
SxS memory cards for use on this camcorder. The
Memory Cards

Chapter 4 Shooting
formats of cards formatted on other devices are not
recognized as valid formats, making it necessary to
When you load an unformatted SxS memory card, format them again on this camcorder.
or load an SxS memory card that has been
formatted to other specifications, a message
“Cannot Use Media(A)/Unsupported File Checking the Remaining
System” appears in the viewfinder. In this case, Recording Time
format the memory card in the following way.
Note You can check the remaining capacity of the SxS
memory cards loaded in the two slots by checking
SxS memory cards must be formatted on an XDCAM
EX device. Cards in other formats cannot be used.
the recording media remaining capacity display
in the viewfinder.
To format (initialize) a memory card
The camcorder calculates the remaining
recording time for the media in each slot on the
1 Select “OPERATION” > “Format basis of the current video format (recording bit
Media” in the setup menu (see rate), and displays it in units of minutes.
page 115). You can also check the remaining time in the
BATTERY/MEDIA status screen (see page 59).
2 Select “Media(A)” (slot A) or
“Media(B)” (slot B). Note
The mark appears when a memory card is write
3 Turn the MENU knob to select protected.
“Execute,” and then press the knob.
The confirmation message for formatting is When to exchange SxS memory cards
displayed on the viewfinder screen.
• The warning message “Media Near Full”
4 Turn the MENU knob to select appears, the WARNING indicator and the REC
“Execute,” and press the knob. indication on the viewfinder screen flash, and
Execution of the format starts. the buzzer sounds when the total remaining
recording time of the two memory cards falls to
During execution of the format, a progress
indication appears (%), and the ACCESS lamp five minutes during recording.
lights in orange. Exchange one of the cards for media with
available recording capacity.

Handling SxS Memory Cards 61

 • If you continue recording, the message “Media 3 Copy the required clips back to the
Full” appears and recording stops when the total newly formatted SxS memory card.
remaining recording time falls to 0.
Recording and playback during restoration
Note Even while restoration is in progress, you can
About up to 600 clips can be recorded on one SxS record and play an SxS memory card in the other
memory card. card slot.
The display of remaining recording time changes to “0”
Note
and the message “Media Full” appears when the clip
limit is reached. For restoration of media recorded with this camcorder,
be sure to use this camcorder. Media recorded with a
device other than this camcorder or with another
Restoring SxS Memory Cards camcorder of different version (even of the same model)
may not be restored using this camcorder.
When you load an SxS memory card that needs to
be restored, a message appears in the viewfinder
to ask whether you want to restore it.

To restore a card
Turn the MENU knob to select “Execute,” and
Chapter 4 Shooting

then press the knob.

The restoration starts.
During the restoration, a execution message
appears, the progress is displayed (%), and the
ACCESS lamp lights in orange.
When the restoration finishes, a completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
If restoration fails
• Write protected SxS memory cards and cards on
which memory errors have occurred cannot be
restored. A warning message appears for such
cards. Follow the instructions in the message
and unprotect the card or replace it with another
card.
• SxS memory cards on which memory errors
have occurred may become usable if they are
reformatted.
• In some cases, some clips can be restored while
others cannot. The restored clips can be played
normally.
• If the message “Could not Restore Some Clips”
keeps appearing after repeated attempts at
restoration, it may be possible to restore the SxS
memory card with the following procedure.

1 Use the camcorder’s copy function

(see page 104) or the supplied
application software (see page 171) to
copy the required clips to another SxS
memory card.
2 Format the unusable SxS memory card
on the camcorder.

62 Handling SxS Memory Cards

 On a confirmation message, select “Execute”
Using a Media Adaptor again.

An in-progress message and status bar (%) are

displayed, and the access lamp lights in orange.
When formatting is completed, a completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
Notes Note
• A media adaptor cannot obtain the high reliability and When formatting, all data in an XQD memory card-
durability equivalent to an SxS memory card for including protected images-are erased and cannot be
professional use. restored.
• Not all memory cards have been tested and are not
Connection between the camcorder and a
guaranteed to work with this camcorder. For
compatible memory cards, contact your Sony dealer.
computer
To use an XQD memory card in which data have
been recorded with an XDCAM EX-series
XQD Memory Cards product, insert it into the slot of the camcorder
and connect between the computer and this
By using an optional QDA-EX1 XQD camcorder using a USB cable.

Chapter 4 Shooting
ExpressCard Adapter, you can insert an XQD
To use media formatted with this camcorder in
memory card into the SxS memory card slot and
the slots of other devices
use it instead of an SxS memory card.
Make a backup of the media, then format it using
For details on using a QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard the other device.
Adapter, refer to the instruction manual supplied
with it.
Notes
SDHC Cards (FAT Mode only)
• High-speed playback may not be properly achieved When FAT mode is selected, use of the optional
with an XQD memory card. MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor permits you to
• Slow Motion recording by the Slow & Quick Motion
insert an SDHC card to the SxS memory card slot
recording function cannot be made with an XQD
of the camcorder and use it for recording and
memory card.
playback in the same way as with an SxS memory
card.
Formatting
Usable SDHC card
When you use an XQD memory card with this
Class 10 SDHC card
camcorder, formatting is required.
An XQD memory card to be used with this For details on use of the MEAD-SD02 Media
camcorder must be formatted using the format Adaptor, refer to the Operating Instructions of the
function of this camcorder. adaptor.
It is also necessary to format an XQD memory Notes
card for use if a caution message is displayed • In UDF/exFAT mode, no Media Adaptor can be used.
when you mount the XQD memory card. • High-speed playback may not be properly achieved
For an XQD memory card that was formatted with an SDHC card.
with another system unsupported by this • When using the Slow & Quick Motion function with
camcorder, the message “Unsupported File an SDHC card, you cannot perform slow motion
System” is displayed on the LCD monitor/ shooting.
viewfinder screen.
Format the XQD memory card as instructed
below.
To execute formatting
Specify the slot on “OPERATION” > “Format
Media” in the setup menu, then select “Execute.”

Using a Media Adaptor 63

 Formatting
When you use an SDHC card with this
Handling USB Flash
camcorder, formatting is required. Drives
An SDHC card to be used with this camcorder
must be formatted using the format function of
this camcorder.
It is also necessary to format an SDHC card for In UDF/exFAT mode, you can connect a USB
use if a caution message is displayed when you flash drive connected to the external device to
mount the SDHC card. record, save and load the following data.
For an SDHC card that was formatted with • Planning metadata (see page 93)
another system unsupported by this camcorder, • Setting data (see page 163)
the message “Unsupported File System” is
displayed on the LCD monitor/EVF screen. Notes
Format the SDHC card as instructed below. • Use USB flash drives with capacity of 4 GB or greater.
• USB flash drives other than the recommended flash
To execute formatting
drives listed above may not be recognized when
Select “Media(A)” (slot A) or “Media(B)” (slot
connected to the USB connector.
B) on “OPERATION” > “Format Media” in the
setup menu, and select “Execute.”
Chapter 4 Shooting

An in-progress message and status bar (%) are Formatting (Initializing) USB
displayed, and the ACCESS lamp lights in
orange. When formatting is completed, a
Flash Drives
completion message is displayed for three USB flash drives must be formatted with the
seconds. FAT32 file system.
Note
Note
In formatting, all data in an SDHC card, including
Before using a drive, format it on this camcorder or a PC.
protected images, are erased and cannot be restored.
If a drive formatted on a PC cannot be used, format it on
Connection between the camcorder and a the camcorder.
computer
To use an SDHC card in which data have been 1 Connect a USB flash drive to the
recorded with an XDCAM EX-series product, external device connector.
establish USB connection between the computer When the drive is unformatted or has been
and this camcorder and insert it into the slot of the formatted to other specifications, a message
camcorder, or use a specified USB card reader to confirm if formatting is to be executed
SBAC-US20. appears on the viewfinder screen.

To use a media formatted with this camcorder in 2 Turn the MENU knob to select
the slots of other devices “Execute” and press the knob.
Make a backup of the media, then format it using When formatting is completed, the message
the other device. “Format USB Memory Done” is displayed.
“XQD” is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.
The \MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\MEMDISC
folder and the \General\Sony\Planning folder
are automatically created in the drive.
If the format operation fails
A format operation may fail because the USB
flash drive is write protected, or because it is not
the type of drive specified for use with this
camcorder.
In this case, an error message appears. Following
the instructions in the error message and

64 Handling USB Flash Drives

exchange the drive for one that can be used with
this camcorder. Operating via the
REMOTE Connector
Restoring USB Flash Drives
When you load a USB flash drive that cannot be
mounted normally because the file system is
When the RM-B170/B750 Remote Control Unit,
destroyed, a message appears on the viewfinder
the RCP-1001/1501 Remote Control Panel, or
screen to ask whether you want to restore it.
other control unit is connected, some camcorder
Pressing the MENU knob after turning the
functions can be controlled from these units.
MENU knob to select “Execute” starts execution
You can use the RM-B750’s display or a video
of the format and a progress indication appears
monitor connected to the MONITOR connector
(%).
of the remote control unit to control the
When restoring is completed, the message
camcorder by menu operations and monitor the
“Restore USB Memory Done” is displayed.
camcorder picture.

To connect

Chapter 4 Shooting
Using the remote cable (10 m (33 ft)) supplied
with the remote control unit, connect between the
REMOTE connector (8-pin) of the camcorder and
the camera connector of the remote control unit.
When you turn on the camcorder after the
connection, the camcorder enters Remote Control
mode.

Adjusting the Camcorder from the

Remote Control Unit
You can control menu and recording operations.
For the functions that can be controlled from the
remote control unit, see “Functions That Can Be
Controlled from the RM-B170/B750” on page 68, or
“Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RCP-
1001/1501” on page 77.
Notes
• Remote Control operations cannot be made if USB
connection to the camcorder is enabled.
• Do not connect or disconnect the remote control unit
when the camcorder is on.
The following controls of the camcorder becomes
inoperative when the remote control unit is
connected.
• GAIN selector
• WHITE BAL switch
• AUTO W/B BAL switch
• SHUTTER selector
• OUTPUT/DCC switch
• Buttons and switches to which the Turbo Gain
function has been assigned, including the

Operating via the REMOTE Connector 65

 ASSIGN. 1/3 switches, the ASSIGNABLE 4
switch, the COLOR TEMP. button, and the
Function of the recording start/stop
ASSIGNABLE 5 switch. buttons when the RM-B170/B750 is
• REC START button: the VTR button on the connected
lens, and buttons and switches to which the This setting is made using “MAINTENANCE” >
function has been assigned using “Camera Config” > “RM Rec Start” in the setup
“OPERATION” > “Assignable SW” in the menu.
setup menu, including the ASSIGN. 1/3
switches, the ASSIGNABLE 4 switch, the Relationship between the setting of the RM Rec
COLOR TEMP. button, and the ASSIGNABLE Start item and the function of recording start/stop
5 switch (when “MAINTENANCE” > “Camera buttons
Config” > “RM Rec Start” in the setup menu is Recording start/ Settings of RM Rec Start
set to “RM”). stop button RM CAM PARA
Camcorder’s REC Disabled Enabled Enabled
To release Remote Control mode START button
Turn off the camcorder and disconnect the remote Lens’ VTR button Disabled Enabled Enabled
control unit. Buttons and Disabled Enabled Enabled
The settings on the controls on the camcorder switches to which
become valid. the recording start/
Chapter 4 Shooting

stop function has

been assigned
To connect the monitor to the RM-B170/ (ASSIGN. 1/3
B750 switches,
The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the ASSIGNABLE 4
RM-B170/B750 outputs a composite signal. To switch, COLOR
connect a monitor to the MONITOR connector on TEMP. button, and
the RM-B170/B750, use the black cable supplied ASSIGNABLE 5
switch)
with the RM-B170/B750.
Remote control Enabled Disabled Enabled
unit’s VTR button
Camera image quality adjustment items
when the RM-B170/B750 is connected Structure of the paint adjustment data
When the RM-B170/B750 is connected, the The non-volatile memory of the camcorder used
parameters for camera image quality adjustment for storing paint adjustment data consists of two
items (paint data) are reset to the parameters that regions as shown below: one is the “main data
were specified the last time that RM-B170/B750 block” that is used when a remote control unit is
was connected. not connected, and the other is the “remote
control data block” that is used when a remote
control unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is
automatically selected and output to the camera
section depending on whether or not a remote
control unit such as the RM-B170 is connected.

66 Operating via the REMOTE Connector

 settings of the paint data made with the remote
Setup menu of control unit can be retained even if the remote
the camcorder
control unit is removed. However, if the switch
position on the remote control unit differs from
Main data block Remote control the one on the camcorder, the switch position on
data block the camcorder takes precedence over that on the
remote control unit.
Also, it is possible to keep the settings that are in
effect before you connect the remote control unit.
In this case, you should set the control knob to the
relative value mode on the remote control unit.
For details, refer to the Operation Manual supplied
Non-volatile memory with the remote control unit.

Operating the Menu from the

RM-B170
Hardware of the
camera section
1 Set the DISPLAY switch to MENU.

Chapter 4 Shooting
RM-B170 connected
The camcorder menus can be displayed on a
RM-B170 not connected video monitor connected to the MONITOR
When a remote control unit is connected to the connector of the RM-B170.
camcorder, the “remote control data block” is 2 Select and set the menu items, using the
selected as the current paint data block, and the MENU SELECT knob and the
paint adjustment parameters that were in effect
CANCEL/ENTER switch.
the last time the remote control unit was used are
recalled. 3 When the settings are completed, set the
The settings of the absolute value rotational DISPLAY switch to ON or OFF to exit
controls 1) and absolute value switches 2) are the menu.
overwritten by those on the remote control unit
For details on operations of the RM-B170, refer to
after the remote control unit is connected.
the Operation Manual of the RM-B170.
When the remote control unit is disconnected
from the camcorder, the “main data block”
becomes effective. Thus the camcorder will Operating the Menu from the
return to the settings that were in effect before the
RM-B750
remote control unit was connected.
1) Absolute value rotational controls: The data
corresponding to the angular position of controls is
1 Press and light the MONITOR button
output. Rotational controls for which the data
then press the VF MENU button.
corresponding to the amount of their rotation is output The camcorder menus can be displayed on
are called relative value controls. the RM-B750’s display or a video monitor
2) Absolute value switches: Like toggle switches or connected to the MONITOR connector of the
slide switches (except most momentary switches), the RM-B750.
switches (or knobs) whose positions must coincide
with their functions are called absolute value switches. 2 Select and set the menu items, using the
When “MAINTENANCE” > “Camera Config” > MENU SELECT knob, ENTER button,
“RM Common Memory” is set to “On” in the and CANCEL button.
setup menu, you can use settings of the paint
adjustment data stored in the main data block 3 When the settings are completed, press
even if you connect the remote control unit. In the VF MENU button to exit the menu.
this case, the settings stored in the main data For details on operations of the RM-B750, refer to
block will be renewed when you change the the Operation Manual of the RM-B750.
settings on the remote control unit. Thus, the

Operating via the REMOTE Connector 67

 Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RM-B170/
B750
You can adjust the functions in the following table by using menu operations, adjustment knobs, switches,
and the touch panel (RM-B750 only) on the RM-B170/B750.
For details on operations, refer to the operation manual of the RM-B170/B750.
How to Read the Table
In the RM-B170 and RM-B750 columns of the table below, “Yes” and “No” mean the following.
Yes: The operation can be performed from the unit.
No: The operation cannot be performed from the unit.

Menu Sub-item Setting Description RM-B170 RM-B750

items
Gain Step Gain – Sets the master gain. No No
L/M/H Low/Mid/High Switches between three No No
gain levels, when the
Chapter 4 Shooting

master gain has been set

from a menu.
Step –3/0/3/6/9/12/18/ Sets the master gain. Yes Yes
24/30/36/42dB
Bars Bars On/Off Turns color bar output Yes Yes
on or off.
Shutter Step Shutter On/Off Turns the step shutter Yes Yes
Setting function on or off.
Step Shutter – Sets the step shutter Yes Yes
Speed speed.
ECS Setting On/Off Turns ECS on or off. Yes Yes
ECS Frequency – Selects the ECS Yes Yes
frequency.
SLS Setting On/Off Turns SLS on or off. Yes Yes/No a)
SLS Speed – Sets the SLS speed Yes Yes a)
(number of frames).
DCC DCC On/Off Turns DCC on or off. Yes Yes
DCC Point –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the DCC Yes b) Yes a) b)
minimum knee point.
White AWB Start/Stop Starts execution of auto Yes Yes
Balance white balance
adjustment, or stops
execution.
White Memory A/B/C/Preset Switches the auto white Yes Yes
balance memory.
ATW On/Off Turns ATW on or off. Yes Yes
5600K On/Off Turns color temperature Yes Yes
conversion on or off.
Black ABB Start/Stop Starts execution of auto Yes Yes
black balance
adjustment, or stops
execution.

68 Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RM-B170/B750

Menu Sub-item Setting Description RM-B170 RM-B750
items
Iris Iris Mode Auto/Manual Selects the iris mode. Yes Yes
Iris Speed –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the control Yes b) Yes b)
speed (speed of reaction
to changes in the video).
(Larger values specify
quicker reaction times.)
Iris Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the level of the Yes b) Yes b)
auto iris target value.
Iris APL Ratio –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the mix ratio of Yes b) Yes b)
auto iris detection peak
value and average value.
Iris Window Ind On/Off Turns on or off the Yes b) Yes b)
function that displays a
frame marker for the
auto iris detection
window.
Close On/Off Turns forcible iris No Yes

Chapter 4 Shooting
closing on or off.
Rec Slow & Quick On/Off Turns the Slow & Quick Yes Yes a) b)
Function Motion function on or
off.
Frame Rate The available When the Slow & Quick Yes Yes a) b)
settings vary setting is On, sets the
depending on the frame rate for Slow &
Format >HD Quick Motion shooting.
System Line
setting.
Camcorder Menu On/Off Operates the camcorder Yes Yes
Menu Cancel/Preset Cancel/Preset menu. Yes Yes
Select/Set Select (Up/ Yes Yes
Down)/Set
Panel Panel Active On/Off Enables (On) or disables Yes Yes
Active (Off) panel operations.
Standard Standard On/Off Selects standard mode. Yes Yes
ND Filter ND Filter Display only Turns the display of ND No No
filter settings on or off.
(The settings cannot be
changed, only
displayed.)
CC Filter CC Filter A/B/C/D Selects a CC filter. Yes Yes
Extender Extender On/Off Turns the lens extender No No
IND indication on or off.
(The settings cannot be
changed, only
displayed.)
Call Call On/Off Enables (On) or disables Yes No
(Off) calls from
externally connected
equipment.

Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RM-B170/B750 69

 Menu Sub-item Setting Description RM-B170 RM-B750
items
Media Rec Start/Stop Starts or stops recording. Yes Yes
Play Play/Pause Starts playback. Yes Yes
FREV – Starts high-speed Yes Yes
reverse playback.
FFWD – Starts high-speed Yes Yes
playback.
Stop – Stops playback. Yes Yes
Rec Review – Starts a recording Yes Yes
review.
PREV – Jumps to the first frame Yes Yes
of the current clip.
NEXT – Jumps to the first frame Yes Yes
of the next clip.
Freeze Mix – Execute the freeze mix Yes Yes
function.
Switch Gamma On/Off Turns gamma correction Yes b) Yes b)
Status on or off.
Chapter 4 Shooting

Black Gamma On/Off Turns black gamma Yes Yesb)

correction on or off.
Matrix On/Off Turns linear matrix Yes b) Yesb)
correction and user
matrix correction on or
off.
Knee On/Off Turns knee correction on Yes Yesb)
or off.
White Clip On/Off Turns white clip Yes b) Yes b)
correction on or off.
Detail On/Off Turns detail correction Yes Yes b)
on or off.
Flare On/Off Turns flare correction on Yes Yes b)
or off.
Test Saw On/Off Turns the test saw signal Yes Yes
on or off.
White R Gain<A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white Yes Yes
balance R gain value
saved in memory A.
B Gain<A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white Yes Yes
balance B gain value
saved in memory A.
R Gain<B> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white Yes Yes
balance R gain value
saved in memory B.
B Gain<B> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white Yes Yes
balance B gain value
saved in memory B.

70 Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RM-B170/B750

Menu Sub-item Setting Description RM-B170 RM-B750
items
Black Master Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master Yes Yes
black level.
R Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the R black Yes Yes
level.
B Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the B black Yes Yes
level.
Flare Flare On/Off Turns flare correction on Yes Yes b)
or off.
R Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R flare Yes Yes
correction level.
G Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the G flare Yes b) Yes b)
correction level.
B Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B flare Yes Yes
correction level.
Gamma Gamma On/Off Turns gamma correction Yes Yes b)
on or off.
Step Gamma 0.35 to 0.45 to Specifies a gamma Yes b) Yes b)

Chapter 4 Shooting
0.90 (in steps of correction value in steps
0.05) of 0.05.
Master Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master Yes Yes
gamma level.
R Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the R gamma Yes b) Yes
level.
G Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the G gamma Yes b) Yes b)
level.
B Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the B gamma Yes b) Yes
level.
Gamma Select When Gamma Select the gamma table Yes b) Yes b)
Category is STD: to use in gamma
1 DVW correction.
2 ×4.5
3 ×3.5
4 240M
5 R709
6 ×5.0
When Gamma Yes b) Yes a) b)
Category is HG:
1 3250
2 4600
3 3259
4 4609
Gamma STD/HG Selects use of standard Yes b) Yes a) b)
Category gamma (STD) or
HyperGamma (HG).
Black Black Gamma On/Off Turns black gamma Yes Yes
Gamma correction on or off.
Gamma Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master Yes b) Yes
black gamma level.
Range Low/L.Mid/ Selects the black gamma Yes b) Yes b)
H.Mid/High correction effective
range.

Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RM-B170/B750 71

 Menu Sub-item Setting Description RM-B170 RM-B750
items
Knee Knee On/Off Turns knee correction on Yes Yes b)
or off.
Knee Point 50% to 95.0% to Specifies the knee point. Yes Yes b)
109% (in steps of
1%)
Knee Slope –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the knee slope. Yes b) Yes b)
Knee Saturation On/Off Turns the knee Yes b) Yes b)
saturation function on or
off.
Knee Saturation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the knee Yes b) Yes b)
Level saturation level.
White Clip White Clip On/Off Turns white clipping Yes b) Yes b)
adjustment on or off
(Off = fixed as 109%).
White Clip [NTSC Area] or Specifies the white clip Yes b) Yes b)
Level [NTSC(J) Area] level.
is selected for
Chapter 4 Shooting

Country
90.0% to 108.0%
to 109.0%
[PAL Area] is
selected for
Country
90.0% to 105.0%
to 109.0%

72 Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RM-B170/B750

Menu Sub-item Setting Description RM-B170 RM-B750
items
Detail(HD Detail On/Off Turns detail adjustment Yes Yes b)
mode)/ on or off.
Detail(SD Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the detail level. Yes Yes
mode) H/V Ratio –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the mix ratio Yes b) Yes b)
between the H detail
level and the V detail
level.
Crispening –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the crispening Yes b) Yes b)
level.
Level Depend On/Off Turns the level depend Yes b) Yes b)
function on or off.
Level Depend –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the level Yes b) Yes b)
Level depend level.
Frequency –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the central Yes b) Yes b)
frequency for H detail
signal. Larger values
give finer details.

Chapter 4 Shooting
Knee Aperture On/Off Turns the linear knee Yes b) Yes b)
aperture function on or
off.
Knee Aperture –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the knee Yes b) Yes b)
Level aperture level.
Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the detail Yes b) Yes b)
limiter values for both
the white-side and
black-side direction.
White Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white-side Yes b) Yes b)
detail limiter value.
Black Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the black-side Yes b) Yes b)
detail limiter value.
Skin Detail Skin Detail On/Off Turns skin detail Yes b) Yes
correction on or off.
Area Detection Color detection Detects the color to be Yes b) Yes b)
screen targeted by skin detail
correction.
Area Indication On/Off Turns on or off the Yes b) Yes b)
function that displays a
zebra pattern in the area
targeted by skin detail
correction.
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the skin detail Yes b) Yes
level.
Saturation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the saturation Yes b) Yes b)
of the color targeted by
skin detail correction.
Hue 0 to 359 Specifies the hue of the Yes b) Yes b)
color targeted by skin
detail correction.
Width 0 to 40 to 90 Specifies a range for the Yes b) Yes b)
hue of the color targeted
by skin detail correction.

Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RM-B170/B750 73

 Menu Sub-item Setting Description RM-B170 RM-B750
items
Matrix Matrix On/Off Turns the matrix Yes b) Yes b)
correction function on or
off.
Preset Matrix On/Off Turns the preset matrix Yes b) Yes b)
function on or off.
Preset Select 1/2/3/4/5/6 Selects a preset matrix. Yes b) Yes b)
1: SMPTE-240M
equivalent
2: ITU-709 equivalent
3: SMPTE WIDE
equivalent
4: NTSC equivalent
5: EBU equivalent
6: ITU-601 equivalent
User Matrix On/Off Turns the user matrix Yes b) Yes b)
function on or off.
User Matrix –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely Yes b) Yes b)
Chapter 4 Shooting

R-G defined R-G user matrix.

User Matrix –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely Yes b) Yes b)
R-B defined R-B user matrix.
User Matrix –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely Yes b) Yes b)
G-R defined G-R user matrix.
User Matrix –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely Yes b) Yes b)
G-B defined G-B user matrix.
User Matrix –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely Yes b) Yes b)
B-R defined B-R user matrix.
User Matrix –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely Yes b) Yes b)
B-G defined B-G user matrix.
Multi Multi Matrix On/Off Turns the multi matrix Yes b) Yes b)
Matrix correction function on or
off.
Area Indication On/Off Turns on or off the Yes b) Yes b)
function that displays a
zebra pattern in the color
area targeted by multi
matrix correction.
Axis B/B+/MG–/MG/ Specifies a color Yes b) Yes b)
MG+/R/R+/YL–/ targeted by multi matrix
YL/YL+/G–/G/ correction (16-axis
G+/CY/CY+/B– mode).
Hue –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the hue of the Yes b) Yes b)
color targeted by multi
matrix correction for
each 16-axis mode.
Saturation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the saturation Yes b) Yes b)
of the color targeted by
multi matrix correction
for each 16-axis mode.

74 Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RM-B170/B750

Menu Sub-item Setting Description RM-B170 RM-B750
items
V V Modulation On/Off Turns V modulation Yes b) Yes b)
Modulation shading on or off.
Master –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master V Yes b) Yes
V Modulation modulation.
R V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the V Yes b) Yes b)
modulation level of R
signal.
G V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the V Yes b) Yes b)
modulation level of G
signal.
B V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the V Yes b) Yes b)
modulation level of B
signal.
Low Key Low Key On/Off Turns low key saturation Yes b) Yes b)
Saturation Saturation correction on or off.
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the saturation Yes b) Yes b)
of colors in low

Chapter 4 Shooting
luminance areas.
Noise Noise Suppress On/Off Turns noise suppression Yes b) Yes a) b)
Suppress on or off.
White R/G/B White H –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a SAW white Yes b) Yes b)
Shading Saw shading correction value
for the horizontal
direction.
R/G/B White H –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a parabola Yes b) Yes b)
Para white shading correction
value for the horizontal
direction.
R/G/B White V –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a SAW white Yes b) Yes b)
Saw shading correction value
for the vertical direction.
R/G/B White V –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a parabola Yes b) Yes b)
Para white shading correction
value for the vertical
direction.

Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RM-B170/B750 75

 Menu Sub-item Setting Description RM-B170 RM-B750
items
Black R/G/B Black H –99 to ±0 to +99
Specifies a SAW black Yes b) Yes b)
Shading Saw shading correction value
for the horizontal
direction.
R/G/B Black H –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a parabola Yes b) Yes b)
Para black shading correction
value for the horizontal
direction.
R/G/B Black V –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies SAW black Yes b) Yes b)
Saw shading correction value
for the vertical direction.
R/G/B Black V –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a parabola Yes b) Yes b)
Para black shading correction
value for the vertical
direction.
Auto Black Start/Cancel Executes auto black Yes b) Yes b)
Shading shading compensation.
Yes b) Yes b)
Chapter 4 Shooting

Scene s1 Standard File number and file ID

s2 Standard File number and file ID Yes b) Yes b)
s3 Standard File number and file ID Yes b) Yes b)
s4 Standard File number and file ID Yes b) Yes b)
s5 Standard File number and file ID Yes b) Yes b)
Scene Recall Execute/Cancel Loads a scene file Yes b) Yes b)
(execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Scene Store Execute/Cancel Saves a scene file Yes b) Yes b)
(execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Reference Reference Store Execute/Cancel Stores the current setting Yes b) Yes b)
of reference file items in
the reference file that is
maintained in internal
memory (execute by
selecting [Execute]).
Shot Mark Shot Mark1 – Set a Shot Mark1. Yes No
Shot Mark2 – Set a Shot Mark2. Yes No

a) Depending on RM-B750 version

b) The camcorder’s built-in menu can be operated from the RM-B170/B750.

Adjustments of the lens functions

The following functions can also be controlled from the RM-B170/B750.

Function Operation on the lens RM-B170 RM-B750

Iris adjustment Iris ring Yes Yes
Iris close – No Yes
Switching between auto iris and manual iris IRIS switch Yes Yes
Zooming Zoom ring Yes No
Focus adjustment Focus ring Yes No

76 Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RM-B170/B750

 Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RCP-1001/
1501
You can adjust the functions in the following table by using menu operations, adjustment knobs, switches,
and the touch panel on the RCP-1001/1501.
For details on operations, refer to the operation manual of the RCP-1001/1501.
How to Read the Table
In the RCP-1001, and RCP-1501 columns of the table below, “Yes” and “No” mean the following.
Yes: The operation can be performed from the unit.
No: The operation cannot be performed from the unit.

Menu Sub-item Setting Description RCP-1001/1501

items
Gain Step Gain – Sets the master gain. Yes
L/M/H Low/Mid/High Switches between three gain levels, when No
the master gain has been set from a menu.

Chapter 4 Shooting
Step –3/0/3/6/9/12/18/ Sets the master gain. Yes
24/30/36/42dB
Bars Bars On/Off Turns color bar output on or off. Yes
White AWB Start/Stop Starts execution of auto white balance Yes
Balance adjustment, or stops execution.
ATW On/Off Turns ATW on or off. Yes
5600K On/Off Turns color temperature conversion on or Yes
off.
Black ABB Start/Stop Starts execution of auto black balance Yes
adjustment, or stops execution.
Iris Iris Mode Auto/Manual Selects the iris mode. Yes
Iris Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the level of the auto iris target Yes
value.
Close On/Off Turns forcible iris closing on or off. Yes
Camcorder Menu On/Off Operates the camcorder menu. Yes
Menu Cancel/Preset Cancel/Preset Yes
Select/Set Select (Up/ Yes
Down)/Set
Panel Panel Active On/Off Enables (On) or disables (Off) panel Yes
Active operations.
Standard Standard On/Off Selects standard mode. Yes
ND Filter ND Filter Display only Turns the display of ND filter settings on Yes
or off. (The settings cannot be changed,
only displayed.)
CC Filter CC Filter A/B/C/D Selects a CC filter. Yes
Call Call On/Off Enables (On) or disables (Off) calls from Yes
externally connected equipment.

Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RCP-1001/1501 77

 Menu Sub-item Setting Description RCP-1001/1501
items
Switch Gamma On/Off Turns gamma correction on or off. Yes
Status Black Gamma On/Off Turns black gamma correction on or off. Yes
Matrix On/Off Turns linear matrix correction and user Yes
matrix correction on or off.
Knee On/Off Turns knee correction on or off. Yes
White Clip On/Off Turns white clip correction on or off. Yes
Detail On/Off Turns detail correction on or off. Yes
Flare On/Off Turns flare correction on or off. Yes
Test Saw On/Off Turns the test saw signal on or off. Yes
White R Gain<A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance R gain value Yes
saved in memory A.
B Gain<A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance B gain value Yes
saved in memory A.
R Gain<B> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance R gain value Yes
saved in memory B.
B Gain<B> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance B gain value Yes
saved in memory B.
Chapter 4 Shooting

Black Master Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master black level. Yes
R Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the R black level. Yes
B Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the B black level. Yes
Detail(HD Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the detail level. Yes
mode)/
Detail(SD
mode)

78 Functions That Can Be Controlled from the RCP-1001/1501

 the external device connector, do not connect a device
Using Wi-Fi Connection to the i.LINK connector.
• If you use a wireless device near the camcorder, the
camcorder may not work correctly. Turn the wireless
device off near the camcorder.

Making a Wi-Fi Connection

Connecting an optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Two types of Wi-Fi connections are available. In
Adapter or IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN “ad-hoc mode”, you can make a peer-to-peer Wi-
Module to this camcorder allows a Wi-Fi Fi connection between a computer and
connection between a computer and the camcorder. In “infrastructure mode”, you can
camcorder. make Wi-Fi connections between a computer and
You can also connect the camcorder and computer multiple camcorders via a wireless LAN access
via Wi-Fi by using the optional CBK-WA101 point (building a LAN).
Wireless Adapter. For details on connection and
operation of the CBK-WA101, refer to the Operating
To make a network setting
Instructions supplied with the CBK-WA101.
Change settings under “MAINTENANCE” >
Making a Wi-Fi connection between a computer “Network Setting” in the setup menu as required.

Chapter 4 Shooting
and the camcorder enables you to do the
Item Setting
following.
DHCP Setting that specifies whether to
• You can transfer planning metadata and other
acquire the IP address
files between a computer and this camcorder.
automatically from a DHCP server
• You can also use the Live Logging function to Enabled: Acquire automatically.
add shot marks to the video currently being Disabled: Do not acquire
shot. automatically (factory default
Note setting).
IP Address IP address a) (factory default
Check the firmware version of your camcorder to make
setting: 192.168.1.10)
sure that the camcorder supports the Wi-Fi adapter.
Subnet Mask Subnet mask (factory default
For details, contact your Sony dealer or your Sony setting: 255.255.255.0)
service representative.
Default Default gateway (factory default
Gateway setting: 0.0.0.0)
Fixing the CBK-WA01 User Name User name for log-in (factory
default setting: admin)
For details about attaching the CBK-WA01, refer Password Password for log-in (factory default
to the Operating Instructions or Installation setting: model name “pmw-400”)
Manual of the CBK-WA01. a) The IP address determined by DHCP server is
displayed here.

Connecting the IFU-WLM3 When you have changed a setting

Set the “Set” item to “Execute.” When a
Open the cover of the external device connector, confirmation message appears, turn the MENU
then connect the IFU-WLM3. knob to select “Execute” and press the knob.

Notes
To make a connection in ad hoc mode
• The IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (sold
separately) may not be available in some countries/
regions. 1 Refer to “Settings on the Computer”
• Attach/remove the IFU-WLM3 after the camcorder is under “Making a Wi-Fi Connection to
turned off.
Your Computer (Ad hoc Mode)” in the
• An i.LINK connection and USB wireless LAN module
cannot be used at the same time. When using a wireless Operating Instructions supplied with
connection with an IFU-WLM3 inserted directly into

Using Wi-Fi Connection 79

 the CBK-WA01 to make settings on the The message “Wi-Fi Setting Executing…”
computer. appears and the camcorder starts connection.
If the connection to the computer is
2 Start a connection on the computer. complete, then the message changes to “Wi-
Fi Setting OK”.
3 Set “MAINTENANCE” > “Wi-Fi Black squares appear in the Wi-Fi Status
Setting” > “Wi-Fi” to “Enable” in the column to show the connection status. (The
setup menu. number of squares shows the level of
connection status.) In the Wireless Mode
4 Set “MAINTENANCE” > “Wi-Fi column, the IEEE802.11 standard of the
Setting” > “Scan Networks” to established connection appears (802.11b,
“Execute” and press the MENU knob. 802.11g or 802.11n).
The camcorder starts scanning for a network
Tip
connection.
It is also possible to make a connection by accessing a
When networks are detected, the
network connection started on the camcorder from the
NETWORK SCAN list appears. computer.

5 Turn the MENU knob to select a To terminate the connection

network and press the knob. Terminate the connection on the computer.
Chapter 4 Shooting

The “MAINTENANCE” menu appears To revert to the default settings (reset)

again. If you have trouble making a connection, or you
want to start over, you can reset your Wi-Fi
6 Confirm that the settings for the Wi-Fi connection settings to their defaults.
Setting item conform to the network
setting on the computer. Set “MAINTENANCE” > “Network Setting” >
SSID (network name): Selected network “Net Config Reset” in the setup menu to
name “Execute” and press the MENU knob.
Network Type (connection mode): If the reset is executed, the message “Done”
“Adhoc” appears.
CH (channel): “1” The camcorder attempts to connect to the network
Authentication (network authentication): using a MAC address as the SSID.
Depending the settings on the computer,
“Open,” “Shared,” or “WPA”
To make a connection in infrastructure
Encryption (data encryption): Depending
the settings on the computer, “Disable,”
mode
“WEP,” “TKIP,” or “AES” Setting up the wireless LAN access point
WEP Key Index (key index): “1” when The following settings are required.
“Encryption” is set to “WEP” • Network ID (SSID)
Input Select (key input format): Depending • Encryption method
the network key (or security key), • Network key (Key)
“ASCII5,” “ASCII13,” “HEX10,” or
For details about setting up the wireless LAN access
“HEX26” when “Encryption” is set to
point, refer to the Operation Manual of the wireless
“WEP,” “ASCII8-63” or “HEX64”
LAN access point.
when “Encryption” is set to “TKIP” or
“AES” To find and connect to a wireless LAN from the
camcorder
7 Set the Key item to the network key (or Perform the same procedure in “To make a
security key) set on the computer and connection in ad hoc mode” (page 79) excluding
press the MENU knob. the following.
• Do not perform steps 1 and 2.
8 Set the Set item to “Execute” and press • The settings made in step 7 change as follows.
the MENU knob. SSID (network name): Selected network
connection name

80 Using Wi-Fi Connection

 Network Type (connection mode): “Infra” Note
Ch (channel): “Auto”
The configuration of items displayed in the Web menu
Authentication (network authentication): varies depending on the browser you are using.
Depending the settings on the computer,
“Open,” “Shared,” “WPA,” or “WPA2”
To display the Web menu
Encryption (data encryption): Depending the
settings on the computer, “Disable,”
“WEP,” “TKIP,” or “AES” 1 Launch a web browse on the computer,
WEP Key Index (key index): “1” when and navigate to “http://<camcorder’s
“Encryption” is set to “WEP” IP address> (setting of
Input Select (key input format): Depending “MAINTENANCE” > “Network
the network key (or security key), Setting” > “IP Address” in the setup
“ASCII5,” “ASCII13,” “HEX10,” or menu)”.
“HEX26” when “Encryption” is set to Example (when the IP address is
“WEP,” “ASCII8-63” or “HEX64” when “192.168.1.10”):
“Encryption” is set to “TKIP” or “AES” Type “http://192.168.1.10/” in the address
bar.
If the connection is complete, a dialog
Using the Web Menu appears asking you to enter the user name

Chapter 4 Shooting
and password.
You can operate the Web menu built in the
camcorder from a computer when it is connected 2 Enter the user name and password, and
to the camcorder via a Wi-Fi connection. click “OK.”
You can check the information and setting status User name: admin
of the camcorder, and upload a planning metadata Password: pmw-400 (Lower-case the model
file, using the Web menu. name.)
Note
You cannot access the Web menu during recording/ To upload a planning metadata file
playback. (You cannot send/receive files via a Wi-Fi
connection.) 1 Insert a media such as an SxS memory
card.
Example Web menu
2 Click “Upload” in the Web menu.
Product Information The Planning Metadata screen appears.
• Model name
• Serial No. 3 Click “Select” to show Choose File
dialog.
Network
• MAC Address
4 Select the planning metadata file you
• IP Address
want to upload, and then click “Open.”
• Subnet Mask
The path of the selected file appears.
Wi-Fi Status
• Wireless Mode 5 Click “Execute.”
• SSID The planning metadata file is loaded into the
• Type camcorder’s memory and stored in the
• Channel media.
• Authentication (network authentication) “OK” appears in the Status field when the
• Data Encryption (data encryption) transfer is complete.
Planning Metadata
Clicking “Upload” displays the Planning
Metadata screen which allows upload of a
planning metadata file (see page 81).

Using Wi-Fi Connection 81

 To upload a planning metadata file
automatically
In the planning metadata file you want to load
automatically, add a “load” property to the
PlanningMetadata tag and set the value of the
property to “True.”
When you display the Web menu and insert a
media, the planning metadata file is immediately
loaded into the camcorder’s memory.
Example: <PlanningMetadata …sp
For Tablet
sp load="true" sp spversion="1.00">

For details on the planning metadata, refer to the

Operating Instructions supplied with the camcorder.

Using Live Logging Functions

The Live Logging function allows you to record
Chapter 4 Shooting

shot marks using a computer while you are

shooting. That is, you can use a computer to
record shot marks on the video being shot while
you are monitoring the video output from this Notes
camcorder. • Some serial lenses cannot be controlled from the Wi-Fi
remote commander. With any of such lenses mounted
on the camcorder, even when you try to perform focus/
Using the Wi-Fi Remote zoom control from the Wi-Fi remote commander, the
Commander focus/zoom setting value displayed on the Wi-Fi
remote commander continues to be [0].
When a Wi-Fi connection is established between • Even when a lens controllable from the Wi-Fi remote
commander is mounted on the camcorder, zoom
a device such as smartphone, tablet, PC, etc., and
control from the remote commander is not possible if
the camcorder, the Wi-Fi remote commander
the servo function for the zoom operation is disabled
appears on the device screen and the device can on the lens.
be used as a remote commander. • When a remote control unit is connected to the
You can start/stop recording, adjust iris/focus/ camcorder’s REMOTE connector and the white
zoom, etc., with a Wi-Fi connected device. This balance memory setting on the camcorder is other than
function is useful for setting the camcorder in a “A (memory A),” turning the Wi-Fi remote
remote place, such as the top of a crane, etc. commander on or off may cause the color to change.
• When a remote control unit is connected to the
The displays of Wi-Fi remote commander camcorder’s REMOTE connector, that unit has control
For smartphone priority and therefore the Wi-Fi remote commander
cannot work.

To display the Wi-Fi remote commander

To display the Wi-Fi remote commander on a
device screen, settings are required on both the
device and camcorder.
Camcorder settings

1 Set “MAINTENANCE” > “Wi-Fi

Setting” > “Wi-Fi” to “Enable” in the
setup menu.

82 Using Wi-Fi Connection

2 Set “MAINTENANCE” > “Wi-Fi
Compatible devices
Setting” > “Wi-Fi Remote” to “On” in
the setup menu. The following devices, using the specified
versions or higher, can be used as Wi-Fi remote
Device settings commanders.
Set the smartphone, tablet, PC, etc., to be used as
the Wi-Fi remote commander. Device OS Browser
PC Windows 7 Internet Explorer
1 Make a Wi-Fi connection between the 8 or Internet
device and camcorder (page 79). Explorer 9
Mac OS 10.7.4 Safari 5.1.6
2 Launch the browser and input http:// Smartphone Android 2.3.3 Standard browser
<camcorder’s IP address>/rm.html in iOS 5.1.1 Safari
the address bar. Tablet Android 4.0.3 Standard browser
Example: When the IP address is iOS 5.1.1 Safari
192.168.1.10, input http://192.168.1.10/
rm.html in the address bar.
The Wi-Fi remote commander will appear on
the device screen when the Wi-Fi connection
is established.

Chapter 4 Shooting
Thereafter operate the camcorder as shown
on the screen of the Wi-Fi connected device.
The REC button becomes unavailable when
the Lock switch is dragged to the right.
Notes
• Depending on the device, the Wi-Fi remote
commander may not appear properly on the device’s
screen even though you input http://<camcorder’s IP
address>/rm.html in the address bar. In this case, input
“rms.html” for a smartphone or “rmt.html” for a tablet
at the end of the address to display the Wi-Fi remote
commander properly.
• The Wi-Fi remote commander on the device’s screen
may no longer match the actual status of the camcorder
in the following cases. When this happens, refresh the
browser on the device.
- when the camcorder is restarted while the Wi-Fi
connection is established
- when the camcorder is controlled directly while the
Wi-Fi connection is established
- when the device is reconnected
- when you operate forward/backward on the device’s
browser.
• If the Wi-Fi signal is poor, the Wi-Fi remote
commander may not work properly.
• Your smartphone/tablet may not be compatible with
the ad hoc mode. For details, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with the smartphone/tablet.
• When using the Wi-Fi remote commander by
connecting the CBK-WA101 Wireless Adapter, set the
camcorder first, then connect the CBK-WA101.

Using Wi-Fi Connection 83

 - Turn on the assignable switch to which the
Basic Operations Rec function has been assigned (see
page 159).

During recording, the TALLY indicators, the

tally indicator on the front panel of the
viewfinder, and the REC indication on the
1 Attach a fully charged battery pack (see viewfinder screen light. Adjust the zoom and
page 29). focus as required.
Notes
2 Load one or two SxS memory cards (see
• Never remove the battery pack while the
page 60). camcorder is recording (while the ACCESS lamp
If you load two cards, the camcorder on the right-side panel is lit in blue and the
switches automatically to the second card ACCESS lamp in the card slot section is lit in
when the first card becomes full. orange). Doing so risks the loss of several
seconds of data before the recording was
3 Set the camcorder’s POWER switch interrupted, because internal processing will not
(see page 11) to ON. end normally.
• The playback control buttons (EJECT, F REV, F
4
Chapter 4 Shooting

Make the following settings. FWD, NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, STOP) do

Marker display: On (see page 120) not function during recording.
Iris: Auto (see page 52)
Zoom: Auto (see page 53)
10 To stop recording, perform one of the
Camera output: Select the picture currently
operations listed in step 9.
being shot (camera picture), and turn the The TALLY indicators, the tally indicator on
DCC function on (see page 15). the front panel of the viewfinder, and the
Timecode advance mode: F-RUN (Free REC indication on the viewfinder screen go
Run) or R-RUN (Rec Run) (see page 56) out, and camcorder enters recording standby
Audio input channel selection: Auto (see (STBY) mode.
page 21) A clip is created from the video and audio
data and the metadata recorded between steps
5 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the 9 and 10.
BLACK side to adjust the black balance
(see page 47). To check the recording (recording review)
With the camcorder in recording standby
6 Select a filter according to the lighting (STBY) mode, turn on the assignable switch
conditions, and adjust the white balance to which the Rec Review function or the
(see page 48). Freeze Mix function has been assigned (see
page 158).
7 Point the camcorder at the subject, and The camcorder plays the entire last clip, or
adjust the focus (see page 54) and zoom. the last few seconds of that clip (3 seconds or
10 seconds), and then returns to standby
8 If you are using the electronic shutter, mode.
select an appropriate shutter mode and When the Rec Review function is assigned to
speed (see page 50). the RET button on the lens, you can also
conduct a review by using the RET button.
9 Do one of the following to start
recording. 11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 to continue
- Press the REC START button (see recording.
page 13). With each repetition, another clip is created
- Press the VTR button on the lens (see on the memory card.
page 24).

84 Basic Operations
 Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 Playing Recorded Clips
When the camcorder is in standby (STBY) mode,
you can play all or part of the most recently
recorded clip (see page 84).
Notes
• You cannot resume recording for about one second
1 Insert the SxS memory card to play (see
after stopping recording.
page 60).
• The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on
one memory card is 600. Even if the memory card has
2 Press the PREV button (see page 16) or
enough free capacity to record more clips, when 600 the F REV button (see page 16) to cue
clips have been recorded, no further recording is up the clip to play.
possible.
Clip file sizes
3 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator lights, and the
Clip file sizes vary according to file formats.
playback picture appears in the viewfinder.
File File size Clip size To pause the playback
format Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
MP4 Less than 4 GB Less than half an The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes during

Chapter 4 Shooting
hour pause.
AVI Less than 2 GB Less than 9 minutes Press the button again to return to playback mode.
and 30 seconds
MXF Less than 43 GB Less than 6 hours To play at high speed
Press the F FWD button (see page 16) or the
If you continue recording for an extended period, F REV button (see page 16).
recorded materials may be segmented into To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/
multiple files, depending on the file size (the PAUSE button.
maximum number of partitions is 99).
To switch between memory cards
The camcorder regards MP4 and AVI files as one
When two memory cards are loaded, press the
clip even if it has been segmented into multiple
SLOT SELECT button (see page 19) to select the
files.
active slot.
Clip names It is not possible to switch between memory cards
Eight-character clips names (consisting of a four- during playback.
character prefix and a four-digit number) are
To end playback
generated automatically for clips recorded by this
Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and the
camcorder.
camcorder enters E-E mode.
Example: ABCD0001
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback
You can also use “OPERATION” > “Clip” >
stops, and a thumbnail screen (see page 96)
“Title Prefix” (see page 128) in the setup menu to
appears in the viewfinder.
set the clip name prefix to a user-specified string
Playback also stops and the timecode screen
of characters (four to 46 characters in length). (A
appears in the viewfinder when you start
user-specified prefix cannot be changed after
recording during playback, and when you eject an
recording.)
SxS memory card.
The four-digit number at the end of clip names is
generated automatically, counting up in order as
clips are recorded.

Basic Operations 85
 Deleting Recorded Clips
Advanced Operations
You can use the assignable switches to delete the
last recorded clips (Last Clip DEL function).
You can also use the THUMBNAIL menu to delete all
recorded clips (All Clips DEL function) or to delete
selected clips. For details, see “Deleting Clips”
(page 105). Recording Shot Marks
1 Turn on the assignable switch to which On this camcorder, two types of shot marks are
the Last Clip DEL function has been available in HD mode. You can record them at
assigned (see page 159). user-specified positions to make it easier for
A confirmation message appears. editors to cue up those positions.
You can record up to 127 shot marks per clip.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select
“Execute,” and then press the knob. Note
Shot marks cannot be recorded in SD mode.
You can also use the THUMBNAIL menu to add and
Chapter 4 Shooting

delete shot marks in clips. For details, see “Adding

and Deleting Shot Marks (UDF/exFAT/FAT-HD
Mode Only)” (page 107).

To record shot marks

Do one of the following.
• Turn on an assignable switch to which Shot
Mark 1 or Shot Mark 2 has been assigned (see
page 158).
• If Lens RET has been assigned to the RET
button on the lens, operate as follows.
To record shot mark 1: Press the RET button
once.
To record shot mark 2: Press the RET button
twice in quick succession.

When a shot mark is recorded, a “Shot Mark 1” or

“Shot Mark 2” indication appears in the
viewfinder for about three seconds near the
timecode indication.

Setting OK Marks
To make it easier for editors to select good clips,
you can set OK marks in clips recorded in HD
mode.
Notes
• OK marks cannot be set in SD mode.
• OK marks cannot be set or deleted during recording or
playback.

86 Advanced Operations
To add/delete OK marks selecting a different video format. Picture data from
You can also use the THUMBNAIL menu to add before the change is not recorded even if you start
and delete OK marks in previously recorded clips. recording immediately after the change. The
camcorder exits picture cache mode automatically.
For details, see “Adding/Deleting the OK Mark
• It is not possible to set the picture cache time during
(FAT-HD Mode Only)” (page 104).
recording.
• When “OPERATION” > “Format” > “Rec Format” is
set to “XAVC-l,” the Picture Cache time can be set up
Starting to Record from Pre- to 4 seconds.
stored Video (Picture Cache
Camcorder data handling while recording in
Function) picture cache mode
Recording procedures in picture cache mode are
The camcorder is equipped with enough internal
basically the same as normal recording
memory to pre-store up to 15 seconds of video
procedures. However, note the following
and audio data in a picture cache. This allows you
differences with respect to how the camcorder
to begin recording a specified number of seconds
handles video, time, and output data.
in advance of the time when you press a recording
• If you start recording while the media is being
start button.
accessed, the start point of the video that is
actually recorded may be later than the
Selecting picture cache mode and setting currently specified picture cache time. Because

Chapter 4 Shooting
the picture cache time the delay increases as the number of recorded
Before recording in picture cache mode, you need clips increases, you should avoid rapid start-
to perform the “Picture Cache Rec” and “P. and-stop recording operations in picture cache
Cache Rec Time” settings in the “OPERATION” mode.
menu (see page 117). • Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/
You can also select picture cache mode by using R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the
an assignable switch to which the Picture Cache internal timecode generator is always F-RUN.
function has been assigned (see page 158). • In picture cache mode, you cannot set time data
The picture cache time determines how far in by setting the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
advance you can start recording, counting back in SET.
seconds from the operation that starts recording. To set time data, exit picture cache mode.
Note that it may not be possible to start this far in • If the remaining free capacity of the media in
advance in the special cases explained in the the currently selected slot is less than the picture
following notes. cache time, and the media in the other slot has
enough remaining capacity, then data is
Notes recorded to the media in the other slot.
• Storage of picture data to memory begins when you However, no data is recorded when there is no
select picture cache mode. Therefore, if you start media in the other slot, and when the media in
recording immediately after selecting picture cache the other slot does not have enough remaining
mode, the picture data from before the selection is not capacity. (A message appears in the viewfinder
recorded.
to inform you that there is not enough remaining
• No data is recorded to picture cache memory during
capacity.)
playback or recording review and display of
thumbnails. It is not possible to record picture data • Shot marks are not recorded if they are set
from the time you were conducting playback or a before the recording start operation.
recording review. • When you select a video format that supports
• Picture cache recording is not possible in Frame Rec, i.LINK HDV output and play a clip that was
Interval Rec, and Slow & Quick Motion mode. The recorded in picture cache mode, two or more
camcorder exits Frame Rec, Interval Rec, or Slow & frames with the same picture and timecode may
Quick Motion mode whenever you select picture cache follow on each other.
mode. The camcorder exits picture cache mode • i.LINK output is possible during picture cache
automatically whenever you select Frame Rec,
recording. However, the picture cache time is
Interval Rec, or Slow & Quick Motion mode.
limited.
• The data stored in picture cache memory is cleared
when you change the system settings, for example by

Advanced Operations 87
 If power is lost during recording The camcorder exits Interval Rec mode when it is
• If you set the camcorder’s POWER switch to powered off, but the “Number of Frames,”
OFF, the camcorder is powered off “Interval Time,” and “Pre-Lighting” settings are
automatically after a few seconds, during which maintained. You do not need to set them again the
the media is accessed to record the video and next time you shoot in Interval Rec mode.
audio data stored in the camcorder’s memory up
Notes
to that point.
• If power is lost because the battery was • The Interval Rec, Picture Cache Rec, Frame Rec, and
Slow & Quick Motion function cannot be used at the
removed, the DC cable was disconnected, or the
same time. When you select one of those modes, the
power was turned off on the AC adaptor side,
previously selected function is disabled automatically.
then the video and audio data stored in memory • The data stored in picture cache memory is cleared
is lost. The data stored in memory is not when you change the system settings, for example by
recorded. Be careful to avoid this when selecting a different video format. Picture data from
exchanging the battery. before the change is not recorded even if you start
recording immediately after the change. The
camcorder exits picture cache mode automatically.
Recording Time-lapse Video • Interval Rec settings cannot be changed during
(Interval Rec Function) recording.
• Interval Rec is disabled when the following formats
are selected.
Chapter 4 Shooting

The camcorder’s Interval Rec function allows

- SP 1440/59.94i or SP 1440/50i, when the output
you to capture time-lapse video to the
setting is HD and “OPERATION” > “Input/Output”
camcorder’s internal memory. This function is an
> “i.LINK I/O” in the setup menu is set to “Enable”
effective way to shoot slow-moving subjects. - SP 1440/23.98P (pull-down recording)
When you start recording, the camcorder - Other than HQ 1920/23.98P or HQ 1280/23.98P,
automatically records a specified number of when the output setting is SD and “OPERATION” >
frames at a specified interval time. “Input/Output” > “i.LINK I/O” in the setup menu is
set to “Enable”
Interval time
• If you want to turn the video light on before the start of
recording, set the camcorder’s LIGHT switch to
AUTO. The video light’s switch must also be turned
on. When this is done, the video light turns on and off
automatically. However, the video light remains lit
when the time that it is off is five seconds or less.
• If you set the LIGHT switch to MANUAL and turn the
video light’s switch on, the video light is always lit. (It
does not go on and off automatically.)
To shoot in Interval Rec mode
Make the settings and preparations described in
“Basic Operations” (page 84), secure the
Number of frames in one take camcorder so that it does not move, and begin
shooting.
A pre-lighting function is available when Interval
Rec is enabled. This function automatically turns When recording starts, the “Interval” indication
on a video light before recording starts, which in the viewfinder changes from flashing to lit, and
allows you to record pictures under stable light “INT REC” and “INT STBY” appear
and color temperature conditions. alternatively at the position of the REC
indication. The TALLY indicators and the tally
Interval Rec settings and shooting indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light
Before recording in Interval Rec mode, you need as they do during normal recording.
to perform the “Interval Rec,” “Number of If you are using the pre-lighting function, the
Frames,” “Interval Time,” and “Pre-Lighting” video light comes on before recording starts.
settings in the “OPERATION” menu (see
page 118).

88 Advanced Operations
Limitations during recording Notes
• The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector cannot be
• The Interval Rec, Picture Cache Rec, Frame Rec, and
used. Slow & Quick Motion function cannot be used at the
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/ same time. When you select one of those modes, the
R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the previously selected function is disabled automatically.
internal timecode generator is always R-RUN. • The data stored in memory is cleared when you change
• Audio cannot be recorded. the system settings, for example by selecting a
• Recording review is not possible. different video format. Picture data from before the
• If you press the SLOT SELECT button, the change is not recorded even if you start recording
camcorder completes recording of the specified immediately after the change. The camcorder exits
Frame Rec mode automatically.
number of frames, creates a clip, and switches
• Frame Rec settings cannot be changed during
to the other media.
recording.
• Genlock is not possible. • Frame Rec is disabled when the following formats are
If power is lost during recording selected.
• If you set the camcorder’s POWER switch to - SP 1440/59.94i or SP 1440/50i, when the output
OFF, the camcorder is powered off setting is HD and “OPERATION” > “Input/Output”
> “i.LINK I/O” in the setup menu is set to “Enable”
automatically after a few seconds, during which
- SP 1440/23.98P (pull-down recording)
the media is accessed to record the video and
- Other than HQ 1920/23.98P or HQ 1280/23.98P,
audio data stored in the camcorder’s memory up

Chapter 4 Shooting
when the output setting is SD and “OPERATION” >
to that point. “Input/Output” > “i.LINK I/O” in the setup menu is
• If power is lost because the battery was set to “Enable”
removed, the DC cable was disconnected, or the
To shoot in Frame Rec mode
power was turned off on the AC adaptor side,
Make the settings and preparations described in
then the video and audio data shot up to that
“Basic Operations” (page 84), secure the
point may be lost (maximum 15 seconds). Be
camcorder so that it does not move, and begin
careful to avoid this when exchanging the
shooting.
battery.
When recording starts, the “Frame Rec”
Shooting Stop Motion Animations indication in the viewfinder changes from
flashing to lit, and “FRM REC” and “FRM
(Frame Rec Function)
STBY” appear alternatively at the position of the
The Frame Rec function is useful for shooting REC indication. The TALLY indicators and the
stop motion animations, such as animations with tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder
puppets or clay figures. light as they do during normal recording.
Each time that you press the recording start Limitations during recording
button, the camcorder shoots a specified number • The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector cannot be
of frames and then stops. used.
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/
Frame Rec settings and shooting R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the
internal timecode generator is always R-RUN.
Before recording in Frame Rec mode, you need to
• Audio cannot be recorded.
perform the “Frame Rec” and “Number of
• Recording review is not possible.
Frames” settings in the “OPERATION” menu
• If you press the SLOT SELECT button, the
(see page 118).
camcorder completes recording of the specified
The camcorder exits Frame Rec mode when it is
number of frames, creates a clip, and switches
powered off, but the setting for the number of
to the other media.
frames setting is maintained. You do not need to
• Genlock is not possible.
set it again the next time you shoot in Frame Rec
mode. If power is lost during recording
• If you set the camcorder’s POWER switch to
OFF, the camcorder is powered off
automatically after a few seconds, during which

Advanced Operations 89
 the media is accessed to record the video and When the “Country” setting is “PAL Area”
audio data stored in the camcorder’s memory up
to that point. Recording format System frequency
• If power is lost because the battery was XAVC-I 1920/25P
removed, the DC cable was disconnected, or the 1280/50P
power was turned off on the AC adaptor side, XAVC-L50 1920/25P
then the video and audio data shot up to that 1280/50P
point may be lost (maximum 15 seconds). Be XAVC-L35 1920/25P
careful to avoid this when exchanging the HD422 50/1920/25P
battery. 50/1280/50P
50/1280/25P
HQ 1920/25P
Shooting with Slow & Quick 1280/50P
1280/25P
Motion
When the camcorder is in HD mode and the video Slow & Quick Motion settings and
format (see page 44) is set to one of the formats shooting
listed below, you can specify a recording frame Before recording in Slow & Quick Motion mode,
rate that is different from the playback frame rate. you need to perform the “Slow & Quick” and
Chapter 4 Shooting

When the “Country” setting is “NTSC Area”/ “Frame Rate” settings in the “OPERATION”
”NTSC(J) Area” menu (see page 117).
Recording format System frequency
When you finish making these settings, the
system frequency and the frame rate appear at the
XAVC-I 1920/29.97P
top of the viewfinder screen. You can change the
1920/23.98P
1280/59.94P frame rate while viewing the display in the
viewfinder by turning the MENU knob.
XAVC-L50 1920/29.97P
1920/23.98P The Slow & Quick Motion mode setting and the
1280/59.94P frame rate are retained even after the camcorder is
XAVC-L35 1920/29.97P powered off.
1920/23.98P Notes
HD422 50/1920/29.97P • The Interval Rec, Picture Cache Rec, Frame Rec, and
50/1920/23.98P Slow & Quick Motion function cannot be used at the
50/1280/59.94P same time. When you select one of those modes, the
50/1280/29.97P previously selected function is disabled automatically.
50/1280/23.98P • Slow & Quick Motion is disabled when the slow
HQ 1920/29.97P shutter function (viewfinder display “SLS”) function is
1920/23.98P enabled. The slow shutter function is disabled when
1280/59.94P the Slow & Quick Motion function is enabled.
1280/29.97P • Slow & Quick Motion is disabled when
1280/23.98P “OPERATION” > “Input/Output” > “i.LINK I/O” in
the setup menu is set to “Enable.” When Slow & Quick
Motion is enabled, “i.LINK I/O” is fixed as “Disable.”
• Slow & Quick Motion settings cannot be changed
during recording.
To shoot in Slow & Quick Motion mode
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 84).
When recording starts, the “S&Q STBY”
indication in the viewfinder changes to the
“zS&Q REC” indication. The TALLY
indicators and the tally indicator on the front

90 Advanced Operations
panel of the viewfinder light as they do during • The Clip Continuous Rec function is disabled when the
normal recording. recording mode is FAT.

Limitations during recording To make Clip Continuous Rec settings

• The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector cannot be
used. 1 Select “OPERATION” > “Rec
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/ Function” > “Clip Continuous Rec” in
R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the the setup menu.
internal timecode generator is always R-RUN. See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 110)
• Audio cannot be recorded when the recording for more information about menu operations.
and playback frame rates differ.
• Recording review is not possible. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select “On,”
• If you change the recording frame rate to a value and then press the knob.
faster than the current shutter speed, the shutter The “CONT” indication flashes in the
speed is changed to the slowest value for which viewfinder, and the function is enabled.
shooting is possible.
Example: If the frame rate is 32 and the shutter You can assign the Clip Continuous Rec on/off
speed is 1/40, and you change the frame rate to function to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3 switches,
55, then the shutter speed is changed to 1/60. ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches, and the COLOR
If is not possible to select a shutter speed that is TEMP button.

Chapter 4 Shooting
slower than the recording frame rate. For details, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable
• Genlock is not possible. Switches” (page 158).
To shoot in Clip Continuous Rec mode
Recording with the Clip Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 84).
Continuous Rec Function When recording starts, the “CONT” indication in
the viewfinder changes to “zREC” indication.
Normally, a clip is created as an independent file
The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on
each time that you start and stop recording. But
the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do
this function allows you to start and stop
during normal recording.
recording while continuously recording to the
same clip, for as long as the function remains Note
enabled. This is convenient when you do not want During recording or in recording standby mode (when
to generate a large number of short clips, and the “CONT” indication is lit), if you remove the media,
when you want to record without worrying about the battery, or the power source, the media needs to be
exceeding the clip limit. It is still easy to find restored. It is not possible to restore media on a device
recording start points, because a Rec Start essence other than this camcorder.
mark is recorded at the recording start point each Exit Clip Continuous Rec mode (see page 92) and then
time you start recording. remove the media.
When the “CONT” indication is flashing (at 1 flash/s),
you can remove the media.
Clip Continuous Rec settings and
To stop shooting
shooting
Stop the recording.
Notes The camcorder changes to the recording standby
mode (STBY) and the “CONT” indication lights
• The Clip Continuous Rec function cannot be used at
the same time as the Picture Cache, Interval Rec, up.
Frame Rec, or Slow & Quick Motion function. When Note
you select Clip Continuous Rec mode, the Picture
Cache, Interval Rec, Frame Rec, and Slow & Quick Stop the recording after the recording continues for two
Motion functions are disabled. When you select or more seconds.
picture cache, Frame Rec, Interval Rec, or Slow &
Quick Motion mode, the Clip Continuous Rec function
is disabled.

Advanced Operations 91
 To exit Clip Continuous Rec mode • Menu operations
With the camcorder in recording standby mode, • During Focus Mag display
set “OPERATION” > “Rec Function” > “Clip • Marker display
Continuous Rec” in the setup menu to “Off.” • Zebra display
• Peaking display
Limitations during recording • Skin details display
A single continuous clip cannot be created if you
perform one of the following operations while the
To cancel the freeze mix display
camcorder is in recording or recording standby
mode (A new clip will be created when you next Do one of the following.
start recording.) • Press an assignable switch again to which the
• Operate on a clip (lock, delete, or rename a clip) Freeze Mix function has been assigned.
• Change the slot The freeze mix display is canceled and the
• Change the recording format display returns to the normal camera picture.
• Turn off the POWER switch • Start recording (see page 84).
• Playback Normal recording starts.
• Switched to thumbnail mode

Framing Shots with the Freeze

Chapter 4 Shooting

Mix Function
The freeze mix function allows you to
temporarily overlap a still image (freeze picture)
from a clip shot in HD mode onto the current
camera picture. This makes it easier to frame the
shot.
Note
The freeze mix function is not available in the following
cases.
• When the recording format is SP 1440/23.98P
• When the video formats of the recorded picture and the
camera picture differ
• When you are shooting in Slow & Quick Motion mode
or slow shutter mode
• When there is i.LINK input

To display a freeze mix picture

1 Play a clip or conduct a recording

review of a clip with the same format as
the camera picture.

2 Display the picture that you want to use

as the frame, and then turn on the
assignable switch to which the Freeze
Mix function has been assigned.
The recording review picture is frozen and
overlaps the camera picture.
Note
The following functions are disabled at the freeze mix
times.

92 Advanced Operations
 Loading a Planning Metadata File
Planning Metadata into Camcorder’s Internal Memory
Operations
To record planning metadata together with
recording clips, you need to load a planning
metadata file into the camcorder’s memory before
Planning metadata is information about shooting starting to shoot.
and recording plans, recorded in an XML file. There are two ways to load files.
• Load a file that has been written to the following
directories on an SxS memory card or a USB
flash drive.

Recording Media Directory to which

mode files are written
FAT SxS memory BPAV\General\Sony\
card Planning
SDHC PRIVATE\SONY\
BPAV\General\Sony\
Planning

Chapter 4 Shooting
exFAT SxS memory XDROOT\General\
Example of a planning metadata file card Sony\Planning
USB flash General\Sony\Planning
You can shoot using clip names and shot mark
drive
names defined in advance in a planning metadata
UDF SxS memory General\Sony\Planning
file.
card
The camcorder can display clip names and shot
USB flash
mark names defined in the following languages.
drive
• English
• Chinese • When a Wi-Fi connection is made between the
• German camcorder and a computer, operate the Web
• French 1) menu built in the camcorder from the computer
• Italian to transfer a file.
• Spanish
• Dutch 1) To load a planning metadata file by menu
• Portuguese operation
• Swedish
Do the following procedures with
• Norwegian
“OPERATION” > “Planning Metadata” in the
• Danish
setup menu.
• Finnish 1)
1) Some characters are displayed as different but similar To load a file in an SxS memory card
characters.

Note
1 Insert an SxS memory card into the
memory card slot A or B, and set
If you define clip name and shot mark names in “Load/Slot(A)” or “Load/Slot(B)” to
languages other than the above, they may not be
“Execute.”
displayed on the viewfinder screen.
On the viewfinder screen, only alphanumeric characters
A file list appears.
and symbols can be displayed. Note
The file list displays up to 64 files.
Even if the total number of planning metadata files
is 64 or less, all of the planning metadata files may
not appear if the directory where they are located on

Planning Metadata Operations 93

 the SxS memory card (General/Sony/Planning) menu, then select which type of clip name is
contains 512 or more files. displayed.
When a clip name is set with planning metadata,
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to the name is displayed under the depth of field
load and press the knob. indication on the viewfinder screen.
To load a file in a USB flash drive (in UDF mode)
Clip name string example
1 Connect a USB flash drive formatted
Use a text editor to modify the two fields in the
with the FAT32 file system to the
<Title> tag that contain the clip name strings.
external device connector (see page 64).
The shaded fields in the example are clip name
A file list appears.
strings. “Typhoon” is described in ASCII format
Note (up to 44 characters). “Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo”
The file list displays up to 64 files. is described in UTF-8 format (up to 44 bytes).
Even if the total number of planning metadata files “sp” indicates a space and 3 indicates a carriage
is 64 or less, all of the planning metadata files may return.
not appear if the directory where they are located on
the USB flash driver (General/Sony/Planning) <?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
contains 512 or more files. UTF-8"?>3
<PlanningMetadataspxmlns="http://
Chapter 4 Shooting

2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/

load and press the knob. planningmetadata"spassignId="
P0001"spcreationDate="
To display detailed information in 2011-08-20T17:00:00+09:00"sp
planning metadata lastUpdate="
After loading planning metadata into the 2011-09-28T10:30:00+09:00"sp
camcorder, you can check the detailed version="1.00">3
information that it contains, such as file names, <PropertiessppropertyId="
date and time of creation, and titles. assignment"spupdate="
Select “OPERATION” > “Plan.Metadata” > 2011-09-28T10:30:00+09:00"sp
“Properties” (see page 129) in the setup menu, modifiedBy="Chris">3
then select “Execute.” <TitlespusAscii=" Typhoon "sp
xml:lang="en"> Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo
</Title>3
To clear the planning metadata loaded
</Properties>3
Select “OPERATION” > “Plan.Metadata” > </PlanningMetadata>3
“Clear” (see page 129) in the setup menu, then
select “Execute.” Notes
• When you create a file, enter each statement as a single
line with a CRLF only after the last character in the
Defining Clip Names in Planning statement line, and do not enter spaces except where
specified.
Metadata • Up to 44 bytes (or characters) string is available for the
clip name.
The following two types of clip name strings can
If the UTF-8 format string exceeds 44 bytes, 44 bytes
be written in a planning metadata file. string is used as the clip name.
• The ASCII format name that appears in the If only ASCII format name is specified, 44 characters
viewfinder string is used as the clip name.
• The UTF-8 format name that is actually When neither an ASCII format name string nor UTF-8
registered as the clip name format name string can be used, the standard format
clip name is used.
Select “OPERATION” > “Plan.Metadata” > You can use the Sony Planning Metadata Add-in
“Clip Name Disp” (see page 129) in the setup application software supplied with the CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adapter to define clip names. For details, refer

94 Planning Metadata Operations

to the Operating Instructions supplied with the CBK- <?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
WA01. UTF-8"?>3
<PlanningMetadata xmlns="http://
To set clip names xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata"spassignId="
Load a planning metadata file that contains clip
H00123"spcreationDate="
names into this camcorder, select
2011-04-15T08:00:00Z"splastUpdate="
“OPERATION” > “Clip” > “Auto Naming” (see
2011-04-15T15:00:00Z"spversion=
page 127) in the setup menu, then select “Plan.”
"1.00">3
Each time that you record a clip, the camcorder
<PropertiessppropertyId=
automatically generates a name consisting of the
"assignment"spclass="original"sp
clip name defined in the planning metadata file,
update="2011-04-15T15:00:00Z"sp
with the addition of an underbar (_) and a four-
modifiedBy="Chris">3
digit serial number (0001 to 9999).
<TitlespusAscii="Football
Examples: Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_0001,
Game"spxml:lang="en">
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_0002, ...
Football Game 15/04/2011</
Note Title>3
• When the serial number reaches to 9999, it returns to <Metaspname="_ShotMark1"sp
0001 with the next recording operation. content=" Goal "/>3

Chapter 4 Shooting
• When you load another planning metadata file, the <Metaspname="_ShotMark2"sp
serial number returns to 0001. content=" Shoot "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark3"sp
content=" Corner Kick "/>3
Defining Shot Mark Names in <Metaspname="_ShotMark4"sp
Planning Metadata content=" Free Kick "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark5"sp
When you use planning metadata to set shot content=" Goal Kick "/>3
marks, you can define names for Shot Mark 0 to <Metaspname="_ShotMark6"sp
Shot Mark 9. content=" Foul "/>3
When you record shot marks, you can add the <Metaspname="_ShotMark7"sp
shot mark name strings defined in the planning content=" PK "/>3
metadata. <Metaspname="_ShotMark8"sp
Note content=" 1st Half "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark9"sp
Shot Mark 1 and Shot Mark 2 can be recorded on the
camcorder. Shot Mark 3 to Shot Mark 9 and Shot Mark
content=" 2nd Half "/>3
0 can be recorded by operation from a computer which is <Metaspname="_ShotMark0"sp
connected with the camcorder via Wi-Fi. content=" Kick Off "/>3
</Properties>3
Shot mark name string example </PlanningMetadata>3

Use a text editor to modify the fields in the < Meta Note
name> tag. When you create a definition file, enter each statement as
The shaded fields in the example are essence a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in
mark name strings. Names can be either in ASCII the statement line, and do not enter spaces except where
format (up to 32 characters) or UTF-8 format (up specified, except within essence mark name strings.
to 16 characters). You can use the Sony Planning Metadata Add-in
“sp” indicates a space and 3 indicates a carriage application software supplied with the CBK-WA01
return. Wi-Fi Adapter to Essence mark names. For details,
refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the
Note CBK-WA01.
If a name string contains even one non-ASCII character,
the maximum length of that string is 16 characters.

Planning Metadata Operations 95

 Chapter 5 Clip Operations
Clip Playback

A thumbnail screen appears if you press the THUMBNAIL button in E-E or playback mode. Thumbnail
screens display lists of the clips stored on SxS memory cards in the form of index pictures. (A message
appears if you insert a memory card that contains no clips.)
You can select any clip (see page 97) in a thumbnail screen and start playback of that clip (see page 98).
To exit the thumbnail screen, press the THUMBNAIL button again.

Thumbnail Screen
In thumbnail screens, the timecode of the index picture appears beneath the thumbnail for each clip. (An
OK mark also appears when a clip has been marked with an OK mark.)
The clip information on the cursor location is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Cursor (yellow)
The icon of the currently selected SxS memory card is highlighted.
Chapter 5 Clip Operations

(If the card is write protected, a lock mark appears on the left.)

Clip number/Number of clips

96 Clip Playback
a Index picture FAT-HD mode: When an OK mark is added to
UDF, exFAT, FAT-HD mode: When a clip is the selected clip, the OK mark is added to the clip.
recorded, its first frame is set automatically as the
index picture. You can change the index picture i File format
to any frame (see page 107). If the clip is locked Indicates the file format of the selected clip
or the OK mark is on the clip, the lock mark (MXF, MP4. AVI). (File format does not indicate
appears. when in UDF/HD mode.)
FAT-SD mode: When a clip is recorded, its first
frame is set automatically as the index picture. If j Clip duration
the file size is larger than 2 GB, and that the clip
k Timecode
has been split before being saved, the take mark
This is the timecode of the index picture.
appears.You can check the segment files on
the expand thumbnail screen (see page 105). Note
Normal thumbnail screens display SD clips only or HD
b Date and start time of recording clips only, even if the SxS memory card contains clips in
both formats. You can select the format to display by
c Clip name selecting a mode with “OPERATION” > “Format” >
The number after the clip name (delimited by /) is “HD/SD” (see page 113) in the setup menu.
the number of components. This appears only for If you want to display all recorded clips, regardless of the
clips larger than 2 GB in size, which have been HD/SD mode, switch to the all clips thumbnail screen.
split into smaller files for storage in the FAT-SD However, it is not possible to start playback from the all
mode. clips thumbnail screen (see page 102).

d Lock mark (UDF, exFAT, and FAT-HD To switch between SxS memory cards
mode only) When two SxS memory cards are loaded, you can

Chapter 5 Clip Operations

Indicates the selected clip is marked with an OK switch between them by pressing the SLOT
mark. SELECT button.
e Independent AV file icon (UDF, exFAT, Note
and FAT-HD mode only) While an expand thumbnail screen (see page 98) or a
Appears only when a clip is an independent AV shot mark (essence mark) thumbnail screen (see
file. SxS memory cards may contain independent page 106) is displayed, SxS memory cards cannot be
files that have been added directly from a switched.
computer. Because independent files lack the
associated management files, some operations
and information displays may not be available. Playing Clips

f Video format of recording To select clip thumbnails

g Special recording information (UDF, Do one of the following to move the yellow
exFAT, and FAT-HD mode only) cursor to the clip that you want to select.
• Press an arrow button (J, j, K, k).
Displays the mode of clips that have been
• Turn the MENU knob.
recorded in a special mode (Slow & Quick
• Press the PREV or NEXT button.
Motion, Interval Rec, Frame Rec).
For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the frame rates To select the first thumbnail
are displayed to the right as “Recording frame With the F REV button held down, press the
rate/Playback frame rate” fps. PREV button.
To select the last thumbnail
h OK, NG, KP mark (UDF, exFAT, and
With the F FWD button held down, press the
FAT-HD mode only)
NEXT button.
UDF, exFAT: When an OK, NG, or KP flag is
added to the selected clip, the corresponding mark
is added to the clip.

Clip Playback 97
 To play clips sequentially starting from a To add a shot mark during play (HD mode
selected clip only)
You can add shot marks to clips during play by
1 Select the thumbnail of the clip that you using the same method used during recording (see
want to play first. page 86).

2 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. Notes

Play begins from the top of the selected clip. • Shot marks cannot be recorded when the SxS memory
card is write protected.
Play continues through all clips after the selected • Shot marks cannot be added at the first frame of each
clip. clip or last frame of the last clip.
When the last clip has been played to the end, the
camcorder enters pause (still image) mode at the
last frame of the last clip.
Using Thumbnails to Search
Press the THUMBNAIL button to return to the Inside Clips
thumbnail screen.
Playback also stops if you eject the memory card. • Expand thumbnail screen
In this case, the camera picture appears in the • Shot mark thumbnail screen (HD mode only)
viewfinder.
Like the normal thumbnail screen and the OK clip
Notes thumbnail screen, these screens allow you to
• There may be momentary picture breakup or still select clip thumbnails (see page 97) and to start
image display at the transition from one clip to another. clip playback (see page 98).
During this time, the playback controls and the
THUMBNAIL button cannot be operated.
Chapter 5 Clip Operations

To search for scenes in clips with the

• When you select a clip in the thumbnail screen and
begin playback, there may be momentary picture expand thumbnail screen
breakup at the top of the clip. To view the top of the To display the expand thumbnail screen, select a
clip without breakup, put the camcorder into playback clip in the thumbnail screen and press the
mode, pause, use the PREV button to return to the top
EXPAND button (see page 17) or select
of the clip, and start playback again.
“THUMBNAIL” > “Thumbnail View” >
• On SxS memory cards that contain both HD-mode and
SD-mode clips, you cannot play all clips in sequence.
“Forward Expansion” in the setup menu. The
For example, while an HD mode thumbnail screen is selected clip is displayed as follows.
displayed, only HD mode clips are played in sequence. HD mode: The clip is divided into 12 equally-
sized blocks, and a thumbnail of the first
To cue up clips frame in each block is displayed.
SD mode: Only in the case of clips that have been
To play from the top of the first clip split into partial files because the file size was
Simultaneously press the PREV and F REV larger than 2 GB, a thumbnail of the first
buttons. This jumps to the top of the first clip on frame of each partial file is displayed.
the SxS memory card. See “Displaying the Expand Thumbnail Screen
To play from the top of the last clip (UDF/exFAT/FAT-HD Mode only)” (page 105) for
Simultaneously press the NEXT and F FWD more information about the expand thumbnail
buttons. This jumps to the top of the last clip on screen.
the SxS memory card.

98 Clip Playback
To search for shot marks in clips with the
shot mark thumbnail screen (HD mode
only)
When a clip contains one or more shot marks, you
can easily find them with the shot mark thumbnail
screen. The shot mark thumbnail screen displays
a thumbnail of each shot mark frame in the clip.
To display the shot mark thumbnail screen, press
the ESSENCE MARK button (see page 18) or
select “THUMBNAIL” > “Thumbnail View” >
“Essence Mark Thumbnail” in the setup menu.
See “Displaying the Shot Mark Thumbnail Screen
(UDF/exFAT/FAT-HD Mode Only)” (page 106) for
more information about the shot mark thumbnail
screen.

Chapter 5 Clip Operations

Clip Playback 99
 Thumbnail Operations

You can use the THUMBNAIL menu to perform various operations on clips, to check clip properties, and
to change clip metadata.

THUMBNAIL Menu Configuration

Menu items Sub-items Description

Clip Properties — Displays detailed properties (see page 103).
Set Index Picture — Changes index pictures in the expand thumbnail screen or
the essence mark thumbnail screen (see page 107).
UDF / exFAT /
FAT-HD
Thumbnail View Forward Expansion • Displays the expand thumbnail screen (see page 105).
• In the expand thumbnail screen, increases the number of
divisions (see page 106).
Back Expansion In the expand thumbnail screen, decreases the number of
divisions.
Essence Mark Thumbnail Displays the essence mark thumbnail screen (see
UDF / exFAT /
Chapter 5 Clip Operations

page 106).
FAT-HD Clip Thumbnail Displays the normal thumbnail screen.
All Clip Thumbnail Displays the all clips thumbnail screen (see page 102).
Set Shot Mark Add Shot Mark1 In the expand thumbnail screen or the essence mark
thumbnail screen, adds a Shot Mark1 mark (see page 107).
UDF / exFAT /
Delete Shot Mark1 In the expand thumbnail screen or the essence mark
FAT-HD thumbnail screen, deletes a Shot Mark1 mark (see
page 107).
Add Shot Mark2 In the expand thumbnail screen or the essence mark
thumbnail screen, adds a Shot Mark2 mark (see page 107).
Delete Shot Mark2 In the expand thumbnail screen or the essence mark
thumbnail screen, deletes a Shot Mark2 mark (see
page 107).
Set Clip Flag OK Adds an OK mark.
UDF NG Adds an NG mark.
KP(Keep) Adds a KP mark.
None Deletes an OK, an NG or a KP mark.
Add OK Mark — Adds an OK mark and protects a clip (see page 104).
FAT-HD
Delete OK Mark — Deletes an OK mark and unprotects a clip (see page 104).
FAT-HD
Lock Clip — Protects a clip.
UDF / exFAT

100 Thumbnail Operations

Menu items Sub-items Description
Unlock Clip — Cancels protection of a clip.
UDF
Copy Clip Copy Clip(A)/Copy Clip(B)/ Copies a clip (see page 104).
Copy Clip(USB)
Delete Clip — Deletes a clip (see page 105).
Divide Clip — Divides a clip (see page 107).
FAT-HD
Filter Clips — Displays the OK clip thumbnail screen (see page 102).
FAT-HD
Filter Clips OK Displays the OK clip thumbnail screen.
UDF / exFAT NG Displays the NG clip thumbnail screen.
KP(Keep) Displays the KP clip thumbnail screen.
None Displays a None clip (clip which has not been marked OK,
NG, or KP) thumbnail screen.
Lock All Clips — Protects all clips displayed.
UDF / exFAT
Unlock All Clips — Cancels protection of all clips displayed.
UDF / exFAT
Copy All All Clips Batch copies groups of clips/files (see page 104).

Chapter 5 Clip Operations

General Files
All Clips & General Files
Delete All Clips Execute/Cancel Deletes all unprotected clips (see page 105).

Thumbnail Operations 101

 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button: Playback from
Basic THUMBNAIL Menu the selected clip starts.
Operations
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 110) for Changing the Thumbnail Screen
information about menu operations. Type
To display the THUMBNAIL menu
To display OK clip thumbnails (HD mode
only)
1 Press the THUMBNAIL button to
display the thumbnail screen. When the normal thumbnail screen is displayed,
you can select “THUMBNAIL” > “Filter Clips”
2 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, to switch to the OK clip thumbnail screen.
or press the MENU button. See “Adding/Deleting the OK Mark (FAT-HD Mode
Only)” (page 104) for information about how to add
3 Turn the MENU knob to select “TH,” OK marks.
and then press the knob. Or press the J
or j button to select “TH,” and then OK/NG/KP/None-Clip thumbnail screen
press the SET button.
The THUMBNAIL menu appears. Only the clips flagged OK/NG/KP—or clips with
no flag (“None”)—among the clips on the current
To hide the THUMBNAIL menu, press the SxS memory card are displayed.
MENU button again. You can select the type of flag to display with
“THUMBNAIL” > “Filter Clips” (see page 101).
To select menu items and sub-items
Chapter 5 Clip Operations

To display the all clips thumbnail screen

Do one of the following.
• Turn the MENU knob to select an item or sub- When the normal thumbnail screen is displayed,
item, and then press the knob. you can switch to the all clips thumbnail screen
• Press the arrow buttons (J, j, K, k) to by selecting “THUMBNAIL” > “All Clip
select an item or sub-item, and then press the Thumbnail.”
SET button.
According to the selected item or sub-item, a Pressing the RESET/RETURN button returns
selection list or a clip properties screen appears you to the normal thumbnails screen, where you
(see page 103). can perform playback and other clip operations.
To return to the previous state, push the MENU Note
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the
You cannot start playback from the all clips thumbnail
ESCAPE side.
screen.
Notes
• Some items cannot be operated, when an SxS memory
card is write protected.
• Some items cannot be selected, depending on the state
of the camcorder when the menu was displayed.

To hide the clip properties screen

Do one of the following.
Press the RESET/RETURN button: This
returns to the THUMBNAIL menu.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: The
camcorder enters E-E mode, and the camera
picture appears.

102 Thumbnail Operations

 Displaying Clip Properties
Select “Clip Properties” in the THUMBNAIL menu.

a Image of the current clip e Lock mark (UDF, exFAT, and FAT-HD
mode only)
b Image of the previous clip This appears when the clip is marked with an OK

Chapter 5 Clip Operations

Press the PREV button to display the properties of mark or protected.
the previous clip.
f OK/NG/KP mark (UDF, exFAT, and
c Image of the next clip FAT-HD mode only)
Press the NEXT button to display the properties UDF/exFAT: When an OK, NG, or KP flag is
of the next clip. added to the selected clip, the corresponding mark
is added to the clip.
d Clip name
FAT: When an OK mark is added to the selected
When clip names are 12 characters or longer, only clip, the OK mark is added to the clip.
the first five characters and the last five characters
are displayed. If you want to check the hidden g Date and start time of recording
characters, press the MENU knob to display all
characters of the clip (long display mode). h File format
Press the MENU knob again to exit long display The file format of the clip (MXF, MP4 or AVI)
mode. Pressing the PREV or NEXT button to appears.
display the previous or next clip also exists long
display mode. i Special recording information (UDF,
In FAT-SD mode, only for clips that have been exFAT, and FAT-HD mode only)
divided because the file size was greater than 2 Displays the mode of clips that have been
GB, the number of component clips appears after recorded in a special mode (Slow & Quick
the clip name. Motion, Interval Rec, Frame Rec).
For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the frame rates
are displayed to the right as “Recording frame
rate/Playback frame rate.”

Thumbnail Operations 103

 j Timecode of the displayed image
Copying Clips
k Timecode of the recording start point
You can copy clips to other SxS memory cards.
l Timecode of the recording end point Clips are copied to destination SxS memory cards
using the same names as the original clips.
m Duration
Notes
n Recorded audio channels • If a clip with the same name already exists at the copy
destination SxS memory card, a one-digit number in
o Video format of recording parentheses is added to the original name.
The number in parentheses is the smallest number that
does not exist at the copy destination.
Adding/Deleting a Flag (UDF Only) Examples:
ABCD0002tABCD0002(1)
You can add an OK/NG/KP flag to clips recorded ABCD0002(1)tABCD0002(2)
in UDF. By adding flags, you can set the ABCD0005(3)tABCD0005(4)
camcorder to display only clips with certain flag • If the parenthetical numbers (1) to (9) already exist at
settings on the thumbnail screen (OK/NG/KP/ the copy destination, it is not possible to copy any more
None-Clip thumbnail screen) (see page 102). clips under that name. (A tenth clip cannot be copied.)
When adding a flag, you can select from “OK,” • A message appears if there is not enough free capacity
“NG,” “KP” (Keep) in “Set Clip Flag” of the at the copy destination SxS memory card. Exchange
THUMBNAIL menu (see page 100) on the the card for one with more free capacity.
• When multiple clips are recorded in a source SxS
thumbnail screen. When deleting a flag, select
memory card, it may not be possible to copy all clips
“None.”
to the end. Depending on memory characteristics and
usage of the memory cards, this can occur even when
Chapter 5 Clip Operations

Note
the source and destination memory cards have the
Flagged clips are not protected. To protect clips from
same capacity.
deletion, select “Lock Clip” in the THUMBNAIL menu
(see page 100) on the thumbnail screen. To remove the
protection, select “Unlock Clip.” Copying a specified clip
You can copy a clip selected on the thumbnail
screen to another SxS memory card.
Adding/Deleting the OK Mark Select “THUMBNAIL” > “Copy Clip” >
(FAT-HD Mode Only) “Execute” in the setup menu, then press the
MENU knob.
By adding an OK mark to clips recorded in FAT-
HD Mode, you can set the camcorder to display To cancel a copy operation
only the necessary clips on the thumbnail screen Press the RESET/RETURN button.
(see page 102). Clips with an OK mark added are
blocked from being deleted or segmented. To To batch copy groups of clips/files
delete or segment them, remove the OK mark. Select “THUMBNAIL” > “Copy All” > “All
From the THUMBNAIL menu (see page 102) on Clips” > “Execute” in the setup menu, then press
the thumbnail screen, you can select “Add OK the MENU knob.
Mark” to add an OK mark, or “Delete OK Mark” When both HD-mode and SD-mode clips exist on
to delete the OK mark. the source SxS memory card, only clips in the
currently selected mode are copied. This is a
convenient way to extract clips in one of the
modes.
You can also copy of the files in the General
directory, either together with or separately from
clips.

104 Thumbnail Operations

To cancel the copy operation
Press the RESET/RETURN button. Displaying the Expand Thumbnail
To copy all files in the General directory Screen (UDF/exFAT/FAT-HD Mode
To copy all files only, without copying clips, only)
select “THUMBNAIL” > “Copy All” > “General
Files.” The expand thumbnail screen allows you to
To copy all files together with all clips, select search inside clips by using thumbnails (see
“THUMBNAIL” > “Copy All” > “All Clips & page 98), to change index pictures (see
General Files.” page 107), and to add and delete shot marks (see
page 107).
Copying to USB media
When USB media is connected, select a clip on a To display the screen
thumbnail screen and select “COPY CLIP In the thumbnail screen, select a thumbnail and
(USB)” from the Clip Operation menu to copy the press the EXPAND button (see page 17) or select
clip to the USB media. “THUMBNAIL” > “Thumbnail View” >
You can also copy all SxS memory card clips to “Forward Expansion.”
USB media by selecting “USB Set” >“Copy To An expand thumbnail screen for the selected clip
USB” in the MAINTENANCE menu. This copies appears.
only clips for the selected mode in the same way
as selecting “Copy All” in the MAINTENANCE Expand thumbnail screen in HD mode
menu.
In HD mode, the selected clip is divided into 12
equally-sized blocks, and a thumbnail of the first
Deleting Clips frame in each block is displayed.

Number of the selected frame

Chapter 5 Clip Operations

You can delete clips that is selected in the
thumbnail screen.
Select “THUMBNAIL” > “Delete Clip” >
“Execute” in the setup menu, then press the
MENU knob.

Note S1 S2

HD clips with OK marks cannot be deleted.

If you want to delete such clips, first delete the OK marks S2 S1

(see page 104).

To batch delete groups of clips

You can delete clips that is selected in the
thumbnail screen. Clip properties are shown at the bottom of the
Select “THUMBNAIL” > “Delete All Clips” > screen.
“Execute” in the setup menu, then press the Except for the items listed below, the information
MENU knob. displayed here is the same as the information
displayed in the normal thumbnail screen.
Notes
• When both HD-mode and SD-mode clips exist on the a Frame information
SxS memory card, only clips in the currently selected This displays frame information using icons.
mode are deleted.
• In HD mode, clips with OK marks are not deleted,
even when a deletion is executed for a group of clips
that includes them.
To cancel the deletion
Press the RESET/RETURN button.

Thumbnail Operations 105

 Index picture To increase the number of divisions
When you press the EXPAND button, or select
Frame with Shot Mark1
S1 “THUMBNAIL” > “Thumbnail View” >
“Forward Expansion,” the divided clip or file is
S2 Frame with Shot Mark2
further divided into 12 equally-sized blocks (a
clip or file that has been divided into 12 is further
The same icons are also displayed beneath the divided into 12, for 12 × 12 = 144 divisions). You
thumbnails. However, when several icons could can repeat the same operation to increase the
be displayed for the same frame, one icon is number of division.
selected for display, in the order of priority Index
picture > Shot Mark1 > Shot Mark2. To return to the previous division level
Press the EXPAND button with the SHIFT button
b Timecode held down, or select “THUMBNAIL” >
This displays the timecode of the selected frame “Thumbnail View” > “Back Expansion.” The
in the expand thumbnail screen. expand thumbnail screen returns to the previous
division level.
Expand thumbnail screen in SD mode
In SD mode, only in the case of clips that have Displaying the Shot Mark
been split into partial files because the file size Thumbnail Screen (UDF/exFAT/
was larger than 2 GB, a thumbnail of the first
frame of each partial file is displayed. FAT-HD Mode Only)
Number of the selected frame You can search for shot marks in clips (see
page 98), change index pictures (see page 107),
Chapter 5 Clip Operations

and add and delete shot marks (see page 107).

1 In the thumbnail screen, select the

thumbnail of a clip, and press the
ESSENCE MARK button (see page 18)
or select “THUMBNAIL” >
“Thumbnail View” > “Essence Mark
Thumbnail.”
The shot mark thumbnail screen appears, and
a selection list is displayed.

Clip properties are displayed at the bottom of the 2 Select the type of the essence mark
screen. thumbnail screen.
Except for the items listed below, the information All: Thumbnail display of all frames marked
displayed here is the same as the information with essence marks.
displayed in the normal thumbnail screen. Shot Mark1: Display only frames marked
with Shot Mark1 marks.
a Timecode Shot Mark2: Display only frames marked
This is the timecode of the selected partial file. with Shot Mark2 marks.
You can also select Shot Mark 0 and Shot
b Duration Mark 3 to Shot Mark 9.
This is the duration of the selected partial file. If you have recorded clips by using planning
metadata that defined names for Shot Mark 0
to Shot Mark 9, the defined names are
displayed instead of the above item names in
the list.

106 Thumbnail Operations

 The properties screen of the selected frame
Example shot mark thumbnail screen appears, and a confirmation message appears
(with Shot Mark1 selected) below the image.

2 Select “Execute,” and press the MENU

knob.
S1 S2 S2 S1

Changing Clip Index Pictures

S1 S1
(UDF/exFAT/FAT-HD Mode Only)
1 Select the thumbnail of the frame that
you want to use as the index picture,
and then select “THUMBNAIL” > “Set
Index Picture.”
The properties screen of the selected frame
The properties of the clip appear at the bottom of
appears, and a confirmation message appears
the screen.
below the image.
Except for the following item, the information
displayed here is the same as the information
displayed in the expand thumbnail screen.
2 Select “Execute,” and press the MENU
knob.
a Timecode Note
This is the timecode of the selected frame in the
Even if you set the index picture to a frame that is not the
shot mark thumbnail screen. first frame of a clip, playback of that clip from a

Chapter 5 Clip Operations

thumbnail screen always begins at the first frame.

Adding and Deleting Shot Marks

(UDF/exFAT/FAT-HD Mode Only) Dividing Clips (FAT-HD Mode
Only)
To add shot marks
1 Select the thumbnail of the frame where
you want to divide the clip, and then
1 Select the frame where you want to add
select “THUMBNAIL” > “Divide Clip.”
a shot mark, and then select
The properties screen of the selected frame
“THUMBNAIL” > “Set Shot Mark” >
appears, and a confirmation message appears
“Add Shot Mark1” (or “Add Shot
below the image.
Mark2”).
The properties screen of the selected frame 2 Select “Execute,” and press the MENU
appears, and a confirmation message appears knob.
below the image. The clip is divided at the selected frame, and
two clips with different names are created.
2 Select “Execute,” and press the MENU
knob. The first four characters of the clip name are
taken from the name of the original clips, and the
To delete shot marks last four characters are new serial numbers.
Example: When the name of a newly recorded
1 Select the frame where you want to
clip would be EFGH0100, and a clip named
delete a shot mark, and then select ABCD0002 is divided, the names of the two
“THUMBNAIL” > “Set Shot Mark” > newly created clips are ABCD0100 and
“Delete Shot Mark1” (or “Delete Shot ABCD0101.
Mark2”).

Thumbnail Operations 107

 Note
When there is not enough remaining capacity on the SxS
memory cards to store the divided clips, a message
appears to inform you that there is not enough capacity.
Chapter 5 Clip Operations

108 Thumbnail Operations

 Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
OPERATION Menu (see page 113)
Setup Menu OPERATION
Organization and Levels Format
Format Media
Input/Output
Super Impose
On this camcorder, settings for shooting and Rec Function
playback are made in the setup menu, which Assignable SW
appears in the viewfinder. VF Setting
The setup menu can also be displayed on an Marker
external video monitor (see page 168). Gain Switch
TLCS
Setup Menu Organization Zebra
Display On/Off
The setup menu consists of the following menus. Auto Iris
Op: OPERATION menu White Setting
Settings related to shooting, except settings Offset White
related to picture quality (see page 113) Shutter
Pa: PAINT menu Time Zone
Settings related to picture quality (see page 131) Clip
Plan.Metadata
Th: THUMBNAIL menu
Flashband Reduce
Settings related to clip thumbnails (see page 100)
PAINT Menu (see page 131)

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Note
PAINT
The THUMBNAIL menu is used only when a thumbnail
screen (see page 96) is displayed. It is disabled when no
Switch Status
thumbnail screen is displayed. White
Black
Ma: MAINTENANCE menu
Settings related to audio and timecode (see Flare
page 137) Gamma
Black Gamma
Fi: FILE menu
Knee
Settings related to file operations (see page 154)
White Clip
Detail(HD Mode)
Setup Menu Levels Detail(SD Mode)
Aperture
See “THUMBNAIL Menu Configuration”
Skin Detail
(page 100) for the organization of the THUMBNAIL
menu. Matrix
Multi Matrix
V Modulation
Low Key Saturation
Noise Suppress

Setup Menu Organization and Levels 109

 MAINTENANCE Menu (see page 137)
MAINTENANCE Basic Setup Menu
White Shading
Black Shading
Operations
Battery
Audio
WRR Setting
Timecode To display the setup menu
Essence Mark Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or press
Camera Config the MENU button.
Preset White The camcorder enters menu mode and the menu
White Filter list appears on the screen.
DCC Adjust A cursor appears over the first two characters of the
Auto Iris2 most recently used menu, and the corresponding
Flicker Reduce menu item selection area appears to the right.
Genlock Example: When the cursor is positioned at the
ND Comp OPERATION menu
Lens
Menu list
Auto Shading
Trigger Mode
Network Setting
Wi-Fi Setting
Clock set
Language
Hours Meter
Menu Scroll Menu item selection area
USB Set Note
Version The setup menu cannot be used when the camcorder is in
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

focus magnification mode. Exit focus magnification

FILE Menu (see page 154) mode by pressing the assignable switch to which the
FILE Focus Mag function has been assigned.
All
Scene To make menu settings
Reference
Lens 1 Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or
Import j button, to move the cursor to the item
that you want to set.
A list of selectable menu items appears in the
menu item selection area to the right of the
icon.

2 Press the MENU knob or the SET

button.
The cursor moves to the menu item selection
area.
You can also move the cursor to the menu
item selection area by pressing the k
button.

110 Basic Setup Menu Operations

 • The menu item selection area displays a 4 Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or
maximum of seven lines. You can scroll j button, to move the cursor to the sub-
through menus with more than seven lines item that you want to set, and then
by moving the cursor up and down. confirm the selection by pressing the
Triangles appear at the upper right and MENU knob or the SET button.
lower right of the menu item selection area The settings of the selected sub-item appear,
to indicate that a menu is scrollable. and the cursor moves to the currently
selected value.

Appears when more menu items

are available below the last line.
(v appears when more menu items Settings area
are available above the first line.)
• The settings area displays a maximum of
Menu item selection area
• B appears to the right when more detailed
seven lines. You can scroll through menus
sub-items are available. with more than seven sub-items by moving
• Settings appear to the right when a menu the cursor up and down. Triangles appear at
item has no sub-items. the upper right and lower right of the
• You can select to return to the
settings area to indicate that a sub-item
previous level.
menu is scrollable.
3 Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or • For sub-items with a large settings range
j button, to move the cursor to the item (for example, –99 to +99), the settings area
is not displayed. Instead, the sub-item name
that you want to set, and then confirm
is highlighted to indicate that the sub-item
by pressing the MENU knob or the SET
can be set.
button.
The sub-items area appears to the right of the 5 Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

menu item selection area, and the cursor j button, to select the value to set, and
moves to the first sub-item.
then confirm by pressing the MENU
knob or the SET button.
The setting is changed, and the display is
updated to show the new setting.
If you select “Execute” for an executable
item, the corresponding function is executed.
Items that require confirmation before execution
Sub-items area In step 3, the menu disappears and a confirmation
• Displays sub-items and their current
message appears if you select an item that
settings
• To return to the previous level, select , requires confirmation before execution. Follow
press the K button, or push the MENU the instructions in the message to execute or
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to cancel the operation.
the ESCAPE side.

Basic Setup Menu Operations 111

 To enter text
Some items, such as time data or file names, must
be set by entering text. When you select one of
these items, the text entry area is highlighted, with
“SET” displayed to the right.

1 Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or

j button, to select a character, and then
confirm by pressing the MENU knob or
the SET button.
The cursor moves to the next position.
To return to the previous position, push the
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch
down to the ESCAPE side.

2 Select characters for all positions up to

the last.
The cursor moves to “SET.”

3 Press the MENU knob or the SET

button.
This confirms the setting.

To cancel the setting change

Push the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch down to the ESCAPE side.

To reset a setting to the initial value

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

1 Before a setting is changed or after a

setting change is cancelled, push the
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch up to the CANCEL/PRST side.

2 When the message to confirm whether

the current setting is reset to the initial
value, push the MENU CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch up to the
CANCEL/PRST side again.
The current setting is reset to the initial value.

To exit the menu

Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or press
the MENU button.
The normal camera picture reappears.

112 Basic Setup Menu Operations

 Menu List

OPERATION Menu
Settings in bold are the factory default values.

OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Format File System UDF/exFAT/FAT Switches between UDF, exFAT, and
Specifies the FAT as the recording mode (execute
camcorder’s operating by selecting “Execute”).
mode and recording HD/SD HD/SD Switches between HD or SD as the
format. operating mode (execute by
selecting “Execute”).
HD System Line 1080/720 When the operating mode is HD,
sets the number of system lines to
1080 or 720 (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
System Frequency The available settings Selects the system frequency
vary depending on the (execute by selecting “Execute”).
settings of “HD/SD,”
“HD System Line,” and
“Country.”
59.94i/29.97P/23.98P When “HD/SD” is set to “HD,” “HD
System Line” is set to “1080,” and
“Country” is set to other than “PAL
Area.”

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

59.94P/29.97P/23.98P When “HD/SD” is set to “HD,” “HD
System Line” is set to “720,” and
“Country” is set to other than “PAL
Area.”
59.94i/29.97P When “HD/SD” is set to “SD” and
“Country” is set to other than “PAL
Area.”
50i/25P • When “HD/SD” is set to “HD,” “HD
System Line” is set to “1080,” and
“Country” is set to “PAL Area.”
• When “HD/SD” is set to “SD” and
“Country” is set to “PAL Area.”
50P/25P When “HD/SD” is set to “HD,” “HD
System Line” is set to “720,” and
“Country” is set to “PAL Area.”

Menu List 113

 OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Format Rec Format The available settings Selects the recording format
Specifies the vary depending on the (execute by selecting “Execute”).
camcorder’s operating settings in UDF/exFAT/
mode and recording FAT, HD/SD, HD System
format.
Line, and System
Frequency.
XAVC-I When the UDF/exFAT/FAT setting
XAVC-L50 is [exFAT] and the HD/SD setting is
XAVC-L35 [HD].
XAVC-L25
HD422 50/ When the UDF/exFAT/FAT setting
HD420 HQ1920/ is [UDF], the HD/SD setting is
HD420 HQ1440 [HD], and the HD System Line
setting is [1080].
HD422 50/HD420 HQ When the UDF/exFAT/FAT setting
1280 is UDF, the HD/SD setting is [HD],
the HD System Line setting is [720],
and the System Frequency setting is
other than [29.97P] and [25P].
HD422 50 When the UDF/exFAT/FAT setting
is UDF, the HD/SD setting is [HD],
the HD System Line setting is [720],
and the System Frequency setting is
[29.97P] or [25P].
HQ 1920/HQ 1440 When the UDF/exFAT/FAT setting
is FAT, the HD/SD setting is [HD],
the HD System Line setting is
[1080], and the System Frequency
setting is [29.97P] or [25P].
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

HQ 1920/HQ 1440/ When the UDF/exFAT/FAT setting

SP 1440 is FAT, the HD/SD setting is [HD],
the HD System Line setting is
[1080], and the System Frequency
setting is other than [29.97P] and
[25P].
HQ 1280 When the UDF/exFAT/FAT setting
is FAT, the HD/SD setting is [HD],
and the HD System Line setting is
[720].
IMX50/DVCAM When the UDF/exFAT/FAT setting
is [UDF] and the HD/SD setting is
[SD].
DVCAM When the UDF/exFAT/FAT setting
is [FAT] and the HD/SD setting is
[HD].
Aspect Ratio (SD) 16:9/4:3 Selects the aspect ratio when SD
mode (recording format: DVCAM)
is selected (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
Audio Length(IMX) 24bit/16bit Selects the audio bit rate for
recording in IMX format.

114 Menu List

OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Format Country NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Selects the area of use (execute by
Specifies the Area/PAL Area selecting “Execute”).
camcorder’s operating
mode and recording
format.
Format Media Media(A) Execute/Cancel Initializes the SxS memory card in
Executes a media slot A (execute by selecting
format. “Execute”).
Media(B) Execute/Cancel Initializes the SxS memory card in
slot B (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
Input/Output In FAT mode HD&HDV/SD&HDV/ Selects the signals output from the
Makes settings related Output& i.LINK SD&DV/480P/576P video connectors and the i.LINK
to I/O signals. In UDF/exFAT mode HD/SD/480P/576P (HDV/DV) connector.
Output When the HD/SD setting is SD,
“SD&DV” or “SD” is selected.
23.98P Output PsF/Pull Down Selects whether to use progressive
output (PsF) or pulldown output
(Pull Down) when the video format
is in the following modes.
exFAT/HD mode
XAVC-I 1920×1080/23.98P
XAVC-I 1280×720/23.98P
UDF/HD mode
HD422 50 1920×1080/23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
HD422 50 720/23.98P
HQ 1280×720/23.98P
FAT/HD mode
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

HQ 1440×1080/23.98P
Source Select Camera/i.LINK Selects whether to use the video
camera picture (Camera) or the
signal input from the i.LINK (HDV/
DV) connector (i.LINK) as the video
input source.
i.LINK I/O Enable/Disable Selects whether to enable or disable
input and output of signals via the
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector.
When “Enable” is selected, you can
execute auto black balance
adjustment during i.LINK output.
(When this setting is set to “Enable,”
The flashband reduce function is set
to “Off.”)
SDI Output On/Off Turns on or off the output of signals
from the two HD/SD SDI OUT
connectors.
When the camcorder is connected to
a computer via USB, set to “Off.”
HDMI Output On/Off Turns on or off the output of signals
from the HDMI connector.

Menu List 115

 OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Input/Output SDI/HDMI Out On/Off Turns on or off the superimposition
Makes settings related Super of text information on the output of
to I/O signals. the HD/SD SDI OUT and HDMI
connectors.
Video Out Super On/Off Turns on or off the superimposition
of text information on the output of
the VIDEO OUT connector.
Down Converter Crop/Letter/Squeeze Selects the signal conversion mode
for output of SD signals.
Crop: Crop the edges of the 16:9
picture and output as a 4:3
picture.
Letter: Mask the top and bottom of
the 4:3 picture and display in
the center of the screen as a
16:9 picture.
Squeeze: Squeeze the 16:9 picture
horizontally and output as a 4:3
picture.
Wide ID Through/Auto Selects whether to add a wide ID
signal to the SD output signal.
Through: Output without adding a
wide ID signal.
Auto: Add and output a wide ID
signal when the Down
Converter setting is Squeeze.
Super Impose Super(VF Display) On/Off When “Input/Output” > “SDI/HDMI
Makes settings related Super(Menu) On/Off Out Super” or “Video Out Super” is
to superimposed text set to “On,” superimpose text
Super(Timecode) On/Off
and markers.
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

information on the output from the

HD/SD SDI OUT connector, HDMI
connector, and VIDEO OUT
connector, as specified (“On” or
“Off”) for each item.
Super(Marker) On/Off When “Input/Output” > “Video Out
Super” is set to “On,” specifies
whether to superimpose markers on
the output from the VIDEO OUT
connector.
Super(Rec Status On/Off Selects whether to superimpose
Indicator) (“On”) or not impose (“Off”) the
recording status indication on the
following two outputs.
• Output from the VIDEO OUT
connector with “Input/Output” >
“Video Out Super” set to “On”
• Output from the SDI connector and
the HDMI connector with “Input/
Output” > “SDI/HDMI Out Super”
set to “On”

116 Menu List

OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Rec Function Slow & Quick On/Off Turns the Slow & Quick Motion
Makes settings related function on or off. (When this is set
to special recording to “On,” “Picture Cache Rec,”
modes. “Interval Rec,” “Frame Rec,” and
Note “Flashband Reduce” are set to Off.)
Frame Rate The available settings When “Slow & Quick” is set to
When Picture Cache is
assigned to an vary depending on the “On,” sets the frame rate for Slow &
assignable switch, this “Format” > “HD System Quick Motion shooting.
item is disabled Line” setting.
(displayed in grey). When “Format” > When “HD System Line” is set to
“Country” is set to other “1080.”
than “PAL Area” in UDF/
exFAT mode or in FAT
mode:
1 to 30
When “Format” >
“Country” is set to “PAL
Area” in UDF/exFAT
mode:
1 to 25
When “Format” > When “HD System Line” is set to
“Country” is set to other “720.”
than “PAL Area” in UDF/
exFAT mode or in FAT
mode:
1 to 30/31 to 60
When “Format” >
“Country” is set to “PAL
Area” in UDF/exFAT

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

mode:
1 to 25/26 to 50
Clip Continuous Rec On/Off Turns the Clip Continuous Rec
function on or off. (When this is set
to “On,” “Slow & Quick,” “Picture
Cache Rec,” “Interval Rec,” and
“Frame Rec” are set to “Off.”)
Picture Cache Rec On/Off Turns the picture cache function on
or off. (When this is set to “On,”
“Slow & Quick,” “Interval Rec,”
“Frame Rec,” and “Flashband
Reduce” are set to “Off.”)
P. Cache Rec Time 0-2sec/2-4sec/4-6sec/ When “Picture Cache Rec” is set to
6-8sec/8-10sec/10-12sec/ “On,” set the picture cache time.
12-14sec/13-15sec
Note
When you set “OPERATION” >
“Format” > “Rec Format” to
“XAVC-l,” “0-2sec” or “2-4sec” can
be selected.

Menu List 117

 OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Rec Function Interval Rec On/Off Turns the Interval Rec function on or
Makes settings related off. (When this is set to “On,” “Slow
to special recording & Quick” “Picture Cache Rec,” and
modes. “Frame Rec” are set to “Off.”)
Note Frame Rec On/Off Turns the Frame Rec function on or
off. (When this is set to “On,” “Slow
When Picture Cache is
assigned to an & Quick,” “Picture Cache Rec,” and
assignable switch, this “Interval Rec” are set to “Off.”)
item is disabled Number of Frames The available settings When “Interval Rec” or “Frame
(displayed in grey). vary depending on the Rec” is set to “On,” specifies the
settings in “Format” > number of frames to shoot in one
“HD System Line and Interval Rec or Frame Rec take.
Format” > “System
Frequency.”
2frame/6frame/12frame When “HD System Line” is set to
“720,” and “System Frequency” is
set to “59.94P” or “50P.”
1frame/3frame/6frame/ When “HD System Line” is set to
9frame other than “720”, or “System
Frequency” is set to other than
“59.94P” or “50P.”
Interval Time 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/ Set the interval for Interval Rec
20/30/40/50 (sec) shooting, when “Interval Rec” is set
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/ to “On.”
20/30/40/50 (min) 1/2/3/
4/6/12/24 (hour)
Pre-Lighting Off/2sec/5sec/10sec If you want the video light to be
turned on before Interval Rec
shooting, select a number of seconds
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

before the start of shooting. If you

do not want it to be turned on, select
Off.

118 Menu List

OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Assignable SW <0> See page 158. Assigns function to ASSIGN. 0
Assigns functions to switch.
assignable switches. <1> Assigns function to ASSIGN. 1
See “Assigning switch.
Functions to Assignable
Switches” (page 158) <2> Assigns function to ASSIGN. 2
for more information switch.
about assigning <3> Assigns function to ASSIGN. 3
functions. switch.
<4> Assigns function to ASSIGNABLE
4 switch.
<5> Assigns function to ASSIGNABLE
5 switch.
RET Assigns function to RET button on
the lens.
C. Temp Assigns function to COLOR TEMP.
button.
Zoom Speed 0 to 20 to 99 When Zoom has been assigned to
the ASSIGNABLE 4 or 5 switch,
specifies the zoom speed.
Note
When the lens supplied with the PMW-
400 is used, zooming may not operate
smoothly if the zoom speed is low.
VF Setting Color –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the density of the colors
Makes settings related displayed in the viewfinder screen.
to the viewfinder Mode Color/B&W Selects “Color” or “B&W” as the
screen.
display mode of the viewfinder
screen. (Even when “B&W” is

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

selected, some indications are
always displayed in color. Examples
include tally indications,
thumbnails, and the skin gate area.)
Peaking Type Normal/Color/Both Selects the peaking type.
Normal: Normal peaking
Color: Color peaking
Both: Both
Peaking Frequency Normal/High Selects “Normal” or “High” as the
peaking frequency.
Peaking Color White/Red/Yellow/Blue When “Peaking Type” is set to
“Color,” selects the peaking color
from among “White,” “Red,”
“Yellow,” and “Blue.”
Peaking Level Low/Mid/High When “Peaking Type” is set to
“Both,” selects the color peaking
level from among “Low,” “Mid,” and
“High.”
DXF Rec Tally Upper/Both When a separately sold viewfinder is
installed, specified whether to light
the tally indicator on the upper side
only (“Upper”), or on both the upper
and lower sides (“Both”).

Menu List 119

 OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Marker Setting On/Off Turns all markers on or off.
Makes settings related
to marker display in the Note
viewfinder screen. When Marker is assigned to the
ASSIGN. 2 switch, this setting is
disabled.
Center Marker 1/2/3/4/Off When the center marker is
displayed, selects the type. Select
“Off” if you do not want to display
the marker.
Note
When “Safety Zone,” “User Box,”
and “Guide Frame” are set to “On,”
this setting cannot be turned on.
Center H Position –40 to 0 to 40 Specifies the horizontal position of
the center marker.
Center V Position –40 to 0 to 40 Specifies the vertical position of the
center marker.
Safety Zone On/Off Turns the safety zone display on or
off.

Note
When “Center Marker,” “User Box,”
and “Guide Frame” are set to “On,”
this setting cannot be turned on.
Safety Area 80%/90%/92.5%/95% Selects the safety zone range.
Aspect Marker Line/Mask/Off When an aspect marker is to be
displayed, selects the display
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

method. Select “Off” if you do not

want to display the marker.
Line: Show as white lines.
Mask: Display by lowering the
video signal level of areas
outside the marker range.
Aspect Select 15:9/14:9/13:9/4:3/ Selects the aspect ratio of the
1.66:1/1.85:1/2.35:1/ marker.
2.4:1
Aspect Mask 0% to 30% to 90% (10% When “Aspect Marker” is set to
step) “Mask,” specifies the video signal
level of areas outside the marker
range as a percentage value relative
to the video signal level of areas
inside the marker range.
User Box On/Off Turns the box cursor display on or
off.
Note
When “Center Marker,” “Safety
Zone,” and “Guide Frame” are set to
“On,” this setting cannot be turned
on.

120 Menu List

OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Marker User Box Width 40 to 500 to 999 Specifies the box cursor width
Makes settings related (distance from the center to the left
to marker display in the and right edges).
viewfinder screen. User Box Height 70 to 500 to 999 Specifies the box cursor height
(distance from the center to the top
and bottom edges).
User Box H Position –479 to 0 to 479 Specifies the horizontal position of
the box cursor center.
User Box V Position –464 to 0 to 464 Specifies the vertical position of the
box cursor center.
Guide Frame On/Off Turns display of the guide frame on
or off.
Note
When “Center Marker,” “Safety
Zone,” and “User Box” are set to
“On”, this setting cannot be turned
on.
Gain Switch Gain Low –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/ Specifies the gain value for the
Makes settings related 12dB/18dB/24dB/30dB/ L position of the GAIN switch.
to the GAIN switch. 36dB/42dB
Gain Mid –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/ Specifies the gain value for the
12dB/18dB/24dB/30dB/ M position of the GAIN switch.
36dB/42dB
Gain High –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/ Specifies the gain value for the
12dB/18dB/24dB/30dB/ H position of the GAIN switch.
36dB/42dB
Gain Turbo –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/ Specifies the gain value for the
12dB/18dB/24dB/30dB/ Turbo Gain function, which can be

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

36dB/42dB assigned to an assignable switch.
Shockless Gain On/Off Turns shockless gain (a function that
switches smoothly when the gain is
switched) on or off.

Menu List 121

 OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
TLCS Mode Backlight/Standard/ Selects the auto iris mode used when
Makes settings related Spotlight the TLCS system is activated.
to total level control. Backlight: Backlight mode (lessens
the blackout of the main subject
that occurs under backlit
conditions)
Standard: Standard mode
Spotlight: Spotlight mode (lessens
the whiteout of the main subject
that occurs under a spotlight)
Speed –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the control speed (speed of
reaction to changes in the video)
used when the TLCS system is
activated. (Larger values specify
quicker reaction times.)
AGC On/Off Turns the AGC (auto gain control)
function on or off.
AGC Limit 3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ Specifies the maximum gain used
18dB when AGC is on.
AGC Point F5.6/F4/F2.8 Specifies the F value where control
by auto iris switches to control by
AGC, used when AGC is on.
Auto Shutter On/Off Turns the auto shutter function on or
off.
Auto Shutter Limit 1/100 / 1/150 / 1/200 / Selects the maximum shutter speed
1/250 used when auto shutter is on.
Auto Shutter Point F5.6/F8/F11/F16 Specifies the F value where control
by auto iris switches to control by
auto shutter, used when auto shutter
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

is on.
Zebra Zebra Select 1/2/BOTH Selects the zebra pattern type
Makes settings related (Zebra1, Zebra2, Both).
to zebra displays. Zebla1 Level 50% to 70% to 107% Specifies the Zebra1 display level.
Zebra1 Aperture 1 to 10% to 20% Specifies the Zebra1 aperture level.
Level
Zebra2 Level 52% to 100% to 109% Specifies the Zebra2 display level.

122 Menu List

OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Display On/Off Video Level On/Off Turns the warnings that appear when
Selects the items to Warnings the video level is too bright or too
display in the dark on or off.
viewfinder screen.
Sending Clip Info On/Off Turn the uploading status of a clip
when connecting the CBK-WA101
Wireless Adapter (not supplied) on/
off.
Brightness Display On/Off Turns the numerical indication of the
video brightness on or off.
Histogram Display On/Off Turns the histogram display of video
signal levels on or off (in HD mode
only).
Lens Info Off/Meter/Feet Selects whether or not to display the
depth of field indication and the unit
for display of the depth of field.
Meter: Displayed in meters
Feet: Displayed in feet
Off: Do not display
Focus Position On/Off Turns the indication of the lens focus
position on or off.
Zoom Position On/Off Turns the indication of the lens
zoom position on or off.
Audio Level Meter On/Off Turns the display of the audio level
meters on or off.
Timecode On/Off Turns the display of time data
(timecode, user bits, counter,
duration) on or off.
Battery Remain On/Off Turns the indications of the
remaining battery time and input

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

voltage on or off.
Media Remain On/Off Turns the indication of the
remaining media capacity on or off.
TLCS Mode On/Off Turns the indication of the TLCS
operating mode on or off.
Focus Mode On/Off Turns the indication of the focus
operating mode on or off.
White Balance Mode On/Off Turns the indication of the white
balance mode on or off.
Filter Position On/Off Turns the indication of the ND filter
setting on or off.
Iris Position On/Off Turns the indication of the iris
position on or off.
Gain Setting On/Off Turns the indication of the gain
setting on or off.
Shutter Setting On/Off Turns the indications of the shutter
mode and shutter speed on or off.
Color Temp On/Off Turns the indication of the color
temperature on or off.
Video Format On/Off Turns the indication of the video
format on or off.

Menu List 123

 OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Display On/Off System Line On/Off Turns the indication of the system
Selects the items to lines on or off.
display in the Rec Mode On/Off Turns the indication of special
viewfinder screen.
recording modes (S&Q, Interval,
Frame Rec, Picture Cache Rec) on
or off.
Extender On/Off Turns the lens extender indication on
or off.
WRR RF Level On/Off Turns the indication of the digital
wireless receiver reception level on
or off.
Clip Number(PB) On/Off Turns the indication of clip
information on or off.
Wireless Status On/Off Turn the status of radio wave of the
CBK-WA101 Wireless Adapter (not
supplied) on/off.
Ext Media Remain On/Off Turn the remaining time indication
for the media of the CBK-WA101
Wireless Adapter (not supplied) on/
off.
Flashband Reduce On/Off Turn the flashband reduce status
indication on/off.
ALAC On/Off Turn the ALAC status indication on/
off.
Auto Iris Iris Override On/Off Turns iris override (a setting that
Makes settings related opens or closes the iris more than
to auto iris. normal) on or off.
Iris Speed –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the iris control speed
(speed of reaction to changes in the
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

video). (Larger values specify

quicker reaction times.)
Clip High light On/Off Turns on or off the function that
disregards highlights and forces a
flatter reaction to high luminance.
Iris Window 1/2/3/4/5/6/Var Selects the auto iris detection
window type.
Var: Variable
Iris Window On/Off Turns the indication of the auto iris
Indication detection window frame on or off.

124 Menu List

OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
White Setting White Switch<B> Memory/ATW Specifies the operating mode
Makes settings related selected by the B position of the
to auto white balance WHITE BAL switch.
adjustments. Memory: Auto white balance
ATW: Auto tracing white balance
Shockless White Off/1/2/3 Specifies the reaction speed when
the WHITE BAL switch setting is
changed. “Off” is an instant
reaction, and “1” is faster than “2” or
“3.”
ATW Speed 1/2/3/4/5 Specifies the reaction speed when
“White Switch<B>” is set to “ATW.”
“1” is the fastest reaction.
ATW Mode Natural/Pure Natural: Depending on the
brightness of scenes,
automatically adjusts the white
balance to natural ambience.
Pure: Not leaving the blue color or red
color, automatically adjusts the
white balance closer to original
colors.
AWB Fixed Area On/Off Specifies whether auto white
balance is executed at the center of
the screen.
On: Execute in an area
corresponding to 25% of the
height and width of the screen.
Off: Execute in an area
corresponding to 70% of the

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

height and width of the screen.
Filter White Memory On/Off Specifies whether to allocate a white
balance memory area for each
FILTER knob position.
On: Allocation a white balance
memory area for each FILTER
knob position.
Off: Use A/B memory regardless of
the filter position.

Menu List 125

 OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Offset White Offset White <A> On/Off Specifies whether to add (“On”) or
Makes settings related not to add (“Off”) an offset value to
to white balance offset the white balance value in memory
values. A.
Warm Cool <A> Approximate color When “Offset White<A>” is set to
temperature “On,” specifies (as a color
temperature) the offset to add to the
white balance value in memory A.
(Note that the error range becomes
larger for higher offset color
temperatures. Adjust while viewing
the actual video.)
Warm Cool –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a more precise color
Balance<A> temperature, for use when
satisfactory video cannot be
obtained with the “Warm Cool <A>”
setting.
Offset White <B> On/Off When this is set to “On,” the offset
adjusted set with this item is added
to the white balance of channel B.
Warm Cool <B> Approximate color When “Offset White<B>” is set to
temperature “On,” specifies (as a color
temperature) the offset to add to the
white balance value in memory B.
(Note that the error range becomes
larger for higher offset color
temperatures. Adjust while viewing
the actual video.)
Warm Cool –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a more precise color
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Balance<B> temperature, for use when

satisfactory video cannot be
obtained with the “Warm Cool <B>”
setting.
Offset White On/Off When this item is set to “On,” the
<ATW> offset value adjusted here is added to
the ATW white balance value.
Warm Cool <ATW> Display adjustment guide When “Offset White <ATW>” is set
color temperature to “On,” use color temperature to set
an offset value to add to the ATW
white balance value (the higher the
offset color temperature, the greater
the error, so make adjustment while
observing the video).

126 Menu List

OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Shutter Shutter Select Second/Degree Specifies the unit used to select
Makes settings related shutter speeds.
to shutter speed Second: Select in units of seconds.
selection. Degree: Select in units of degrees.
Slow Shutter On/Off Turns the SLS mode on or off.
(When this setting is set to “On,”
The flashband reduce function is set
to “Off.”)
SLS Frames 2Frames/3Frames/ Selects the number of accumulated
4Frames/5Frames/ frames in SLS mode.
6Frames/7Frames/
8Frames/16Frames/
32Frames/64Frames
Time Zone Zone –12:00 to +0:00 to Specifies a difference from UTC
Specifies the time zone. +13:30 (in steps of (Greenwich Mean Time) in units of
30 minutes) 30 minutes.
Clip Auto Naming In Fat mode: Title/Plan Selects the clip naming format.
Make settings for clip In UDF/exFAT mode: C****: XDCAM standard name (In
name or clip C****/Title/Plan UDF mode only)
management. Title: Name specified by Title Prefix
Note Plan: Name specified in planning
Do not assign clip metadata (if no name is
names that begin with specified in planning metadata,
the “.” (period) symbol. the name specified by Title
Clips with names in Prefix is selected.)
which the first
character is “.” cannot
be viewed on the
application software for
computers.

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Menu List 127

 OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Clip Title Prefix Text input Specifies the title part (4 to 46
Make settings for clip alphanumeric characters) of clip
name or clip titles.
management. When the currently specified title is
Note eight characters or fewer in length,
Do not assign clip the entire title appears. When the
names that begin with title is longer than eight characters,
the “.” (period) symbol. the first seven characters appear and
Clips with names in a “···” symbol appears in place of the
which the first eighth character.
character is “.” cannot
Displays the Character Set screen.
be viewed on the
application software for Character Set screen configuration
computers. • Character selection area (three
lines)
Select the character to insert at the
title prefix cursor position.
!#$%()+.-.;=@[]^_~0123456789
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
WXYZ
• Cursor operation area (one line)
Space: Changes the character at the
cursor position to a space
INS: Inserts a space at the cursor
position
DEL: Deletes the character at the
cursor position
T: Moves the cursor to the left
t: Moves the cursor to the right
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

ESC: Cancels the change and return

to the normal menu
END: Executes the change and
return to the normal menu
• Title prefix area (one line)
An area to enter the title
To set titles
1 Turn the MENU knob or press the
arrow buttons to select a
character, highlighting it, in the
character selection area, and then
press the MENU knob or the SET
button to insert it at the cursor
position in the title prefix area.
(The cursor moves to the right.)
2 Repeat step 1 to add more
characters to the title (using
Space, INS, and DEL as
required).
3 When you have finished entering
the title, select END to close the
Character Set screen.

128 Menu List

OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Clip Number Set 0001 to 9999 Specifies the initial value of the
Make settings for clip numeric part (four digits) of clip
name or clip names (unless the name specified in
management. planning metadata with “Auto
Naming” set to “Plan”).
Name Display Off/On Selects whether to display the name
of the next clips to be recorded in E-
E mode (“On”) or not (“Off”).
Update Media<A>/Media<B> Updates the management files on the
media in the selected slot (execute
by selecting “Execute”).
Plan.Metadata Load/Slot(A) Execute/Cancel Executes load of planning metadata
Makes settings for from the SxS memory card in slot A.
operating planning Select “Execute” to show the list of the
metadata. planning metadata files stored in the
slot A SxS memory card and select a
file to execute the load.
Load/Slot(B) Execute/Cancel Executes load of planning metadata
from the SxS memory card in slot B.
Select “Execute” to show the list of
the planning metadata files stored in
the slot B SxS memory card and
select a file to execute the load.
Load/USB Execute/Cancel Executes load of planning metadata
(in UDF mode only) from the USB flash drive connected
to the external device connector.
Select “Execute” to show the list of
the planning metadata files stored in
the USB flash drive and select a file
to execute the load.

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Properties Execute/Cancel Displays the detailed information in
the planning metadata loaded on the
camcorder (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
Clear Execute/Cancel Clears the planning metadata loaded
on the camcorder (execute by
selecting “Execute”).
Clip Name Disp Title1(ASCII format) Selects the display mode of the clip
Title2(UTF-8 format) name specified in planning metadata
(see page 95).
Note
When you define both of ASCII format
name and UTF-8 format name with
planning metadata, the UTF-8 format
string is used as the clip name string. If
you define either of ASCII format name
and UTF-8 format name with planning
metadata, the defined format name is
displayed though it is not selected by
menu setting.

Menu List 129

 OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Flashband Reduce Setting On/Off Turn the flashband reduce function
Reducing Flashband. on/off.
Note Note
This item is disabled When the flashband reduce function is
(this item is grayed out) set to on or off, video and audio may be
when ”Picture Cache distorted and noise may appear
Rec” is set to “On,” momentarily.
“i.LINK I/O” is set to
“Enable,” and “Slow
Shutter” is set to “On.”
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

130 Menu List

PAINT Menu
Settings in bold are the factory default values.

PAINT
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Switch Status Gamma On/Off Turns gamma correction on or off.
Turns various signal Black Gamma On/Off Turns black gamma correction on or
correction functions off.
and a test signal on or
off. Matrix On/Off Turns linear matrix correction and
user matrix correction on or off.
Knee On/Off Turns knee correction on or off.
White Clip On/Off Turns white clip correction on or
off.
Detail On/Off Turns detail correction on or off.
Aperture On/Off Turns aperture correction on or off.
Flare On/Off Turns flare correction on or off.
Test Saw On/Off Turns the test saw signal on or off.
White Color Temp <A> 1500K to 3200K to Displays the white balance color
Sets the color 50000K temperature saved in memory A.
temperature, and Color Temp BAL –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance gain
performs manual white
<A> values saved in memory A (linked R
balance adjustment.
gain and B gain).
R Gain <A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance R gain
value saved in memory A.
B Gain <A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance B gain
value saved in memory A.
Color Temp <B> 1500K to 3200K to Displays the white balance color
50000K temperature saved in memory B.
Color Temp BAL –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance gain

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

<B> values saved in memory B (linked R
gain and B gain).
R Gain <B> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance R gain
value saved in memory B.
B Gain <B> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance B gain
value saved in memory B.
Black Master Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master black level.
Specifies the black R Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the R black level.
level (level of the
B Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the B black level.
unilluminated parts of
the video).
You can achieve a
desired look by
adjusting the black
level for deeper or
shallower blacks.

Menu List 131

 PAINT
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Flare Flare On/Off Turns flare correction on or off.
Makes settings related Master Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master flare correction
to flare. level.
Flare is light generated
from a bright image R Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R flare correction level.
region that spreads G Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the G flare correction level.
broadly across the B Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B flare correction level.
image, adding light to
dark regions and
reducing contrast. It is
caused by reflection
inside the lens system.
Gamma Gamma On/Off Turns gamma correction on or off.
Makes settings related Step Gamma 0.35 to 0.45 to 0.90 (0.05 Specifies a gamma correction value
to gamma. step) in steps of 0.05
Gamma correction
allows you to Master Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master gamma level.
significantly alter the R Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the R gamma level.
impression made by the G Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the G gamma level.
video by adjusting the
contrast. B Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the B gamma level.
Gamma Select The available settings Select the gamma table to use in
vary depending on the gamma correction.
setting in “Gamma When Gamma Category is STD:
Category” (see 1 DVW: DVW camcorder
“Description”). equivalent
2 ×4.5: ×4.5 gain
3 ×3.5: ×3.5 gain
4 240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent
5 R709: ITU-R709 equivalent
(default setting)
6 ×5.0: ×5.0 gain
When Gamma Category is HG:
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

1 3250: Condense 325% video input

to 100% video output
2 4600: Condense 460% video input
to 100% video output
3 3259: Condense 325% video input
to 109% video output
4 4609: Condense 460% video input
to 109% video output (default
setting)
Gamma Category STD/HG Selects use of standard gamma
(“STD”) or HyperGamma (“HG”).
Black Gamma Black Gamma On/Off Turns black gamma correction on or
Makes settings related off.
to black gamma Gamma Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master black gamma
correction.
Black gamma
level.
correction allows you Range Low/L.Mid/H.Mid/High Selects the black gamma correction
to reproduce gradations effective range.
and color nuances in LOW: 0 to 3.6%
black or near-black L.MID: 0 to 7.2%
(dark) parts of the
picture. H.MID: 0 to 14.4%
HIGH: 0 to 28.8%

132 Menu List

PAINT
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Knee Knee On/Off Turns knee correction on or off.
Makes settings related Knee Point 50.0% to 95.0% to Specifies the knee point.
to knee correction. 109.0%
Knee correction is
processing that Knee Slope –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the knee slope.
prevents washout by Knee Saturation On/Off Turns the knee saturation function
compressing the bright on or off.
parts of the video
Knee Saturation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the knee saturation level.
according to an upper
limit for the dynamic Level
range of the recorded
and output picture. The
signal level where knee
processing begins is
called the “knee point,”
and the slope of knee
compression is called
the “knee slope.”
White Clip White Clip On/Off Turns white clipping adjustment on
Makes settings related or off.
to white clipping Level “NTSC Area” or “NTSC Specifies the white clip level.
adjustments.
White clipping is
(J)Area” is selected for
processing that limits “Country”
the maximum level of 90.0% to 108.0% to
video output signals. 109.0%
The maximum video “PAL Area” is selected
signal output value is
for “Country”
called the “white clip
level.” 90.0% to 105.0% to
109.0%

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Menu List 133

 PAINT
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Detail(HD Mode)/ Detail On/Off Turns detail adjustment on or off.
Detail(SD Mode) Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the detail level.
Makes settings related H/V Ratio –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the mix ratio between the
to details adjustments
H detail level and the V detail level.
in HD mode and SD
mode. Crispening –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the crispening level.
Detail adjustment is Level Depend On/Off Turns the level depend adjustment
processing that function on or off.
improves the clarity of
the video by adding Level Depend Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the level depend level.
detail signals to the Frequency –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the central frequency for H
edges of the subject. detail signals. Larger values give
finer details.
Knee Aperture On/Off Turns the knee aperture function on
or off.
Knee Aperture Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the knee aperture level.
Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the detail limiter values for
both the white-side and black-side
direction.
White Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white-side detail
limiter value.
Black Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the black-side detail
limiter value.
V-BLK Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the black-side V detail
limiter value.
V Detail Creation NAM/G/R+G/Y Selects the source signal used to
generate the V detail signal.
NAM: A V detail signal created
from the R signal, or a V detail
signal created from the G
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

signal, or a V detail signal

created from the B signal,
whichever is the signal with the
highest level
G: G signal
G+R: Composite signal comprising
the G signal and R signal in a
1:1 ratio
Y: Y signal
Aperture Aperture On/Off Turns aperture correction on or off.
Makes settings related Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the aperture level.
to aperture correction.
Aperture correction is
processing to improve
resolution by adding
high-frequency
aperture signals to the
video signal, which
corrects degeneration
due to high-frequency
characteristics.

134 Menu List

PAINT
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Skin Detail Skin Detail On/Off Turns skin detail correction on or
Makes settings related off.
to skin detail Area Detection Color detection screen Detects the color to be targeted by
correction.
Skin detail correction is
skin detail correction.
processing that Area Indication On/Off Turns on or off the function that
increases or decreases displays a zebra pattern in the area
the detail level of a targeted by skin detail correction.
specified color range
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the skin detail level.
(skin tone range), for
the purpose of Saturation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the saturation of the color
obtaining attractive targeted by skin detail correction.
reproduction of skin Hue 0 to 359 Specifies the hue of the color
tones.
targeted by skin detail correction.
Width 0 to 40 to 90 Specifies a range for the hue of the
color targeted by skin detail
correction.
Matrix Matrix On/Off Turns the matrix correction function
Makes settings related on or off.
to matrix correction. Preset Matrix On/Off Turns the preset matrix function on
Matrix correction
allows you to adjust the
or off.
color and vividness of Preset Select 1/2/3/4/5/6 Selects a preset matrix.
the video. Depending 1: SMPTE-240M equivalent
on the effect you want, 2: ITU-709 equivalent
you can select one from 3: SMPTE WIDE equivalent
among a number of
preset matrixes, which 4: NTSC equivalent
define different 5: EBU equivalent
parameter sets. Or you 6: PAL equivalent
can select a user matrix User Matrix On/Off Turns the user matrix function on or
with your own
off.
parameters.
User Matrix R-G –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined R-G user

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

matrix.
User Matrix R-B –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined R-B user
matrix.
User Matrix G-R –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined G-R user
matrix.
User Matrix G-B –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined G-B user
matrix.
User Matrix B-R –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined B-R user
matrix.
User Matrix B-G –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined B-G user
matrix.

Menu List 135

 PAINT
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Multi Matrix Multi Matrix On/Off Turns the multi matrix correction
Makes settings related function on or off.
to multi matrix Area Indication On/Off Turns on or off the function that
correction.
Multi-matrix correction
displays a zebra pattern in the color
allows specific colors area targeted by multi matrix
to be selected for correction.
saturation correction in Color Detection Color detection screen Detects colors targeted by multi
a 16-axis hue space. matrix correction.
Axis B/B+/MG–/MG/MG+/ Specifies a color targeted by multi
R/R+/YL–/YL/YL+/G–/ matrix correction (16-axis mode)
G/G+/CY/CY+/B–
Hue –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the hue of the color
targeted by multi matrix correction
for each 16-axis mode.
Saturation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the saturation of the color
targeted by multi matrix correction
for each 16-axis mode.
V Modulation V Modulation On/Off Turns V modulation shading on or
Makes settings related off.
to V modulation Master V –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master V modulation
shading.
V modulation shading
Modulation level.
corrects vertical R V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the V modulation level of
imbalances in R signals.
sensitivity arising from G V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the V modulation level of
the relationship
G signals.
between a lens and
prism. B V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the V modulation level of
B signals.
Low Key Sat. Low Key Saturation On/Off Turns low key saturation correction
Makes settings related on or off.
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

to low key saturation Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the saturation of colors in
correction.
You can correct the
low luminance areas.
saturation of colors in Range Low/L.Mid/H.Mid/High Specifies the luminance level for
dark parts of the video which low key saturation is enabled.
only.
Noise Suppress Noise Suppress On/Off Turns noise suppression on or off.
Makes settings related
to noise suppression
(noise compression).
You can effectively
suppress noise
components while
preserving fine edge
components in the
subject.

136 Menu List

MAINTENANCE Menu
Settings in bold are the factory default values.

MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
White Shading Channel Select Red/Green/Blue Selects the target of white shading
Makes settings related correction.
to white shading. R/G/B White H Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a SAW white shading
White shading is
correction value for the horizontal
required for each
different lens to correct direction.
irregularities arising R/G/B White H Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a parabola white shading
from lens correction value for the horizontal
characteristics. It direction.
corrects luminance and
color irregularities in R/G/B White V Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a SAW white shading
bright areas. correction value for the vertical
direction.
R/G/B White V Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a parabola white shading
correction value for the vertical
direction.
White Saw/Para On/Off Turns the white shading SAW and
parabola correction functions on or
off.
Black Shading Channel Select Red/Green/Blue Selects the target of black shading
Makes settings related correction.
to black shading R/G/B Black H Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a SAW black shading
correction.
correction value for the horizontal
direction.
R/G/B Black H Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a parabola black shading
correction value for the horizontal
direction.

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

R/G/B Black V Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a SAW black shading
correction value for the vertical
direction.
R/G/B Black V Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a parabola black shading
correction value for the vertical
direction.
Black Saw/Para On/Off Turns the black shading SAW and
parabola correction functions on or
off.
Master Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master black level.
Master Gain (TMP) –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/ Specifies a temporary master gain
12dB/18dB/24dB/30dB/ value.
36dB/42dB
Battery Info Before End 5%/10%/15%...95%/ Specifies a threshold value that
Makes settings related 100% triggers a “Battery Near End”
to batteries. warning when a BP-GL95A battery
pack is used.
Info End 0%/1%/2%/3%/4%/5% Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery End” warning
when a BP-GL95A battery pack is
used.

Menu List 137

 MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Battery Sony Before End 11.5V to 17V (0.1V step) Specifies a threshold value that
Makes settings related triggers a “Battery Near End”
to batteries. warning when a BP-L60S/L80S
battery pack is used.
Sony End 11.0V to 11.5V (0.1V Specifies a threshold value that
step) triggers a “Battery End” warning
when a BP-L60S/L80S battery pack
is used.
Other Before End 11.5V to 11.8V to 17.0V Specifies a threshold value that
(0.1V step) triggers a “Battery Near End”
warning when a non-Sony battery
pack is used.
Other End 11.0V to 14.0V (0.1V Specifies a threshold value that
step) triggers a “Battery End” warning
when a non-Sony battery pack is
used.
DC In Before End 11.5V to 11.8V to 17.0V Specifies a threshold value that
(0.1V step) triggers a “Battery Near End”
warning when an external power
source is connected to the DC IN
connector.
DC In End 11.0V to 14.0V (0.1V Specifies a threshold value that
step) triggers a “Battery End” warning
when an external power source is
connected to the DC IN connector.
Detected Battery Info/Sony/Other/DC IN Displays the results of automatic
battery pack type detection.
Type Detection Auto/Other Auto: Detect the battery type
automatically.
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Other: Fix battery type detection as

“Other.”
Segment No.10 11.0V to 17.0V (0.1V Specify voltage threshold values
step) that cause remaining capacity
Segment No.9 11.0V to 16.0V to 17.0V segments to go off in the display of
(0.1V step) remaining battery capacity (see
Segment No.8 11.0V to 15.0V to 17.0V page 26). (The segments go off
(0.1V step) below the specified value.)
Segment No.7 11.0V to 14.0V to 17.0V These values are used when the
(0.1V step) battery type has been found to be
“Other.”
Segment No.6 11.0V to 13.5V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.5 11.0V to 13.0V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.4 11.0V to 12.5V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.3 11.0V to 12.0V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.2 11.0V to 11.5V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.1 11.0V to 17.0V (0.1V
step)

138 Menu List

MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Audio Front MIC Select Mono/Stereo Selects whether the front
Makes settings related microphone is monaural (“Mono”)
to audio. or stereo (“Stereo”).
Audio CH3/4 Mode Ch1/2 / Switch Selects the input signals for the
AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 connectors.
Ch1/2: The same signals as the
AUDIO IN CH-1/ CH-2
connectors.
Switch: The signals selected with
the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4
switches.
Front MIC CH1 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/ Selects the reference level for
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB channel 1 of the front microphone.
Front MIC CH2 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/ Selects the reference level for
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB channel 2 of the front microphone.
Rear MIC CH1 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/ Selects the reference input level
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB when the setting of the AUDIO IN
CH1 switch is MIC.
Rear MIC CH2 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/ Selects the reference input level
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB when the setting of the AUDIO IN
CH2 switch is MIC.
Line Input Ref +4dB/0dB/–3dB/EBUL Selects the reference input level
when the AUDIO IN CH1 and
AUDIO IN CH2 switches are set to
LINE.
Min Alarm Volume Off/Set Selects the volume when the
ALARM knob is turned all the way
down.
Off: Almost inaudible

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Set: Fairly audible
Speaker Attenuate Off/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB Selects the volume from the monitor
speaker (does not affect earphone
volume).
Headphone Out Mono/Stereo Selects whether the earphones are
monaural (“Mono”) or stereo
(“Stereo”).
Reference Level –20dB/–18dB/–16dB/ Selects the output level of the 1 kHz
–12dB/EBUL test signal.
Reference Out 0dB/+4dB/–3dB/EBUL Specifies the output level with
respect to the reference input level.
CH1&2 AGC Mode Mono/Stereo For automatic adjustment of the
input level of analog audio signals
recorded on channels 1 and 2,
specifies whether to make the
adjustments separately for each
channel (“Mono”) or in stereo mode
(“Stereo”).

Menu List 139

 MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Audio CH3&4 AGC Mode Mono/Stereo For automatic adjustment of the
Makes settings related input level of analog audio signals
to audio. recorded on channels 3 and 4,
specifies whether to make the
adjustments separately for each
channel (“Mono”) or in stereo mode
(“Stereo”).
AGC Spec –6dB/–9dB/–12dB/ Selects the AGC saturation level.
–15dB/–17dB
Limiter Mode Off/–6dB/–9dB/–12dB/ For manual audio level adjustments,
–15dB/–17dB selects the saturation level for the
limiter applied to loud input signals.
Select “Off” if you do not wish to
use the limiter.
Output Limiter On/Off Turns the audio output limiter on or
off.
CH1 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 1 wind filter on or
off.
CH2 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 2 wind filter on or
off.
CH3 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 3 wind filter on or
off.
CH4 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 4 wind filter on or
off.
Audio SG (1KHz) On/Off/Auto Selects whether to output (“On”) or
not output (“Off”) a 1 kHz test
signal in color bar mode.
Auto: Output a test signal only
when the AUDIO SELECT
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

CH1 switch is set to AUTO.

MIC CH1 Level Side1/Front/Front+Side1 For recording input audio from the
front microphone on channel 1,
selects the knob that adjusts the
audio level.
Side1: The LEVEL knob (left) on
the side panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side1: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob (left) and the
MIC LEVEL control.
MIC CH2 Level Side2/Front/Front+Side2 For recording input audio from the
front microphone on channel 2,
selects the knob that adjusts the
audio level.
Side2: The LEVEL knob (right) on
the side panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side2: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob (right) and the
MIC LEVEL control.

140 Menu List

MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Audio Rear1/WRR Level Side1/Front/Front+Side1 Selects the knob that adjusts the
Makes settings related audio levels of a wireless
to audio. microphone and a device connected
to the AUDIO IN CH-1 connector
on the rear panel.
Side1: The LEVEL knob (left) on
the side panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side1: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob (left) and the
MIC LEVEL control.
Rear2/WRR Level Side2/Front/Front+Side2 Selects the knob that adjusts the
audio levels of a wireless
microphone and a device connected
to the AUDIO IN CH-2 connector
on the rear panel.
Side2: The LEVEL knob (right) on
the side panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side2: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob (right) and the
MIC LEVEL control.
Audio CH3 Level Side3/Front/Front+Side3 Selects the knob that adjusts the
level of audio recorded on channel
3.
Side3: The LEVEL knob on side
panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

the front panel
Front+Side3: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob and the MIC
LEVEL control.
Audio CH4 Level Side4/Front/Front+Side4 Selects the knob that adjusts the
level of audio recorded on channel
4.
Side4: The LEVEL knob on side
panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side4: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob and the MIC
LEVEL control.

Menu List 141

 MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
WRR Setting WRR Valid CH Sel All/CH1 Selects whether to enable channels 1
Makes settings related and 2 of the wireless receiver (“All”)
to the wireless tuner. or channel 1 only (“CH1”).
WRR CH Select TX1/TX2 Specifies the target channel for other
sub-items.
TX1: Channel 1
TX2: Channel 2
WRR Delay Comp On/Off Enables (“On”) or disables (“Off”)
delay compensation for wireless
audio input. (When “On” is
selected, the audio in all E-E output
is delayed by about 8 ms.)
TX --- Displays the name of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on
the channel selected by “WRR CH
Select.”
TX Audio Peak ---/Peak Displays whether the AF level of the
transmitter whose signals are being
received on the channel selected by
“WRR CH Select” are over peak.
TX Input Level ---/Mic/Line Displays whether the input level of
the transmitter whose signals are
being received on the channel
selected by “WRR CH Select” is set
to microphone (“Mic”) or line
(“Line”).
TX ATT Level --- Sets the ATT level of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on
the channel selected by “WRR CH
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Select.” (The setting range varies

depending on the transmitter.)
TX LCF Freq --- Sets the low cut filter frequency of
the transmitter whose signals are
being received on the channel
selected by “WRR CH Select.” (The
setting range varies depending on
the transmitter.)
TX System Delay Auto/0.0ms to 8.0ms Specifies the amount of audio delay.
Auto: Automatically adjusts the
amount of delay so that the
delay in the audio received
from the wireless transmitter is
zero.
0.0ms to 8.0ms: Sets the amount of
anticipated wireless system
delay, for cases in which
several wireless systems are
being used over a devices such
as an audio mixer.

142 Menu List

MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Timecode TC Out Auto/Generator Selects the source for timecode
Makes settings related output.
to timecode. Auto: During recording, output
values generated by the
timecode generator, and during
playback output values
obtained by the timecode
reader.
Generator: Output values
generated by the timecode
generator during both recording
and playback.
DF/NDF DF/NDF When “Country” is set to other than
“PAL Area,” selects drop-frame
mode (“DF”) or non-drop-frame
mode (“NDF”).
LTC UBIT Fix/Time Specifies the data recorded in LTC
user bits.
Fix: Record user-specified data.
Time: Record the current time.
Counter Display Counter/Duration Select the method used to reset the
counter value displayed on the
viewfinder screen.
Counter: Continue to increment
until the RESET button is
pressed.
Duration: Reset each time that
recording is started.
Essence Mark Ret Shot Mark 1 On/Off Specify whether to input Shot

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Makes settings related Mark1 marks using the RET button
to shot marks and clip on the lens.
index picture
thumbnails.
Ret Shot Mark 2 On/Off Specify whether to input Shot
Mark2 marks using the RET button
on the lens.
Index Picture Pos 0sec to 10sec (in 1 sec Specifies which frame to use as the
steps) clip thumbnail image
Find Mode Clip/Rec Start Specify the frame to be cued up
when the PREV or NEXT button is
pressed.
Rec Start: The next frame or the
previous frame where a Rec
Start essence mark is set.
Clip: Pressing the NEXT button
moves to the start frame of the
next clip. Pressing the PREV
button moves to the start frame
of the current clip. (Pressing the
PREV button at the start frame
of the current clip moves to the
start frame of the previous
clip.)

Menu List 143

 MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Camera Config Rec Tally Blink On/Off Turns warning flashes by the
Makes settings related TALLY indicator on or off. The
to various camcorder warnings alert you an almost
operations. exhausted battery pack or low
remaining media capacity.
Rec Review 3sec/10sec/Clip Selects the recording review time.
Clip: Review all of the most
recently recorded clip.
SDI Rec Control Off/Remote I/F/Para Rec Sets the function that enables
synchronized recording with this
camcorder.
Remote I/F: To feed a REC trigger
signal to a recorder connected
to the SDI OUT connector.
Para Rec: Performs the recording
controls by interlocking to the
camcorder’s recording
operation.
HD SDI Remote I/F Chara/G-Tally/R-Tally Selects the indication that shows
whether the external device is
recording when “SDI Rec Control”
is set to “Remote I/F.”
Chara: Indicate by the external
device control indication on the
viewfinder screen.
G-Tally: Indicate by the green tally
indicator on the viewfinder
screen.
R-Tally: Indicates by the recording
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

mode/operation status
indication on the viewfinder
screen.
Note
When “SDI Rec Control” is set to
“Para Rec,” “Chara” is set
automatically and this item is grayed
out.
Match Clip Name On/Off Sets whether to add the clip name
information to the SDI output.
ALAC AUTO/OFF Sets the ALAC (magnification
chromatic aberration correction)
function.
AUTO: The ALAC function is set
to on when a compatible lens is
attached.
OFF: Does not use the ALAC
function.

144 Menu List

MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Camera Config CCU Operation Normal/Local Enables switch operations for the
Makes settings related inside panel when the camera adapter
to various camcorder is mounted.
operations.
Notes
• If you change the switch operation
setting of the camcorder, the
camcorder will restart automatically.
• When main unit switch operation is
enabled, display of the CCU remote
controller and display of return
videos and tally and call operations
from the CCU are enabled, but
remote control via the CCU or via
the REMOTE connector is disabled.
Color Bars Select ARIB/100%/75%/ Selects the color bar type.
SMPTE
RM Common On/Off Selects whether to share (“On”) or
Memory not share (“Off”) settings between
times when a remote control unit is
connected and times when the
camcorder is used locally.
RM Rec Start RM/CAM/PARA For times when a remote control
unit is connected, selects whether
recording start/stop buttons are
enabled on the camcorder or the
remote control unit.
RM: Remote control unit
CAM: Camcorder
PARA: Both

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Image Invert On/Off Turns the function that inverts
images vertically on or off.
Rec Start/Stop Beep On/Off Specifies whether to generate
(“On”) or not generate (“Off”) a
beep alarm when recording starts/
stops.
With this item set to “On,” a single
beep sounds when recording starts
and a double beep sounds when
recording stops.
Rec Status Indicator On/Off Specifies whether to display the
recording status indicator in the
viewfinder.
Fan Control Setting Auto/Off in Rec Sets the fan control mode.
Sets the fan control
mode.

Menu List 145

 MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Preset White Color Temp<P> 1500K to 3200K to Specifies the white balance preset
Makes settings related 50000K value.
to white balance preset Color Temp –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies finer color temperature
values.
Balance<P> settings, for use when satisfactory
video cannot be obtained with
“Color Temp<P>.”
R Gain <P> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the R gain preset value.
B Gain <P> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the B gain preset value.
AWB Enable <P> On/Off Turns on and off execution of the
AWB (auto white balance) function
when the WHITE BAL switch is set
to PRST.
White Filter ND Filter C.Temp On/Off Turns the function that assigns
Makes settings related electrical CC filters to ND filters on
to filters. or off.
ND FLT C.Temp<1> 3200K/4300K/5600K/ Selects the color temperature for
6300K when electrical CC filters are
assigned to ND filters.
ND FLT C.Temp<2- 3200K/4300K/5600K/ Selects the color temperature for
4> 6300K when electrical CC filters are
assigned to ND filters.
Electrical CC<A> 3200K/4300K/5600K/ Selects the color temperature for
6300K when the electrical CC filter
switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Electrical CC<B> 3200K/4300K/5600K/ Selects the color temperature for
6300K when the electrical CC filter
switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Electrical CC<C> 3200K/4300K/5600K/ Selects the color temperature for

6300K/----- when the electrical CC filter
switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Select “----” if you do not want to
use C.
Electrical CC<D> 3200K/4300K/5600K/ Selects the color temperature for
6300K/----- when the electrical CC filter
switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Select “----” if you do not want to
use D.

146 Menu List

MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
DCC Adjust DCC Function Select DCC/Fix Enables or disables automatic knee
Makes settings related point adjustment when the
to DCC (dynamic OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to
contrast control). CAM, DCC: ON.
DCC: Automatically adjust the
knee point according to the
luminance of the subject.
Fix: Set the knee point to a fixed
value.
DCC Dynamic 400%/450%/500%/ Specifies the dynamic range when
Range 550%/600% the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to
CAM, DCC: ON.
DCC Point –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the DCC minimum knee
point.
DCC Gain –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies gain with respect to the
DCC detected value.
DCC Delay Time –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the DCC control speed
(speed of reaction to changes in the
video).
DCC Peak Filter –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts response sensitivity with
respect to peaks in DCC detected
values.

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Menu List 147

 MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Auto Iris2 Iris Window 1/2/3/4/5/6/Var Selects the type of iris detection
Makes settings related window.
to auto iris. Var: Variable
Iris Window Ind On/Off Turns on or off the function that
displays a frame marker for the auto
iris detection window.
Iris Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the level of the auto iris
target value.
Iris APL Ratio –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the mix ratio of auto iris
detection peak value and average
value (available when
“OPERATION” > “TLCS” >
“Mode” is set to “Standard”).
Iris Var Width 40 to 500 to 999 Adjusts the width of the detection
window when “Iris Window” is set
to “VAR.”
Iris Var Height 70 to 500 to 999 Adjusts the height of the detection
window when “Iris Window” is set
to “VAR.”
Iris Var H Position –249 to 0 to +249 Specifies the horizontal position of
the detection window when “Iris
Window” is set to “VAR.”
Iris Var V Position –249 to 0 to +249 Specifies the vertical position of the
detection window when “Iris
Window” is set to “VAR.”
Iris Speed –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the control speed (speed of
reaction to changes in the video).
(Larger values specify quicker
reaction times.)
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Clip High Light On/Off Turns on or off the function that

disregards highlights and forces a
flatter reaction to high luminance.
Flicker Reduce Mode Auto/On/Off Enables or disables flicker
Makes settings related reduction.
to flicker reduction. On: Always enabled.
Reduces the flicker that Auto: Enabled when flicker is
can occur when a
subject is shot under a detected.
light source with a Off: Disabled
periodically varying Frequency 60Hz/50Hz Set to the frequency of the lighting
brightness, such as fixture that is causing the flicker.
fluorescent lights, due
(The factory default setting is “50
to the relationship with
the camcorder’s Hz” when “Country” is set to “PAL
recording frame rate. Area,” “60 Hz” when “Country” is
set to other than “PAL Area.”)
Genlock H Phase(HD) –999 to ±0 to +999 Specifies the H phase of HD output
Makes settings related when genlock is enabled.
to genlock. H Phase(SD) –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the H phase of SD output
when genlock is enabled.
Reference Internal/Genlock Displays the type of reference signal
used by the camcorder.

148 Menu List

MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
ND Comp ND Offset Adjust On/Off ND filter color compensation
Makes settings related function.
to ND filter color Clear ND Offset Execute/Cancel Clears ND filter color compensation
compensation.
Although the
values (execute by selecting
differences are very “Execute”).
slight, each of the built-
in ND filters has
different color
characteristics. When
you switch between ND
filters, the white
balance may be
disturbed. You can
correct for these slight
color differences
automatically by
registering
compensation values
for each filter.
Lens Auto FB Adjust Execute/Cancel Executes auto flange back
Executes auto flange adjustment, only for supported
back adjustment. lenses (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
Auto Shading Auto Black Shading Execute/Cancel Executes auto shading
Executes auto black compensation (execute by selecting
shading compensation. “Execute”).
Reset Black Shading Execute/Cancel Clears black shading compensation
values (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
Master Gain (TMP) –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/ Specifies a temporary master gain
12dB/18dB/24dB/30dB/ value. (The value is the same as the

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

36dB/42dB value selected with the GAIN
switch.)
Trigger Mode i.LINK Trigger Internal/Both/External Select Internal when recording start
Makes settings related Mode and stop operations target SxS
to triggers for starting memory cards only. Select External
and stopping recording. when they target only devices
connected to the i.LINK (HDV/DV)
or HD/SD SDI OUT connectors.
Select Both when they target both
memory cards and external devices.

Menu List 149

 MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Network Setting a) DHCP Enable/Disable Selects whether to acquire the IP
Makes settings for address automatically from a DHCP
network connection. server (“Enable”) or not
(“Disable”).
Notes
IP Address 0.0.0.0 to When “DHCP” is set to “Disable,”
• The CBK-WA01 Wi- 255.255.255.255 sets the IP address.
Fi Adapter or IFU-
(192.168.1.10)
WLM3 USB
Wireless LAN Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 to When “DHCP” is set to “Disable,”
Module is required. 255.255.255.255 sets the subnet mask.
• This item is not Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 to When “DHCP” is set to “Disable,”
available when using
255.255.255.255 sets the default gateway.
the CBK-WA101
Wireless Adapter. User Name admin Sets a desired user name in 1 to 31
• This item is alphanumeric characters.
disabled (displayed Password pmw-400 (model name) Sets a password (model name) in 0
in grey) during to 31 alphanumeric characters.
recording and play. Set Execute/Cancel Confirms the settings in “Network
For details on Wi-Fi Settings” (execute by selecting
connection, refer to “Execute”).
“Using Wi-Fi MAC Address Displays the MAC address.
Connection” Net Config Reset Execute/Cancel Resets the settings in “Network
(page 79). Settings” to the preset values
(execute by selecting “Execute”).
Wi-Fi Setting Scan Networks Execute/Cancel When “Wi-Fi” is set to “Enable,”
Makes settings for scan the available network
Wi-Fi connection. connection.
SSID Network connection Sets the network connection name
Notes
name of up to 32 characters.
• The CBK-WA01 Wi-
Network Type Infra/Adhoc Selects the connection mode.
Fi Adapter or IFU-
Infra: Infrastructure mode
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

WLM3 USB
Wireless LAN Adhoc: Ad hoc mode
Module is required. Ch 1 to 11 When “Network Type” is set to
• This item is not “Adhoc,” set the wireless channel.
available when using
the CBK-WA101 Authentication Open/Shared/WPA/ Selects the network authentication.
Wireless Adapter. WPA2 OPEN: Open system authentication
• This item is SHARED: Shared key
disabled (displayed authentication
in grey) during WPA: WPA (Wi-Fi Protected
recording and play. Access) authentication
For details on Wi-Fi WPA2: WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected
connection, refer to Access 2) authentication when
“Using Wi-Fi “Network Type” is set to
Connection” “Infra”
(page 79).

150 Menu List

MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Wi-Fi Setting Encryption Disable/WEP/TKIP/AES Selects whether to apply data
Makes settings for encryption and the type of data
Wi-Fi connection. encryption.
Disable: Do not apply data
Notes
encryption.
• The CBK-WA01 Wi- WEP: Apply WEP (Wired
Fi Adapter or IFU- Equivalent Privacy) when
WLM3 USB
Wireless LAN “Authentication” is set to
Module is required. “Open” or “Shared”
• This item is not TKIP: Apply TKIP (Temporal Key
available when using Integrity Protocol) when
the CBK-WA101 “Authentication” is set to
Wireless Adapter.
“WPA” or “WPA2”
• This item is
AES: Apply AES (Advanced
disabled (displayed
Encryption Standard) when
in grey) during
“Authentication” is set to
recording and play.
“WPA” or “WPA2”
For details on Wi-Fi WEP Key Index 1/2/3/4 When “Encryption” is “WEP,”
connection, refer to selects the key index.
“Using Wi-Fi
Input Select When “Encryption” is set Selects the input format depending
Connection”
to “WEP”: ASCII5, on the network key (or security key).
(page 79).
ASCII13, HEX10, ASCII5: Five characters ASCII
HEX26 format
When “Encryption” is set ASCII13: 13 characters ASCII
to “TKIP” or “AES”: format
ASCII8-63, HEX64 HEX10: 10 hexadecimal digits
HEX26: 26 hexadecimal digits
ASCII8-63: 8 to 63 characters
ASCII 8-bit format
HEX64: 64 hexadecimal digits

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

(characters)
Key Sets the network key (or security
key).
Set Enables settings for “Wi-Fi Setting”
when “Wi-Fi” is set to “Enable”
(execute by selecting “Execute”).
Wi-Fi Status xxxxx Displays “Connecting” while
Connecting connection is being attempted.
Displays black squares to show the
connection status by the number of
squares when the camcorder is
connected to a computer or a LAN.
Wireless Mode 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n Displays an IEEE802.11 standard.
Wi-Fi Enable/Disable Selects whether to enable or disable
Wi-Fi connection.
Wi-Fi Remote On/Off Select “On” when using the Wi-Fi
remote commander.

Note
Unselectable when “Wi-Fi” is set to
“Disable.”

Menu List 151

 MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Clock Set Date/Time Sets the current date and time.
Sets the internal clock. 12H/24H 12H/24H Selects the 12-hour format (“12H”)
or the 24-hour format (“24H”) for
display of times.
Date Mode YYMMDD/MMDDYY/ Selects the display format for dates.
DDMMYY YYMMDD: Year, Month, Day
MMDDYY: Month, Day, Year
DDMMYY: Day, Month Year
Language Language English/Japanese/ Selects the language for menus and
Selects the language for Chinese/Spanish/ messages.
menus and messages. Portuguese/Russian/ English: To display in English
Indonesian Japanese: To display in Japanese
Chinese: To display in Chinese
Spanish: To display in Spanish
Portuguese: To display in
Portuguese
Russian: To display in Russian
Indonesian: To display in
Indonesian
Note
• The language of the menus and
messages differs depending on the
area.
• When set to “Japanese,” the menus
are displayed in English, and
messages are displayed in Japanese.
Hours Meter Hours(Sys) Displays the cumulative hours of
Makes settings related use (cannot be reset).
to the digital hours Hours(Reset) Displays the hours of use (can be
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

meter.
reset).
Reset Execute/Cancel Resets “Hours(Reset)” to “0.”
(Execute by selecting “Execute”.)
Menu Scroll Menu Scroll Normal/Loop Selects the scroll method for the
Selects the scroll menu.
method for the menu. Normal: The cursor stops when it
reaches to the top or bottom
while scrolling.
Loop: The cursor continues
scrolling from the bottom when
it reaches to the top, or from the
top when it reaches to the
bottom.

152 Menu List

MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
USB Set USB Thumbnail Execute/Cancel Displays the USB media thumbnail
Sets the USB media screen.
connection Select Folder Selects a folder on USB media as
the destination when copying clips
and for display on the thumbnail
screen. Select “<New>” to create a
new folder.
Rename Folder Renames the current folder.
Error Check On/Off Selects whether to perform error
checking when copying clips.
Format USB exFAT/FAT32 Formats USB media.
exFAT: Format USB media for
copying clips.
FAT32: Format USB flash drive for
writing planning metadata
(UDF mode only).
Copy To USB A to USB/B to USB/ Copies SxS memory card clips to
A&B to USB USB media.
Note
Available only when the thumbnail
screen is displayed.
Copy From USB USB to A/USB to B Copies USB media clips to SxS
memory card.
Note
Available only when the thumbnail
screen is displayed.
With General Enable/Disable Enables/disables copying of files in

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

the General folder when copying
clips.
Version Version Displays the software version of the
Displays the version of camcorder (Vx.xx).
the camcorder, and CBK-CE01 Displays the software version of the
updates the camcorder.
optional CBK-CE01 (Vx.xx).
Version Up Execute/Cancel Updates the camcorder (execute by
selecting “Execute”).
Note
This cannot be selected unless an SxS
memory card is inserted.

Menu List 153

 FILE Menu
Settings in bold are the factory default values.

FILE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
All Display Mode Date&Time/Model Selects the items to be displayed in
Makes settings related Name the list box that appears when a file
to ALL file operations. is saved or loaded.
All Load SxS Execute/Cancel Loads an ALL file from an SxS
memory card (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
All Save SxS Execute/Cancel Stores an ALL file to an SxS
memory card (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
All Load USB Execute/Cancel Loads an ALL file from a USB flash
(in UDF mode only) drive (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
All Save USB Execute/Cancel Stores an ALL file to a USB flash
(in UDF mode only) drive (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
File ID Assigns a name to a file. Names can
be up to 16 characters in length.
All Preset Execute/Cancel Return all items to their preset
values (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
Store All Preset Execute/Cancel Store the current settings of all items
as the preset values (execute by
selecting “Execute”).
Clear All Preset Execute/Cancel Clear the preset values of all items
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

(execute by selecting “Execute”).

3Sec Clr Preset On/Off Turns on or off the function that
clears each preset value when the
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch is pushed up and held for
three seconds on the CANCEL/
PRST side.
Network Data Off/On Selects whether to load (“On”) or
not load (“Off”) network settings
when loading an ALL file.

154 Menu List

FILE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Scene s1 Standard File number and file ID
Makes settings related s2 Standard File number and file ID
to scene file operations.
s3 Standard File number and file ID
s4 Standard File number and file ID
s5 Standard File number and file ID
sStandard Standard settings
Display Mode Date&Time/Model Selects the items to be displayed in
Name the list box that appears when a file
is saved or loaded.
Scene Recall Mem Execute/Cancel Loads a file from internal memory
(execute by selecting “Execute”).
Scene Store Mem Execute/Cancel Stores a file in internal memory
(execute by selecting “Execute”).
Scene Recall SxS Execute/Cancel Loads a file from an SxS memory
card (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
Scene Store SxS Execute/Cancel Stores a file to an SxS memory card
(execute by selecting “Execute”).
Scene Recall USB Execute/Cancel Loads a file from a USB flash drive
(in UDF mode only) (execute by selecting “Execute”).
Scene Store USB Execute/Cancel Stores a file to a USB flash drive
(in UDF mode only) (execute by selecting “Execute”).
File ID Assigns a name to a file. Names can
be up to 16 characters in length.
Reference Reference Store Execute/Cancel Stores the current settings of
Makes settings related reference file items in the reference
to reference file file that is maintained in internal
operations. memory (execute by selecting

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

“Execute”).
Reference Clear Execute/Cancel Clears the reference file (execute by
selecting “Execute”).
Reference Load SxS Execute/Cancel Loads a reference file from an SxS
memory card (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
Reference Save SxS Execute/Cancel Stores a reference file to an SxS
memory card (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
Reference Load USB Execute/Cancel Loads a file from a USB flash drive
(in UDF mode only) (execute by selecting “Execute”).
Reference Save USB Execute/Cancel Stores a file to a USB flash drive
(in UDF mode only) (execute by selecting “Execute”).
File ID Assigns a name to a file. Names can
be up to 16 characters in length.
Scene White Data On/Off Selects whether to load (“On”) or
not load (“Off”) white balance data
when “Scene” > “Scene Recall” or
“Scene” > “Standard” is executed.

Menu List 155

 FILE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Lens Display Mode Date&Time/Model Selects the items to be displayed in
Makes settings related Name the list box that appears when a file
to lens file operations. is saved or loaded.
Lens Recall Mem Execute/Cancel Loads a file from internal memory
(execute by selecting “Execute”).
Lens Store Mem Execute/Cancel Stores a file in internal memory
(execute by selecting “Execute”).
Lens Recall SxS Execute/Cancel Loads a file from an SxS memory
card (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
Lens Store SxS Execute/Cancel Stores a file to an SxS memory card
(execute by selecting “Execute”).
Lens Recall USB Execute/Cancel Loads a file from a USB flash drive
(in UDF mode only) (execute by selecting “Execute”).
Lens Store USB Execute/Cancel Stores a file to a USB flash drive
(in UDF mode only) (execute by selecting “Execute”).
File ID Assigns a name to the most recently
loaded file. Names can be up to 16
characters in length.
Source Displays the number of the selected
file.
Lens No Offset Execute/Cancel Clears a file (execute by selecting
“Execute”).
Lens Auto Recall Off/On/Serial Number When the installed lens supports
serial communication, specifies
whether to automatically load that
reference file.
Off: Do not use this function.
On: Load the reference for the
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

model name and reflect the

contents of the file.
Serial Number: For lenses that
support serial number
communication, load the lens
file that corresponds to the
serial number and model name,
and reflect the contents of that
file. For lenses that do not
support serial number
communication, load the
reference for the model name
(in the same way as when On is
selected).
Serial Number Displays the serial number of the
installed lens (only for lenses that
support serial communication).
Lens ID Displays the model name of the
installed lens (only for lenses that
support serial communication).

156 Menu List

FILE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Lens L Manufacturer Displays the name of the
Makes settings related manufacturer of the installed lens
to lens file operations. (only for lenses that support serial
communication).
M V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a vertical SAW shading
compensation value in the lens file.
Lens Center H –40 to 0 to 40 Sets a center marker horizontal
position in the lens file.
Lens Center V –40 to 0 to 40 Sets a center marker vertical
position in the lens file.
Lens R Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a R flare level in the lens file.
Lens G Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a G flare level in the lens file.
Lens B Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a B flare level in the lens file.
Lens W-R Offset –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a R white balance
compensation value in the lens file.
Lens W-B Offset –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a B white balance
compensation value in the lens file.
Shading Ch Sel Red/Green/Blue Selects the white shading
compensation target.
L R/G/B H Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a horizontal SAW white
shading compensation value in the
lens file.
L R/G/B H Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a horizontal parabola white
shading compensation value in the
lens file.
L R/G/B V Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a vertical SAW white shading
compensation value in the lens file.
L R/G/B V Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a vertical parabola white

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

shading compensation value in the
lens file.
Import File Import Execute/Cancel Loads the scene file of the PMW-
Loads the scene file of 350.
the PMW-350.
Note
Before performing import, select the
card slot for the SxS memory card to
which the scene file is stored.

Menu List 157

 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches

Using the Assignable SW item of the OPERATION menu, you can assign user-specified functions to the
ASSIGN. 0 to 3 switches, the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 switches, the COLOR TEMP. button, and the RET
button on the lens.
The following tables lists the functions that are assigned when the camcorder is shipped from the factory.
Switch or button Function Assignable SW setting
ASSIGN. 0 switch No assignment Off
ASSIGN. 1 switch Execute EZ mode, according to the setting of EZ Mode
“OPERATION” > “TLCS.”
ASSIGN. 2 switch No assignment Off
ASSIGN. 3 switch No assignment Off
ASSIGNABLE 4 switch No assignment Off
ASSIGNABLE 5 switch No assignment Off
RET button During recording or playback: Write a shot mark. Lens RET
In the other states: Conduct a recording review
(if playback is allowed).
COLOR TEMP. button Adjust the white balance with the preset white Color Temp SW 5600K
balance value of 5600K.

Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 0 Switch

Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder

is next powered on
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Off No assignment —
Marker Turn the display of all markers on or off. Setting retained
ATW Hold Hold the white balance setting in the ATW (auto-tracking —
white balance) mode
Picture Cache Turn the picture cache function on or off. Setting retained
Freeze Mix Execute the freeze mix function. —
Focus Mag Turn the focus magnification function on or off. Setting not retained
Zebra Turn zebra display on or off. Setting not retained
Shot Mark1 Write Shot Mark1. —
Shot Mark2 Write Shot Mark2. —
OK Mark Add or delete an OK mark. —
Clip Flag OK Add/clear an OK flag to/from the clip being recorded or Setting not retained
played.
Clip Flag NG Add/clear an NG flag to/from the clip being recorded or Setting not retained
played.
Clip Flag Keep Add/clear a KP flag to/from the clip being recorded or played. Setting not retained
Flashband Reduce Turn the flashband reduce function on/off. Setting not retained
Quick Backup Back up all the clips in the selected SxS card to a USB Setting not retained
media.
USB Thumbnail Display the thumbnail screen of a USB media. Setting not retained

158 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches

 Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 Switch
Note
Immediately after you assign a function to the ASSIGN. 2 switch or you switch the recording format, the setting of the
switch at that point may not match the camcorder’s internal state. After assigning a function, switch the ASSIGN. 2
switch or power the camcorder off and on again.

Assignable switch setting Function

Off No assignment
Front Mic Switch between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected.
Marker Turn the display of all markers on or off.
Picture Cache a) Turn the picture cache function on or off.
Zebra Turn zebra display on or off.
Clip Continuous Rec Turn the Clip Continuous Rec mode on or off.
Digital Extender b) Turn the screen magnification function on or off when the optional CBK-CE01 50
Pin Interface and Digital Extender is installed.

Note b) When the digital extender function is turned on, it is

not possible to show the return video.
a) When Picture Cache is assigned, “OPERATION” >
“Rec Function” in the setup menu is disabled
(displayed in grey) to keep the setting unchanged.

Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 and 3 Switches, the

ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 Switches, and the COLOR TEMP. Button

Assignable switch Function State when camcorder

setting is next powered on
Off No assignment —

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Front Mic Switch between stereo (On) and monaural (Off) when a Setting retained
stereo microphone is connected.
Marker Turn the display of all markers on or off. Setting retained
Last Clip Delete Delete the most recently recorded clip. —
ATW Turn ATW (auto tracing white balance) mode on or off. Setting not retained

ATW Hold Hold the white balance setting in the ATW mode. —
EZ Mode Execute EZ mode according to the setting of Setting retained
“OPERATION” > “TLCS.”
Turbo Gain Execute Turbo Gain according to the setting of Setting not retained
“OPERATION” > “Gain Switch” > “Gain Turbo.”
Rec Review Conduct a recording review. —
Rec Start or stop recording. —
Picture Cache Turn the picture cache function on or off. Setting retained
Freeze Mix Execute the freeze mix function. Setting not retained
Spotlight Turn the spotlight function in auto iris mode on or off. Setting retained

Backlight Turn the backlight function in auto iris mode on or off. Setting retained
EVF Mode Switch the viewfinder screen between B&W (On) and color Setting retained
(Off).

Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches 159

 Assignable switch Function State when camcorder
setting is next powered on
BRT Disp Turn the display of the brightness level on or off. Setting retained
Histogram Turn the histogram display on or off. Setting retained
Lens Info Switch the depth of field indication between off, displayed Setting retained
in meters, and displayed in feet.
Zoom Tele/Wide When a lens that supports serial communication is —
installed, assign the Zoom Tele function to ASSIGNABLE
4, and assign the Zoom Wide function to ASSIGNABLE 5
(displayed only when <4> and <5> are set).
Zoom Wide/Tele When a lens that supports serial communication is —
installed, assign the Zoom Wide function to ASSIGNABLE
4, and assign the Zoom Tele function to ASSIGNABLE 5
(displayed only when <4> and <5> are set).
Manual Focus Assist Turn the manual focus assist function on or off. Setting retained
Focus Mag Turn the focus magnification function on or off. Setting not retained
Zebra Turn zebra display on or off. Setting not retained
Lens RET Display return video signals when the optional CBK-CE01 —
is installed and a camera control unit is connected.
When a camera control unit is not connected, function as
follows.
During recording or playback: Write a shot mark.
In the other states: Conduct a recording review
(if playback is allowed).
Return Video a) Display return video signals during operating the system, —
when the optional CBK-CE01 is installed and a camera
adaptor and camera control unit are connected.
Return Video2 Display return video signals during operating the system, —
when the optional CBK-CE01 is installed and a camera
adaptor is connected.
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

Return Video3 Display return video signals during operating the system, —
when the optional CBK-CE01 is installed and a camera
adaptor is connected.
Return Video4 Display return video signals during operating the system, —
when the optional CBK-CE01 is installed and a camera
adaptor is connected.
Shot Mark1 Write Shot Mark1. —
Shot Mark2 Write Shot Mark2. —
OK Mark Add or delete an OK mark. —
Clip Flag OK Add/Clear an OK flag to/from the clip being recorded or Setting not retained
played.
Clip Flag NG Add/Clear an NG flag to/from the clip being recorded or Setting not retained
played.
Clip Flag Keep Add/Clear a KP flag to/from the clip being recorded or Setting not retained
played.
Color Temp SW 3200K Adjust the white balance with a 3200K preset value. Setting retained

Color Temp SW 4300K Adjust the white balance with a 4300K preset value. Setting retained

Color Temp SW 5600K Adjust the white balance with a 5600K preset value. Setting retained

160 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches

Assignable switch Function State when camcorder
setting is next powered on
Color Temp SW 6300K Adjust the white balance with a 6300K preset value. Setting retained

Electrical CC Function that switches the electrical CC filter (3200K/ Setting retained
4300K/5600K/6300K) applied to white balance adjustment
values.
Each press of the switch or button switches in the order
3200Kt4300Kt5600Kt6300K.
These can also be applied from a menu (apply with
Electrical CC<A><B><C><D>).
Note
This function is not available when “MAINTENANCE” >
“White Filter” >ND Filter C.Temp” in the setup menu is set to
“On.”
If you set “ND Filter C.Temp” to “On” after assigning the
function, the assignable switch ceases to function.
CC5600K Apply a 5600K electrical CC filter to white balance Setting retained
adjustment values.
Clip Continuous Rec Turn the Clip Continuous Rec mode on or off. Setting not retained
Slot Select When both slots A and B have recording media inserted in —
them, select the media to use.
Digital Extender a) Turn the screen magnification function on or off when the Setting not retained
optional CBK-CE01 50 Pin Interface and Digital Extender
is installed.
Flashband Reduce Turn the flashband reduce function on/off. Setting not retained
Quick Backup Back up all the clips in the selected SxS card collectively to Setting not retained
a USB media.
USB Thumbnail Display the thumbnail screen of a USB media. Setting not retained

a) When the digital extender function is turned on, it is

Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

not possible to show the return video.

Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches 161

 Functions That Can Be Assigned to the RET Button on the Lens

Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder

is next powered on
Off No assignment —
Lens RET Display return video signals when the optional CBK- —
CE01 is installed and a camera control unit is connected.
When a camera control unit is not connected, function as
follows.
During recording or playback: Write a shot mark.
In the other states: Conduct a recording review (if
playback is allowed).
Return Video a) Display return video signals when the optional CBK- —
CE01 is installed and a camera control unit is connected.
Rec Review Execute recording review. —
Shot Mark1 Write Shot Mark1. —
Shot Mark2 Write Shot Mark2. —
Clip Flag OK Add/Clear an OK flag to/from the clip being recorded or Setting not retained
played.
Clip Flag NG Add/Clear an NG flag to/from the clip being recorded or Setting not retained
played.
Clip Flag Keep Add/Clear a KP flag to/from the clip being recorded or Setting not retained
played.
OK Mark Add or delete an OK mark. —
Focus Mag Turn the focus magnification function on or off. Setting not retained
Flashband Reduce Turn the flashband reduce function on/off. Setting not retained
Quick Backup Back up all the clips in the selected SxS card collectively Setting not retained
to a USB media.
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings

USB Thumbnail Display the thumbnail screen of a USB media. Setting not retained

a) When the digital extender function is turned on, it is

not possible to show the return video.

162 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches

 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data

Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data

Chapter

you can still recover preset values and reset files

Saving and Loading to their initial states (see page 165).

Settings Saving Setting Data

Before starting, insert a writable SxS memory
card into a memory card slot.
You can save setup menu settings in the
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 110) for
camcorder’s internal memory, on an SxS memory
information about menu operations.
card, or USB flash drive (in UDF/exFAT mode).
This allows you to quickly recall an appropriate 1 Select “FILE” > “All” in the setup
set of menu settings for the current situation.
menu.
Setting data is saved in the following categories.
ALL files: ALL files save the setting data of all
To assign a name to the data before saving
menus. You can save up to 64 ALL files on
it
an SxS memory card or USB flash drive (in
Assign a name before proceeding to step 2.
UDF/exFAT mode).
For details, see “To assign names to files”
Note (page 164).
Device specific data (shading, output levels, and
other data that requires adjustment for the specific 2 Select “All Save SxS” > “Execute.”
device) is not saved. An ALL file list box appears.
Scene files: Scene file save adjustments to File numbers where “No File” is displayed
PAINT menu items for the purpose of are empty file numbers. File numbers with a
shooting a particular scene. You can save up file name or a date and time are the number
to five scene files in the camcorder’s internal of files that already contain data.
memory and up to 64 scene files on an SxS
memory card or USB flash drive (in UDF/ 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the
exFAT mode). desired file number.
Reference files: Reference files save the
reference values that are set when you 4 Press the MENU knob.
execute “FILE” > “Scene” > “Standard” in A confirmation message appears.
the setup menu. You can save one reference
file in the camcorder’s internal memory and
5 To execute the save, select “Execute,”
one on an SxS memory card or USB flash and then press the MENU knob.
drive (in UDF/exFAT mode). To cancel the save, select “Cancel,” and
Lens files: Lens files save the setting data used to then press the MENU knob.
compensate for lens characteristics, such as If you choose to execute the save, the
flare, white shading, white balance and ACCESS lamp lights (in blue on the right-
center markers. You can save up to 32 lens side panel and in orange in the card slot
files in the camcorder’s internal memory and section). A completion message appears and
up to 64 lens files on an SxS memory card or the ACCESS lamp goes out when the data
USB flash drive (in UDF/exFAT mode). has been saved to the SxS memory card.
If an error message appears
The first settings stored in a file are called One of the following error messages may appear
“preset” values. during execution of the save, or as soon as you
Even after loading files to set up the camcorder,
and overwriting original files with new settings,

Saving and Loading Settings 163

 select “Execute.” In this case, the file is not saved 1 Select “FILE” > “All” in the setup
to the SxS memory card. menu.
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data

Error message Problem What to do 2 Select “All Load SxS” > “Execute.”
NG:Cannot Save No recordable Insert A list box of ALL files appears.
media is recordable File numbers where “No File” is displayed
inserted. media. are empty file numbers. File numbers with a
NG:Media Full The media is Use media with file name or a date and time are the number
full. free capacity of files that already contain data.
remaining.

When using a USB flash drive (in UDF/exFAT 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the
mode) desired file number.
Connect a formatted USB flash drive (see
page 64) to the external device connector. 4 Press the MENU knob.
Select “All Save USB” > “Execute” in step 2. A confirmation message appears.

5 To execute the load, select “Execute,”

To assign names to files and then press the MENU knob.
Assigning a name before you save data in an ALL To cancel the load, select “Cancel,” and
file can make it easier to distinguish your files. then press the MENU knob.
The following characters can be used in file If you choose to execute the load, the
names. ACCESS lamp lights (in blue on the right-
Alphanumeric characters (a–z, A–Z, 0–9) and side panel and in orange in the card slot
special characters ( ! # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = section). The ACCESS lamp goes out and a
> ? @ [ \ ] ~) completion message appears when the data
has been loaded from the SxS memory card.
1 Select “FILE” > “All” > “File ID” in the
setup menu. If an error message appears
One of the following error messages may appear
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a during execution of the load, or as soon as you
character, and then press the MENU select “Execute.” In this case, the file is not
knob. loaded from the SxS memory card.
Error message Problem What to do
3 Repeat step 3. NG:No Data • There is no Insert the
readable media that
4 When you have finished entering media contains the file
characters, press the MENU knob to • The specified you want.
move the cursor to “SET,” and then file does not
press the MENU knob. exist on the
media
The specified name is displayed.
When you save the file (see page 163), the When using a USB flash drive (in UDF/exFAT
data will be saved under this name. mode)
Connect a formatted USB flash drive (see
page 64) to the external device connector.
Loading Setting Data Select “All Load USB” > “Execute” in step 2.

Note
When you load a file from an SxS memory card
or USB flash drive (in UDF mode), the data saved
in the camcorder’s internal memory is
overwritten.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 110) for
information about menu operations.

164 Saving and Loading Settings

Resetting a File after Changing Its
Saving and Loading

Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data

Contents
Scene Files
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 110) for
information about menu operations.

1 Select “FILE” > “All” in the setup

Scene files allow you to save the following types
menu.
of data.
2 Select “All Preset,” and then press the • Values set in the PAINT menu
MENU knob. • Shutter speeds set in standard mode or ECS
mode
3 To execute the reset, select “Execute,” • White balance data
and then press the MENU knob. The data that is saved and loaded depends on the
To cancel the reset, select “Cancel,” and setting of “FILE” > “Reference” > “Scene
then press the MENU knob. White Data” in the setup menu.
If you choose to execute the reset, all settings
in the ALL file are reset to preset values. Saving Scene Files
Insert an SxS memory card into a memory card
slot, then proceed as follows.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 110) for
information about menu operations.

1 Select “FILE” > “Scene” in the setup

menu.

To assign a name to the data before saving

it
Assign a name before proceeding to step 2.
For details, see “To assign names to files”
(page 164).

2 Select “Scene Store Mem” or “Scene

Store SxS.”
Select “Scene Store Mem” if you want to
save the data in the camcorder’s internal
memory, and select “Scene Store SxS” if you
want to save the data on an SxS memory
card.

3 Press the MENU knob.

A list box of scene files appears.
File numbers where “No File” is displayed
are empty file numbers

4 Select the file number under which you

want to save the data, and then press the
MENU knob.
A confirmation message appears.

Saving and Loading Scene Files 165

 5 To execute the save, select “Execute,”
and then press the MENU knob. Saving and Loading
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data

To cancel the save, select “Cancel,” and

then press the MENU knob. Lens Files
If you selected Scene Store SxS in step 2, the
ACCESS lamp lights when you execute the
save (in blue on the right-side panel and in
orange in the card slot section).
When the data has been saved to the SxS Setting Lens File Data
memory card, a completion message appears
and the ACCESS lamp goes out. Set the data in lens files on “FILE” > “Lens” in
the setup menu (see page 156).
You can set the following data and save it as a
Loading Scene Files lens file.
Setting data Sub-items
Insert an SxS memory card into a memory card
V modulation shading M V Modulation
slot, then proceed as follows.
compensation values
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 110) for Center marker position Lens Center H
information about menu operations. Lens Center V
Flare level Lens R Flare
1 Select “FILE” > “Scene” in the setup Lens G Flare
menu. Lens B Flare
White balance Lens W-R Offset
2 Select “Scene Recall Mem” or “Scene
compensation value Lens W-B Offset
Recall SxS.”
White shading L R/G/B H Saw
Select “Scene Recall Mem” if you want to compensation value L R/G/B H Para
load the file from the camcorder’s internal L R/G/B V Saw
memory, and select “Scene Recall SxS” if L R/G/B V Para
you want to load the file from an SxS
memory card. See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 110) for
information about menu operations.
3 Press the MENU knob.
A list box of scene files appears. File
numbers where “No File” is displayed are
Saving Lens Files
empty file numbers.
Insert an SxS memory card into a memory card
slot, then proceed as follows.
4 Select the desired file number, and then
press the MENU knob. See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 110) for
A confirmation message appears. information about menu operations.

5 To execute the load, select “Execute,” 1 Select “FILE” > “Lens” in the setup
and then press the MENU knob. menu.
To cancel the load, select “Cancel,” and
then press the MENU knob. To assign a name to the data before saving
If you selected “Scene Recall SxS” in step 2, it
the ACCESS lamp lights when you execute Assign a name before proceeding to step 2.
the load (in blue on the right-side panel and For details, see “To assign names to files”
in orange in the card slot section). (page 164).
When the data has been loaded from the SxS
memory card, a completion message appears
and the ACCESS lamp goes out.

166 Saving and Loading Lens Files

2 Select “Lens Store Mem” or “Lens 3 To execute the load, select “Execute,”
Store SxS,” and press the MENU knob. and then press the MENU knob.

Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data

Select “Lens Store Mem” if you want to save To cancel the load, select “Cancel,” and
the data in the camcorder’s internal memory, then press the MENU knob.
and select “Lens Store SxS” if you want to If you select “Execute,” a list box of lens files
save the data on an SxS memory card. appears. File numbers where “No File” is
displayed are empty file numbers.
3 To execute the save, select “Execute,”
and then press the MENU knob. 4 Select the desired file number, and then
To cancel the save, select “Cancel,” and press the MENU knob.
then press the MENU knob. A confirmation message appears.
If you select “Execute,” a list box of lens file
number appears. File numbers where “No 5 To execute the load, select “Execute,”
File” is displayed are empty file numbers. and then press the MENU knob.
To cancel the load, select “Cancel,” and
4 Select the file number under which you then press the MENU knob.
want to save the data, and then press the If you selected “Lens Recall SxS” in step 2,
MENU knob. the ACCESS lamp lights when you execute
A confirmation message appears. the load (in blue on the right-side panel and
in orange in the card slot section).
5 To execute the save, select “Execute,” When the specified lens file has been loaded
and then press the MENU knob. from the SxS memory card, a completion
To cancel the save, select “Cancel,” and message appears and the ACCESS lamp goes
then press the MENU knob. out.
If you selected Lens Store SxS in step 2, the
ACCESS lamp lights when you execute the
save (in blue on the right-side panel and in Loading Lens Files Automatically
orange in the card slot section).
When the data has been saved to the SxS When you are using a lens that support serial
memory card, a completion message appears communication, you can set up the camcorder by
and the ACCESS lamp goes out. automatically loading the lens file that
corresponds to the lens settings (Lens Auto Recall
function).
Loading Lens Files To use the Lens Auto Recall function, set “FILE”
> “Lens” > “Lens Auto Recall” in the setup menu
Insert an SxS memory card into a memory card to one of the following.
slot, then proceed as follows. On: Load the lens file that corresponds to the
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 110) for model name.
information about menu operations. Off: Do not use the Lens Auto Recall function.
Serial Number: Load the lens file that
1 Select “FILE” > “Lens” in the setup corresponds to the model name and serial
menu. number (when the lens supports
communication of the serial number).
2 Select “Lens Recall Mem” or “Lens If the lens does not support communication of the
Recall SxS,” and press the MENU knob. serial number, both settings load the lens file that
Select “Lens Recall Mem” if you want to corresponds to the model name.
load the file from the camcorder’s internal
memory, and select “Lens Recall SxS” if you
want to load the file from an SxS memory
card.

Saving and Loading Lens Files 167

 Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices
You can connect a control device such as an RM-B170/B750 Remote Control Unit or RCP-1001/1501
Remote Control Panel and operate this camcorder. For details on connection and operation of the control
device, refer to “Operating via the REMOTE Connector” (page 65).
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices

Connecting External Monitors

Select the output signal and use an appropriate cable for the monitor to be connected.

BNC cable (not supplied)

HDMI cable (not supplied)

BNC cable (not supplied)

Regardless of whether the signal is HD or SD, the Note

same status information and menus can be
SD signals down-converted for output have the
displayed on the external monitor as those on the following restrictions:
viewfinder screen. Images of 50P/50i/25P are output as PAL signals, those
of 59.94P/59.94i/29.97P are output as NTSC signals, and
those of 23.98P are output as 2-3 pulled-down NTSC
signals.

168 Connecting External Monitors

HD/SD SDI OUT connectors (BNC) i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector
The PMW-400 has two HD/SD SDI OUT The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector supports HDV
connectors. and DV input/output. However, DV streams
You can connect a monitor or switcher, or cannot be recorded on this camcorder.
recording device such as a VTR, etc., that This connector can be used to connect a device
supports SDI. that supports i.LINK (HDV). The device type can
The output from these connectors can be turned be a monitor, read/write device such as VTR or

Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices

on and off with “OPERATION” > “Input/ HDD, or computer.
Output” > “SDI Output” in the setup menu (see To input/output HDV signals
page 115).
HDV input/output is supported when the video
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).
format is an HDV compatible format (SP 1440/
59.94i, SP 1440/50i, or SP 1440/23.98P),
HDMI connector “OPERATION” > “Input/Output” >
You can connect a monitor or recording device “Output&i.LINK” in the setup menu is set to
such as a VTR, etc., that supports HDMI. “HD&HDV” or “SD&HDV,” and “Input/
The output from this connector can be turned on Output” > “i.LINK I/O” is set to “Enable.”
and off with “OPERATION” > “Input/Output” > When the video format is SP 1440/23.98P, a
“HDMI Output” in the setup menu (see 59.94i HDV signal subjected to 2-3 pulldown
page 115). processing is output.
For connection, use an HDMI cable (not To input/output DV signals
supplied). DV input/output is supported under either of the
following conditions.
VIDEO OUT connector • “OPERATION” > “Input/Output” >
You can connect a monitor or recording device “i.LINK I/O” in the setup menu is set to
such as a VTR, etc., that supports analog “Enable” on SD mode.
composite signals. • On HD mode, the video format is other than DV
The analog composite signal output from this incompatible formats (HQ 1920/23.98P, HQ
connector is the same as the NTSC or PAL 1440/23.98P, and HQ 1280/23.98P),
encoded signal that is output from the HD/SD “OPERATION” > “Input/Output” >
SDI OUT connector when the setting of output is “Output&i.LINK” in the setup menu is set to
SD signal (you can switch between NTSC and “SD&DV,” and “Input/Output” > “i.LINK I/O”
PAL with “OPERATION” > “Format” > is set to “Enable.”
“Country” in the setup menu (see page 113)).
To input the VIDEO OUT connector output
signal to an external analog composite device, it
may be necessary to change the input signal
setting of that external device to be matched with
the analog composite signal setting for the
VIDEO OUT connector.
To input camcorder output audio to an external
device such as a monitor or VTR or other
recording device, connect the audio output of the
AUDIO OUT connector to the audio input of that
external device.
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).

Connecting External Monitors 169

 When two memory cards are mounted in this
Operating Clips with a camcorder, they are acknowledged as two
independent extended drives by the computer.
Computer
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices

Using the ExpressCard Slot of a

Computer
If the computer is equipped with an ExpressCard/
34 or ExpressCard/54 slot, you can directly insert
the SxS memory card containing clips recorded
with this camcorder and access to the files. USB cable
(not supplied)
Notes
• Before operating clips, set the SxS memory card to the
read-only mode and make a backup copy to a computer
to protect data. Do the same when using a reader/
writer.
• The SxS Device Driver Software and the UDF Driver
Software must be downloaded and installed on your
computer. For details, see “Software Downloads”
(page 10).
• Operation is not guaranteed with all computers.
For support information for the driver, visit the
Notes
following URL:
http://www.sony.net/SxS-Support/ • When connecting the USB cable to the computer, be
careful to check the form and direction of the PC
connector.
To the ExpressCard slot • The camcorder does not work on the bus power from
the computer.
SxS PRO
8GB

SxS memory card To start USB connection

Computer with SxS
Device Driver When you connect a computer to the PC
Software installed connector with a USB cable (not supplied), the
message “Connect USB Now?” is displayed to
With a Windows computer
prompt you to confirm that you wish to enable the
Check that a Removable Disk appears in My
USB connection.
Computer. This indicates normal status.
If you select “Cancel” or push the MENU
With a Macintosh computer CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the
An icon is displayed on the menu bar. ESCAPE side or if you disconnect the USB cable,
the message “Connect USB Now?” disappears.

USB Connection with a Computer If you select “Execute” and press the MENU
knob, the USB connection is enabled and this
Preparations camcorder is recognized as an extension drive.
You can carry out the same operations by using
When you connect the camcorder to a computer
the arrow buttons (J, j, K, k) (see page 17).
using a USB cable (not supplied), the memory
card in the slot is acknowledged as an extended
If the USB connection is enabled during
drive by the computer.
recording/playback operation, the operation is

170 Operating Clips with a Computer

stopped and the message “USB Connecting”
appears on the viewfinder screen.
To use the application software
At this time, the output signal from the VIDEO To copy clips to the local disk of your computer,
OUT connector, HDMI connector, and HD/SD the dedicated application software must be
SDI OUT connector changes to a black signal. downloaded and installed on your computer. For
details, see “Software Downloads” (page 10).
Notes
Although the data regarding recorded materials
• The camcorder cannot be operated for recording, are stored over multiple files and folders, you can

Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices

playback, and so on while the message “USB easily handle the clips without considering such
Connecting” is displayed.
data and directory structure by using the
• When the computer accesses the media loaded in the
dedicated application software.
camcorder, do not try to carry out the following
operations. Note
- Operating the camcorder (turning the power on/off,
If you operate, e.g. copy the clips on the SxS memory
switching the operation mode, etc.)
card by using the Explorer (Windows) or Finder
- Removing or loading a media from an active slot
(Macintosh), the subsidiary data contained by the clips
(being accessed from the computer)
may not be maintained.
- Removing or connecting the USB cable
Disabling the USB connection To use a nonlinear editing system
To disable the USB connection, follow the same
For a nonlinear editing system, optional editing
procedure as that for removing a device from the
software that corresponds to the recording
computer.
formats used with this camcorder is required.
To enable the USB connection again, first
Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of your
disconnect the USB cable and then reconnect it.
computer in advance, using the supplied
The message “Connect USB Now?” appears
application Software.
again.
Note
If you connect the camcorder to the computer using an
i.LINK cable, you cannot use the computer to operate
files stored in a recording media loaded in the memory
card slot of this camcorder.

To remove an SxS memory card

Windows

1 Click on the icon of “Safely Remove

Hardware” on the task bar of the
computer.

2 Select “Safely remove SxS Memory

Card - Drive(X:)” from the displayed
menu.

3 Check that the Safe To Remove

Hardware message appears then
remove the card.
Macintosh
Drag the SxS memory card icon on the desktop to
Trash.
If the SxS memory card icon is located on Finder,
click on the eject icon on its side.

Operating Clips with a Computer 171

 1 Perform the preparatory settings of the
Connecting an External camcorder.
• Set “OPERATION” > “Input/Output” >
Device (i.LINK “Output & i.LINK” in the setup menu (see
Connection) page 115) to “HD & HDV” or “SD &
HDV.”
HD & HDV or SD & HDV: To output an
HDV stream in HD mode when the
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices

You can record the same images as those

recorded on the memory card in this camcorder video format is set to an HDV
compatible format (SP 1440/59.94i,
on an external device connected to the i.LINK
(HDV/DV) connector, or record the playback SP 1440/50i, or SP 1440/23.94P)
picture of the external device on the memory card SD & DV: To output a DV stream
• Set “OPERATION” > “Input/Output” >
in the camcorder.
When you connect the camcorder to a non-linear “i.LINK I/O” in the setup menu to
editing system that supports HDV format, you “Enable.”
• Set “MAINTENANCE” > “Trigger
can edit the images recorded on the memory card
in the camcorder. Mode” > “i.LINK Trigger Mode” in the
setup menu (see page 149) to “Both” or
Notes “External.”
• When you set “OPERATION” > “Input/Output” > Both: To perform recording both on the
“Output&i.LINK” in the setup menu to “480P (570P),” memory card in this camcorder and on
no signal is output from the HD/SD SDI OUT the external device
connector. External: To perform recording only on
• Use the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector only for one-to- the external device
one i.LINK connection.
• When you change a setting which affects output 2 Set the external device to recording
signals from the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector, such as
standby status.
“HD/SD,” “HD System Line,” “System Frequency,”
and “Rec Format” under “OPERATION” > “Format” For operations of the external device, refer to
in the setup menu or “i.LINK I/O” and “Down the operation manual of that device.
Converter” under “OPERATION” > “Input/Output” in
the setup menu, disconnect the i.LINK cable and 3 Start recording.
change the setting. Changing such a setting with the The external device starts recording in
i.LINK cable connected may cause improper operation synchronization.
of the connected i.LINK device.
• The external signal input via the i.LINK connection The status of the external device is displayed in
that can be recorded on the camcorder is HDV streams
the i.LINK status indication area (see page 27) on
only. You cannot record DV streams via the i.LINK
the viewfinder screen.
connection.
• An i.LINK connection and USB wireless LAN module Indication Status of the external device
cannot be used at the same time. Do not connect an STBY In HDV recording standby
IFU-WLM3 to the external device connector during
i.LINK connections. zREC In HDV recording
STBY In DV recording standby
zREC In DV recording
Recording the Camera Picture on
an External Device Notes

The picture being shot with this camcorder is • Operation may be different depending on the type of
external device.
output as an HDV or DV stream via the i.LINK
• When you execute the operation to make a recording
(HDV/DV) connector. It can be recorded on a
on the recording media loaded in the camcorder while
connected HDV or DVCAM recorder in HDV signals are output from the i.LINK (HDV/DV)
synchronization with a recording start/stop connector, HDV signal output stops for about one
operation on this camcorder. second before the recording starts, and then it resumes.

172 Connecting an External Device (i.LINK Connection)

• While you can record shot marks on the memory card Select an HDV compatible format (SP 1440/
during recording, they are not added to the pictures 59.94i, SP 1440/50i, or SP 1440/23.94P) for
recorded on the external device. the video format.

2 Make the following settings with

Nonlinear Editing “OPERATION” > “Input/Output” in
the setup menu (see page 115).
You can transfer an HDV stream to a nonlinear
• Set “Output&i.LINK” to “HD&HDV”

Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices

editing system connected via the i.LINK (HDV/
or “SD&HDV.”
DV) connector.
• Set “i.LINK I/O” to “Enable.”
Notes • Set “Source Select” to “i.LINK.”
• The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector of this camcorder is The input video is displayed on the
a 6-pin connector. Check the number of pins of the viewfinder screen or the monitor connected
i.LINK connector on your computer and use an to the VIDEO OUT connector.
appropriate i.LINK cable. Audio signals are output through the built-in
• In searching pictures of this camcorder on the speaker, the headphones connected to the
computer, it may take some time until the display is EARPHONE connector, and the speakers of
reflected on the computer.
the monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT
• If the playback clip is short or the playback starting
connector.
point is near the end of the clip, the i.LINK signal may
be interrupted between the clip and the next clip. When
you try to capture such a signal using the nonlinear
3 Start the recording.
editing system, a malfunction may occur, depending Notes
on the nonlinear editing software in use.
• An error is generated in the following cases. In such a
• If you specify a search speed other than 4, 15, or 24
case, cancel Recording mode.
times normal with the nonlinear editing system, no
- The video format of input signal does not match that
i.LINK signal is fed out. In such a case, the picture on
specified on the camcorder.
the viewfinder monitor may stay frozen.
- A copy-protected stream is being fed in.
• High-speed playback picture may not be displayed on
the computer screen, depending on the nonlinear • If the input to the camcorder becomes no signal during
editing software in use. recording, the TALLY indicators, the tally indicator on
the front of the viewfinder, and the REC indication
Setting on this camcorder (zREC) on the viewfinder screen flash, indicating that
Set “OPERATION” > “Input/Output” > “i.LINK no signal is being recorded on the SxS memory card.
I/O” in the setup menu to “Enable.” When an input signal is resumed, recording is
restarted, incrementing the clip number on the memory
For operations of the nonlinear editing software,
card.
refer to the operation manual of the software.

Recording External Input Signals

The HDV stream input from a device connected
via the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector can be
recorded on an SxS memory card in this
camcorder.The timecodes superimposed on the
i.LINK input are recorded regardless of the
settings of the camcorder.
Note
DV stream cannot be recorded.

1 Set the external signal to a format that

can be recorded on the camcorder.

Connecting an External Device (i.LINK Connection) 173

 • Do not connect/disconnect USB media while the
Connecting USB Media camcorder is turned on. It may cause of a malfunction
of the camcorder or USB media.

Copying Clips
To copy from SxS memory cards to USB media
You can connect USB storage media (such as a Copy clips recorded on SxS memory cards to
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices

HDD or flash memory) to the OPTION connector USB media by selecting “USB Set” >“Copy To
of the unit to copy clips between SxS memory USB” in the MAINTENANCE menu when the
cards and USB media. thumbnail screen is displayed.
The copy destination folder is specified using
“USB Set” >“Select Folder” in the
Supported USB Media MAINTENANCE menu. If no folder is selected,
a new folder is created and files are copied to it.
USB media that can be used with this unit must The name of the new folder uses the recording
satisfy the following criteria. date of the first clip on the source SxS memory
Capacity: 3 GB to 2 TB card. If “A&B t USB” is selected, clips on the
Media with capacity less than 3 GB is not selected SxS memory card are saved in the folder
recognized. Media with capacity exceeding 2 TB specified using “Select Folder,” and clips on the
is recognized as 2 TB media. unselected SxS memory card are saved in a new
folder.
Format: exFAT You can also copy clips by selecting them on the
Only media formatted on the PMW-1000, PMW- thumbnail screen. Select the clips and then select
50, or this unit can be used. Media formatted “COPY CLIP(A)” or “COPY CLIP(B)” from the
using other devices may not operate correctly. Clip Operation menu.

The recommended USB media are as follows. To copy all clips using an assignable button
• Sony PSZ-HA1T (1 TB) Assign the Quick Backup function to an
• Sony PSZ-HA50 (500 GB) assignable switch, then press the assignable
• Sony PSZ-SA25 (256 GB) button to copy all clips on the selected SxS
• Sony HD-E1 (1 TB) memory card to USB media.
• Sony HD-EG5 (500 GB) A new folder is created and files are copied to it.
The operation of the following USB media has To copy from USB media to SxS memory cards
been verified. Copy clips recorded on USB media to the selected
• Lacie LCH-RG005T3 (500 GB) SxS memory card by selecting “USB Set”
• Buffalo HD-PNT2.0U3-GBC (2 TB) >“Copy From USB” in the MAINTENANCE
menu, when selecting the folder by using “USB
When valid USB media is connected, the USB Set” > “Select Folder” in the MAINTENANCE
icon (see page 27) is displayed on the LCD menu.
monitor.
Error checking
Notes You can turn on error checking when copying
• The correct operation of HDD or USB flash drives that clips between USB media and SxS memory cards
meet the above criteria is not guaranteed. by setting “USB Set” >“Error Check” to “On” in
• This unit is compatible with USB media that operates the MAINTENANCE menu. If an error message
from a 5.0 V / 0.5 A power source. The unit may not
recognize the USB media, depending on the media
appears, try copying the clip again.
used. In such cases, supply a separate power source. Copying with error checking enabled takes
• Shooting signals cannot be recorded directly to USB approximately twice the time as when error
media. checking is disabled.
• Do not disconnect USB media while copying or
playing back clips on the media.

174 Connecting USB Media

Displaying the USB Media
Thumbnail Screen
Select “USB Set” >“USB Thumbnail” in the
MAINTENANCE menu to display the thumbnail
screen for clips recorded on USB media. When
selecting the folder by using “USB Set” > “Select

Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices

Folder” in the MAINTENANCE menu, you can
also assign the USB Thumbnail function to an
assignable button, then press the button to display
the USB media thumbnail screen.
The operations that can be performed on the USB
media thumbnail screen are basically the same as
those for the SxS memory card thumbnail screen,
although with the following differences.
• Functions that are not available
—Adding and deleting shot marks
—Adding and deleting OK/NG/KP flags and
OK marks
—Setting index pictures
—Splitting clips
• Dropped frames and other issues may occur
when playing back clips recorded on USB
media.

Clip Operation menu

Item Function
Clip Properties Displays the clip detailed
information screen (see page 100).
Copy Clip (A) Copies the selected clips to the SxS
Copy Clip (B) memory card in slot A or slot B
(see page 104).
Copy Clip (USB) Copies the selected clips to a USB
media (see page 105).
Delete Clip Deletes the clip (see page 105).

Connecting USB Media 175

 Configuring a Shooting and Recording System

If you install the optional CBK-CE01 on this camcorder, you can attach the CA-FB70/TX70 Camera
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices

Adaptor and connect a camera control unit. This allows you to configure a shooting and recording system
by connecting multiple camcorders, camera control units, and remote control units.
For more information about the CA-FB70 and CA-TX70, refer to their respective operation manuals.
Note
When using the camcorder in this system, do not connect a video light to the camcorder.

Tally and Call indication

The following table shows the tally or call indication when configuring system.

Recording Receiving data via LED indication of Character indication in the

status communication DXF viewfinder
Tally Green Call Call other REC/ GREEN “z” (red) “z” (green) “CALL”
Tally of CA than CA TALLY & TAKE indication indication indication
LED TALLY
LED
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF No display No display No display
OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF “z” (red) No display “CALL” (red)
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF No display No display “CALL” (red)
OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF “z” (red) No display “CALL” (red)
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON No display “z” (green) No display
OFF ON OFF ON ON ON “z” (red) “z” (green) “CALL” (red)
OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON No display “z” (green) “CALL” (red)
OFF ON ON ON ON ON “z” (red) “z” (green) “CALL” (red)
ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF “z” (red) No display No display
ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF No display No display “CALL” (red)
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF “z” (red) No display “CALL” (red)
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF No display No display “CALL” (red)
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON “z” (red) “z” (green) No display
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON No display “z” (green) “CALL” (red)
ON ON ON OFF ON ON “z” (red) “z” (green) “CALL” (red)
ON ON ON ON OFF ON No display “z” (green) “CALL” (red)

Note
While the CA-FB70/TX70 Camera Adapter is connected, alarm indication by the tally lamp that is listed in “Warning
Indication” is not performed.

176 Configuring a Shooting and Recording System

 Chapter 9 Maintenance
Testing the Camcorder Maintenance

Check the functions of the camcorder before

Cleaning the Viewfinder

Chapter 9 Maintenance
setting out for a shooting session, preferably by
recording and playing back video and audio
signals. Use a dust blower to clean the lens, the LCD
screen, and mirror inside the viewfinder barrel.
Note
Never use organic solvents such as thinners.

Note about the Battery Terminal

The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for
battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable
part.
Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if
the pins of the battery terminal are bent or
deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they
become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep
the unit working properly and to prolong its
usable lifetime.
Contact a Sony service or sales representative for
more information about inspections.

Testing the Camcorder / Maintenance 177

 Operation Warnings

If a problem occurs when the camcorder is powered or is being operated, a warning is issued by various
visible and audible indicators. These visible and audible indicators are:
• Error/warning message (“A” in the “Layout of the table of warning messages” below)
• WARNING indicator (“B”), warning sound from the speaker and earphones (“C”), tally/REC indication
(“D”), and battery remaining indicator (“E”).
A warning message, and the REC indication appear on the viewfinder screen.
The volume of the warning sound can be adjusted with the ALARM knob. Set the ALARM knob to the
minimum position to suppress the sound.
Chapter 9 Maintenance

Layout of the table of warning messages

WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
B C D E
A

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module

• The operation of the WARNING indicator, the tally/REC indication, and the battery indicator is
represented by graphic symbols as follows.
: Continuous
: 1 flash/s
: 4 flashes/s
• The warning sounds are represented by graphic symbols as follows.
: Continuous beep
: 1 beep/s

Error Indication

WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining

— —
Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take
module
The camcorder is Recording stops. Turn off the power and confirm whether an error
E-*****

abnormal. occurs on the connected devices, the cables, and

the media or not.
(If power cannot be turned off by setting the
POWER switch to OFF, remove the battery pack
or the AC power source.)
If the problem continues after the camcorder is
restarted, contact your Sony service
representative.

178 Operation Warnings

Warning Indication

WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining

—
Media Near Full

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
Free space on the SxS Recording continues. Replace it with another at the earliest opportunity.
memory card has
become insufficient.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining

Chapter 9 Maintenance
—

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

Media Full

module
No space is left on the Recording stops. Replace it with another.
SxS memory card.
Recording, clip
copying and clip
division cannot be
performed.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Battery Near End

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
The battery power will Recording continues. Charge the battery pack at the earliest
be exhausted soon. opportunity.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Battery End

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
The battery pack is Recording stops. Connect a power source via the DC IN connector
exhausted. Recording or stop operation to charge the battery pack.
cannot be performed.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—
Temperature High

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
The internal Recording continues. Suspend operation, turn off the power, and wait
temperature has risen until the temperature falls.
above a safe operation
limit.

Operation Warnings 179

 WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Voltage Low

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
The DC IN voltage has Recording continues. Check the power supply.
become low (stage 1).
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Insufficient Voltage

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
Chapter 9 Maintenance

The DC IN voltage is Recording stops. Connect other power source.

too low (stage 2).
Recording cannot be
performed.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Please disconnect i.LINK

— — — —
Need to Reboot

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
You cannot use both Recording continues. Turn off the power, and disconnect either the
an i.LINK connection i.LINK or IFU-WLM3.
and an IFU-WLM3
connection at the same
time.
Please Change Battery.

WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining

— — — —
Battery Error

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
An error was detected Recording stops. Replace the battery pack with a normal one.
with the battery pack.

WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining

Backup Battery End

— — — —
Please Change.

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
The remaining power Recording continues. Refer to a Sony service representative to replace
of the backup battery the battery with a new one.
is insufficient.

180 Operation Warnings

 WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Unknown Media(A)1) — — — —
Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take
Please Change.

module
A partitioned memory Recording continues. This card cannot be used with this camcorder.
card or one that Remove it and load a compatible card.
contains recorded clips
exceeding the number
permitted with this
camcorder is loaded.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Cannot Record to Media(A)1)
Reached Clip Number Limit

— — — —

Chapter 9 Maintenance
Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take
module
The maximum number Recording stops. Replace it with another card.
of clips for a single
memory card is
reached. No more clip
can be recorded on the
card.
Cannot Record to Media(A)1) Media(A)1) Needs to be Restored

WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining

— — — —
Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take
Media Error

module
An error occurred with Recording stops. Remove the card, load it again, and restore it.
the memory card. The
card requires
restoration.

WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining

— — — —
Media Error

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
Recording cannot be Recording stops. As playback may be possible, it is recommended
done, as the memory to replace it with another card after copying the
card is defective. clips, as required.

WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining

Cannot Use Media(A)1)

— — — —
Media Error

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
Neither recording nor Recording stops. It cannot be operated with this camcorder.
playback can be done, Replace it with another card.
as the memory card is
defective.

Operation Warnings 181

 Unsupported File System
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Cannot Use Media(A)1) — — — —
Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take
module
A card of a different Recording stops. It cannot be used with this camcorder. Replace it
file system was with another card.
inserted.

WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining

— — — —
Video Format Mismatch

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
Chapter 9 Maintenance

The external signal Recording stops. Change settings of “OPERATION” > “Format” in
input via the i.LINK the setup menu to match it to that of the external
connection cannot be signal.
recorded, as the Video
Format setting is
different from the
signal format of the
external input signal.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Copy Protected Input

— — — —
Cannot Record

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
The external signal Recording stops. Check the input signal.
input via the i.LINK
connection cannot be
recorded, as the stream
is copy-protected.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
DVCAM Input Signal!

— — — —
Cannot Record

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
The external signal Recording stops. —
input via the i.LINK
connection cannot be
recorded, as it is a DV
stream.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
— — — —
Playback Halted

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

Media Error

module
An error occurred in Recording stops. If this frequently occurs, change the memory card
reading data from the after copying the clips, as required.
memory card, and
playback cannot be
continued.

182 Operation Warnings

 WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Media(A)1) Error — — — —
Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take
module
Recording cannot be Recording stops. If this frequently occurs, change the memory
done, as an error card.
occurred with the
memory card.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
HDD A2) Battery Near End

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

Chapter 9 Maintenance
module
The battery power of Recording continues. Change the battery at the earliest opportunity.
the connected HDD
will be exhausted
soon.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
HDD A2) Battery End

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
The battery of the Recording stops. Stop operation to change the battery.
connected HDD is
exhausted. Recording
cannot be performed.
Reached Duplication Limit Not Enough Capacity

WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining

Change Media (A)1)

— — — —
Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take
module
There is not enough Recording continues Replace the card in slot A with another one.
capacity for copying. (disallowing copy).
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Change Media (A)1)

— — — —
Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take
module
The card has already Recording continues Replace the card in slot A with another one.
ten clips having the (disallowing copy).
same name as that you
tried to duplicate.

Operation Warnings 183

 WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Not Enough Capacity
— — — —
Cannot Divide
Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take
module
There is not enough Recording continues —
capacity for dividing a (disallowing divide).
clip.
Will Switch Slots Soon

WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining

— — — —
Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take
module
Chapter 9 Maintenance

Will switch to other Recording continues. Make sure that a memory card is loaded in the
slot soon. other slot.

WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining

— — — —
No Clip

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
There is no clip to be Recording continues. —
displayed.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
— — — —
No OK Clip

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
There is no clip with Recording continues. —
the OK mark.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Same File Already Exists
Change Media(A)1)

— — — —
Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take
module
The card has already Recording continues Replace the card in slot A with another one.
clips having the same (disallowing copy).
name as that you tried
to duplicate.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Media Reached Rewriting Limit

— — — —
Change Media (A)1)

Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take

module
The memory card Recording stops. Make a backup copy and replace the card with
comes to the end of its another one as soon as possible. Recording/
service life. playback may not be performed properly if you
continue to use the card.
For details, refer to the operating instructions of
the memory card.

184 Operation Warnings

 WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Unsupported Clip Included
Cannot Use Media (A)1)
— — — —
Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take
module
The inserted memory — The card in slot A cannot be used with this
card contains clips camcorder.
recorded in a format
that is not supported
by this camcorder.

1) (B) for the card in slot B

2) B for a HDD connected to slot B

Chapter 9 Maintenance

Operation Warnings 185

 Appendix
Use and storage locations
Important Notes on Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or
Operation storing the camcorder in the following places.
• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature
range: 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F))
• Remember that in summer in warm climates the
temperature inside a car with the windows
Use and storage closed can easily exceed 50°C (122°F).
• In damp or dusty locations
Do not subject the camcorder to severe shocks • Locations where the camcorder may be exposed
• The internal mechanism may be damaged or the to rain
body warped. • Locations subject to violent vibration
• If an accessory mounted on the accessory shoe • Near strong magnetic fields
Appendix

is subjected to severe shock, the accessory shoe • Close to radio or TV transmitters producing
may be damaged. In such a case, stop using it strong electromagnetic fields.
and contact your dealer or a Sony service • In direct sunlight or close to heaters for
representative. extended periods
Do not cover the camcorder while operating To prevent electromagnetic interference from
Putting a cloth, for example, over the camcorder portable communications devices
can cause excessive internal heat build-up. The use of portable telephones and other
After use communications devices near this camcorder can
Always turn off the POWER switch. result in malfunctions and interference with audio
and video signals.
Before storing the camcorder for a long period
It is recommended that the portable
Remove the battery pack.
communications devices near this camcorder be
Shipping powered off.
• Remove the media before transporting the
Note on laser beams
camcorder.
Laser beams may damage the CMOS image
• If sending the camcorder by truck, ship, air or
sensors.
other transportation service, pack it in the
If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam, be
shipping carton of the camcorder.
careful not to let the laser beam be directed into
Care of the camcorder the lens of the camcorder.
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the
lenses or optical filters using a blower. Fitting the zoom lens
If the body of the camcorder is dirty, clean it with
a soft, dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth It is important to fit the lens correctly, as
steeped in a little neutral detergent, then wipe dry. otherwise damage may result. Be sure to refer to
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or the section “Mounting and Adjusting the Lens”
thinners, as these may cause discoloration or (page 36).
other damage to the finish of the camcorder.
Viewfinder
In the event of operating problems
If you should experience problems with the Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece
camcorder, contact a Sony service representative. pointing directly at the sun.
The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s rays
and melt the interior of the viewfinder.

186 Important Notes on Operation

 Flicker
About the LCD panels If recording is made under lighting produced by
The LCD panel fitted to this unit is manufactured discharge tubes, such as fluorescent, sodium, or
with high precision technology, giving a mercury-vapor lamps, the screen may flicker,
functioning pixel ratio of at least 99.99%. Thus a colors may vary, or horizontal stripes may appear
very small proportion of pixels may be “stuck”, distorted.
either always off (black), always on (red, green,
or blue), or flashing. In addition, over a long
period of use, because of the physical
characteristics of the liquid crystal display, such
“stuck” pixels may appear spontaneously. These
problems are not a malfunction. Note that any
such problems have no effect on recorded data.

On condensation
In such cases, set the flicker-reduction function to
If the unit is suddenly taken from a cold to a warm
auto mode (see page 148).
location, or if ambient temperature suddenly
If the frame rate selected for recording is close to
rises, moisture may form on the outer surface of
the power-supply frequency, flicker may not be
the unit and/or inside of the unit. This is known as

Appendix
reduced sufficiently even if you activate the
condensation. If condensation occurs, turn off the
Flicker-Reduction function. In such cases, use the
unit and wait until the condensation clears before
electronic shutter.
operating the unit. Operating the unit while
condensation is present may damage the unit. Focal plane
Owing to the characteristics of the pickup
Phenomena specific to CMOS image elements (CMOS image sensors) for reading
video signals, subjects that quickly move across
sensors
the screen may appear slightly skewed.
The following phenomena that may appear in
images are specific to CMOS (Complementary Flash band
Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensors. The luminance at the top and bottom of the screen
They do not indicate malfunctions. may change when shooting a flashlight beam or a
light source that quickly flashes.
White flecks You can use the supplied application software to
Although the CMOS image sensors are produced correct clips that contain frames with flash bands.
with high-precision technologies, fine white
flecks may be generated on the screen in rare
Note on data compatibility with other
cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc. This is related
to the principle of CMOS image sensors and is
XDCAM EX-series products
not a malfunction. When you use a PMW-EX1/EX3/EX30 to play
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the materials recorded on the camcorder, any media
following cases: in which clips of formats not supported by the
• when operating at a high environmental PMW-EX1/EX3/EX30 have been recorded
temperature cannot be used.
• when you have raised the master gain The PMW-EX1/EX3/EX30 cannot divide a clip
(sensitivity) recorded on this camcorder, even if the clip is in a
• when operating in Slow-Shutter mode video format supported by the PMW-EX1/EX3/
The problem may be alleviated by executing EX30.
automatic black balance adjustment.
Aliasing
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they
may appear jagged or flicker.

Important Notes on Operation 187

 Fragmentation
If pictures cannot be recorded/reproduced
Exchanging the Battery
properly, try formatting the recording medium. of the Internal Clock
While repeating picture recording/playback with
a certain recording medium for an extended
period, files in the medium may be fragmented,
disabling proper recording/storage. In such a The camcorder’s internal clock is powered by a
case, make a backup of clips in the medium then lithium battery. If the message “BackUp Battery
perform formatting of the medium using End” appears in the viewfinder, this battery must
“OPERATION” > “Format Media” (see be exchanged. Contact a Sony service
page 115) in the setup menu. representative.
Appendix

188 Exchanging the Battery of the Internal Clock

 Output Formats and Limitations

Video Formats and Output Signals

Output formats of the HD/SD SDI OUT connector and HDMI output connector
Output signal that is output from the SDI OUT connector or HDMI output connector corresponds to the
setup menu setting or format of played clip.

When recording: Format of the Output format

OPERATION menu Input/Output setting of the OPERATION menu
When playing back: Video format of HD SD
the played video clip HD&HDV SD&HDV
SD&DV
XAVC-I 1920/59.94i 1920×1080/59.94i 720×480/59.94i

Appendix
XAVC-L50 1920/59.94i
XAVC-L35 1920/59.94i
XAVC-L25 1920/59.94i
HD422 1920/59.94i
HD420 HQ1920/59.94i
HD420 HQ1440/59.94i
HQ1920/59.94i
HQ1440/59.94i
SP1440/59.94i
XAVC-I 1920/29.97P 1920×1080/29.97PsF 720×480/29.97PsF
XAVC-L50 1920/29.97P
XAVC-L35 1920/29.97P
HD422 1920/29.97P
HD420 HQ1920/29.97P
HD420 HQ1440/29.97P
HQ1920/29.97P
HQ1440/29.97P
XAVC-I 1920/23.98P 1920×1080/23.98PsF 6) 720×480/59.94i 1)
XAVC-L50 1920/23.98P 1)
1920×1080/59.94i
XAVC-L35 1920/23.98P
HD422 1920/23.98P
HD420 HQ1920/23.98P
HD420 HQ1440/23.98P
HQ1920/23.98P
HQ1440/23.98P
(23.98P Output: 2-3 Pull Down)
SP1440/23.98P 1920×1080/59.94i 1) 720×480/59.94i 1)
(23.98P Output: 2-3 Pull Down)
XAVC-I 1280/59.94P 1280×720/59.94P 720×480/59.94i 2)
XAVC-L50 1280/59.94P
HD422 1280/59.94P
HD420 HQ1280/59.94P
HD422 1280/29.97P 1280×720/59.94P 3) 720×480/29.97PsF
HD420 HQ1280/29.97P

Output Formats and Limitations 189

 When recording: Format of the Output format
OPERATION menu Input/Output setting of the OPERATION menu
When playing back: Video format of HD SD
the played video clip HD&HDV SD&HDV
SD&DV
HD422 1280/23.98P 1280×720/59.94P 4) 720×480/59.94i 1)
HD420 HQ1280/23.98P (23.98P Output:
2-3 Pull Down)
HQ1280/59.94P 720×480/59.94P 720×480/59.94i 2)
HQ1280/29.97P 720×480/29.97PsF
HQ1280/23.98P 720×480/59.94i 1)
IMX 512/59.94i 720×480/59.94i
DVCAM 480/59.94i
DVCAM 59.94i
IMX 512/29.97P 720×480/29.97PsF
DVCAM 480/29.97P
DVCAM 29.97P
XAVC-I 1920/50i 1920×1080/50i 720×576/50i
XAVC-L50 1920/50i
Appendix

XAVC-L35 1920/50i
XAVC-L25 1920/50i
HD422 1920/50i
HD420 HQ1920/50i
HD420 HQ1440/50i
HQ 1920/50i
HQ 1440/50i
SP 1440/50i
XAVC-I 1920/25P 1920×1080/25PsF 720×576/25PsF
XAVC-L50 1920/25P
XAVC-L35 1920/25P
HD422 1920/25P
HD420 HQ1920/25P
HD420 HQ1440/25P
HQ 1920/25P
HQ 1440/25P
XAVC-I 1280/50P 1280×720/50P 720×576/50i
XAVC-L50 1280/50P
HD422 1280/50P
HD420 HQ1280/50P
HD422 1280/25P 720×576/25PsF
HD420 HQ1280/25P
HQ 1280/50P 720×576/50P 720×576/50i 5)
HQ 1280/25P 720×576/25PsF
IMX 608/50i 720×576/50i
DVCAM 480/50i
DVCAM 50i
IMX 608/25P 720×576/25PsF
DVCAM 480/25P
DVCAM 25P

1) Converted from 23.98P by 2-3 pull-down processing.

2) Converted from 59.94P.
3) Converted from 29.97P by displaying each 2 same pictures of 29.97P.

190 Output Formats and Limitations

4) Converted from 23.98P by displaying each 2 or 3 same pictures of 23.98P.
5) Converted from 50P.
6) No signal is output from the HDMI OUT connector when 1920×1080/23.98PsF is output from the SDI OUT connector.

Output formats of the VIDEO OUT connector

When the output signal from the SDI OUT or HDMI OUT connector is HD, the Y signal whose format is
the same as the output signal from the SDI OUT or HDMI OUT connector, is output from the VIDEO
OUT connector.
When the output signal from the SDI OUT or HDMI OUT connector is SD, an analog composite signal
is output from the VIDEO OUT connector.

Output formats of the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector

The output signal from the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector corresponds to the setup menu setting or format
of the played clip, and output in the following format.
Note

Appendix
When you set “OPERATION” > “Format” > “File System” to “UDF” and "exFAT" in the setup menu, no signal is output
from the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector.

When recording: Format of the Output format

OPERATION menu Input/Output setting of the OPERATION menu
When playing back: Video format of HD&HDV SD&HDV SD&HDV
the played video clip
HQ1920/59.94i Input/output is not possible. DV (720×480/59.94i)
HQ1440/59.94i
SP1440/59.94i HDV (1440×1080/59.94i) DV (720×480/59.94i)
HQ1920/29.97P Input/output is not possible. DV (720×480/29.97PsF)
HQ1440/29.97P
HQ1920/23.98P Input/output is not possible.
HQ1440/23.98P
SP1440/23.98P HDV HDV DV (720×480/59.94i 2-3 pull-
(1440×1080/ (1440×1080/ down)
59.94i 2-3 pull- 59.94i 2-3 pull-
down) down)
HQ1280/59.94P Input/output is not possible. DV (720×480/59.94i Converted
from P to i)
HQ1280/29.97P Input/output is not possible. DV (720×480/29.97PsF)
HQ1280/23.98P Input/output is not possible.
DVCAM 59.94i – – DV (720×480/59.94i)
DVCAM 29.97P – – DV (720×480/29.97PsF)
HQ 1920/50i Input/output is not possible. DV (720×576/50i)
HQ 1440/50i
SP 1440/50i HDV (1440×1080/50i) DV (720×576/50i)
HQ 1920/25P Input/output is not possible. DV (720×576/25PsF)
HQ 1440/25P
HQ 1280/50P Input/output is not possible. DV (720×576/50i Converted
from P to i)
HQ 1280/25P Input/output is not possible. DV (720×576/25PsF)
DVCAM 50i – – DV (720×576/50i)

Output Formats and Limitations 191

 When recording: Format of the Output format
OPERATION menu Input/Output setting of the OPERATION menu
When playing back: Video format of HD&HDV SD&HDV SD&HDV
the played video clip
DVCAM 25P – – DV (720×576/50i)
Appendix

192 Output Formats and Limitations

 Output Signals and Operation Restrictions When a
Camcorder System is Configured (in HD Mode Only)
The table below shows output signals from the camcorder and operation restrictions to the camcorder when
it is connected with a camera adaptor and camera control unit to configure a shooting and recording system.
When the camcorder is equipped with the CA-FB70/CA-TX70 HD Camera Adaptor, full HD signals
complying with the HD-SDI standard are transferred to the camera adaptor.
Note
When configuring a camcorder system with a camera adaptor and camera control unit, install the optional CBK-CE01 50
Pin Interface and Digital Extender and set “OPERATION” > “Format” > “HD/SD” to “HD” in the setup menu.

Settings of Rec Format and SDI outputs to the camera System format of Operation restrictions to
System Frequency under adaptor the camera adaptor the camcorder
OPERATION >Format in and camera control Genlock Return video
the setup menu unit display
XAVC-I 1920/59.94i 1920×1080/59.94i 1920×1080/59.94i Available Available

Appendix
XAVC-L50 1920/59.94i
XAVC-L35 1920/59.94i
XAVC-L25 1920/59.94i
HD422 1920/59.94i
HQ1920/59.94i
HQ1440/59.94i
SP1440/59.94i
XAVC-I 1920/29.97P 1920×1080/29.97PsF
XAVC-L50 1920/29.97P
XAVC-L35 1920/29.97P
HD422 1920/29.97P
HQ1920/29.97P
HQ1440/29.97P
SP1440/23.98P 1920×1080/59.94i (2-3PD)
XAVC-I 1920/23.98P Output disabled Not supported Unavailable Unavailable
XAVC-L50 1920/23.98P
XAVC-L35 1920/23.98P
HD422 1920/23.98P
HQ1920/23.98P a)
HQ1920/23.98P b)
HQ1440/23.98P a) Output disabled Not supported Unavailable Unavailable
HQ1440/23.98P b) 1920×1080/59.94i (2-3PD) 1920×1080/59.94i Available Unavailable

Output Signals and Operation Restrictions When a Camcorder System is Configured (in HD Mode Only) 193
 Settings of Rec Format and SDI outputs to the camera System format of Operation restrictions to
System Frequency under adaptor the camera adaptor the camcorder
OPERATION >Format in and camera control Genlock Return video
the setup menu unit display
XAVC-I 1920/50i 1920×1080/50i 1920×1080/50i Available Available
XAVC-L50 1920/50i
XAVC-L35 1920/50i
XAVC-L25 1920/50i
HD422 1920/50i
HQ1920/50i
HQ1440/50i
SP1440/50i
XAVC-I 1920/25P 1920×1080/25PsF
XAVC-L50 1920/25P
XAVC-L35 1920/25P
HD422 1920/25P
HQ1920/25P
HQ1440/25P
XAVC-I 1280/59.94P 1280×720/59.94P 1280×720/59.94P Available Available
Appendix

XAVC-L50 1280/59.94P
HD422 1280/59.94P
HQ1280/59.94P
XAVC-I 1280/50P 1280×720/50P 1280×720/50P Available Available
XAVC-L50 1280/50P
HD422 1280/50P
HQ1280/50P

a) PsF output
b) PD output

194 Output Signals and Operation Restrictions When a Camcorder System is Configured (in HD Mode Only)
 Audio
Specifications <exFAT>
XAVC-I mode: LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4
channels
XAVC-L mode: LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4
channels
<UDF>
HD 422 50 mode: LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4
General channels
HD 420 HQ mode: LPCM 16-bit, 48 kHz, 4
Power requirements channels
12 V DC SD MPEG IMX mode: LPCM 16/24-bit, 48
Power consumption kHz, 4 channels
SD DVCAM mode: LPCM 16-bit, 48 kHz, 4
Approx. 26 W
channels
Main unit (camcorder) + LCD viewfinder + auto
<FAT>
focus lens + microphone
HD mode: LPCM 16-bit, 48 kHz, 4 channels
During recording, power source: battery pack
SD DVCAM mode: LPCM 16-bit, 48 kHz, 2
Approx. 31 W
channels
Main unit (camcorder) + LCD viewfinder + auto

Appendix
focus lens + microphone + CBK-WA101 Recording/playback time
Wireless Adapter <exFAT>
During recording, power source: battery pack XAVC-I mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Notes Approx. 120 minutes
• Do not use a video light with power When using SBS-64G1A/SBP-64B (64 GB):
consumption of over 50 W. Approx. 60 minutes
• When connecting a device to the DC OUT When using SBP-32/SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
connector, use one with current consumption Approx. 30 minutes
of 0.5 A or less.
XAVC-L50 mode:
Operating temperature When using SBP-128B (128GB):
0ºC to 40ºC (32ºF to 104ºF) Approx. 240 minutes
Storage temperature When using SBP-64B/SBS-64G1A (64GB):
–20ºC to +60ºC (–4ºF to 140ºF) Approx. 120 minutes
Recording/playback formats When using SBS-32G1A (32GB):
Video (XAVC) Approx. 60 minutes
XAVC-I mode: CBG, 112 Mbps max, MPEG-4 XAVC-L35 mode:
AVC/H.264 When using SBP-128B (128GB):
XAVC-L50 mode: VBR, 50Mbps max, MPEG- Approx. 340 minutes
4 AVC/H.264 When using SBP-64B/SBS-64G1A (64GB):
XAVC-L35 mode: VBR, 35Mbps max, MPEG- Approx. 170 minutes
4 AVC/H.264 When using SBS-32G1A (32GB):
XAVC-L25 mode: VBR, 25Mbps max, MPEG- Approx. 85 minutes
4 AVC/H.264 XAVC-L25 mode:
When using SBP-128B (128GB):
Video (MPEG-2 Long GOP)
Approx. 440 minutes
HD 422 mode: CBR, 50 Mbps max, MPEG-2
When using SBP-64B/SBS-64G1A (64GB):
422P@HL
Approx. 220 minutes
HQ mode: VBR, 35 Mbps max, MPEG-2
When using SBS-32G1A (32GB):
MP@HL
Approx. 110 minutes
SP mode: CBR, 25 Mbps MPEG-2 MP@H-14
SD mode: MPEG IMX, DVCAM

Specifications 195
 <UDF> Recording frame rate
HD 422 50/SD MPEG IMX mode <exFAT>
When using SBP-128B (128 GB): XAVC-I mode:
Approx. 240 minutes CBG, 112 Mbps max, MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
When using SBS-64G1A (64 GB): 1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97p, 25p,
Approx. 120 minutes 23.98p
When using SBP-32/SBS-32G1A (32 GB): 1280 × 720/59.94p, 50p
Approx. 60 minutes XAVC-L50 mode: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264,
HD 420 HQ mode 50Mbps/VBR
When using SBP-128B (128 GB): 1920x1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P,
Approx. 360 minutes 23.98P
When using SBS-64G1A (64 GB): 1280x720/59.94P, 50P
Approx. 180 minutes XAVC-L35 mode: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264,
When using SBP-32/SBS-32G1A (32 GB): 35Mbps/VBR
Approx. 90 minutes 1920x1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P,
SD DVCAM mode 23.98P
When using SBP-128B (128 GB): XAVC-L25 mode: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264,
Approx. 440 minutes 25Mbps/VBR
When using SBS-64G1A (64 GB): 1920x1080/59.94i, 50i
Appendix

Approx. 220 minutes <UDF>

When using SBP-32/SBS-32G1A (32 GB): HD 422 50mode:
Approx. 110 minutes MPEG-2 422P@HL, 50 Mbps/CBR
<FAT> 1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97p, 25p,
HD HQ mode 23.98p
When using SBP-128B (128 GB): 1280 × 720/59.94p, 50p, 29.97p, 25p,
Approx. 400 minutes 23.98p
When using SBS-64G1A (64 GB): HD 420 HQ mode:
Approx. 200 minutes MPEG-2 MP@HL, 35 Mbps/VBR
When using SBP-32/SBS-32G1A (32 GB): 1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97p, 25p,
Approx. 100 minutes 23.98p
HD SP mode 1440 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97p, 25p,
When using SBP-128B (128 GB): 23.98p
Approx. 560 minutes 1280 × 720/59.94p, 50p, 23.98p (2-3 pull
When using SBS-64G1A (64 GB): down)
Approx. 280 minutes SD MPEG IMX mode:
When using SBP-32/SBS-32G1A (32 GB): 720 × 480/59.94i, 29.97PsF
Approx. 140 minutes 720 × 576/50i, 25PsF
SD DVCAM mode SD DVCAM mode:
When using SBP-128B (128 GB): 720 × 480/59.94i, 29.97PsF
Approx. 520 minutes 720 × 576/50i, 25PsF
When using SBS-64G1A (64 GB): <FAT>
Approx. 260 minutes HD HQ 1920 mode:
When using SBP-32/SBS-32G1A (32 GB): MPEG-2 MP@HL, 35 Mbps/VBR
Approx. 130 minutes 1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97p, 25p,
23.98p
Note
HD HQ 1440 mode:
The actual recording/playback time may differ MPEG-2 MP@HL, 35 Mbps/VBR
slightly from the values shown here, depending 1440 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97p, 25p,
on usage conditions, memory characteristics, 23.98p
etc.

196 Specifications
 HD HQ 1280 mode: S/N ratio
MPEG-2 MP@HL, 35 Mbps/VBR 60 dB (Y) (standard)
1280 × 720/59.94p, 50p, 29.97p, 25p, Horizontal resolution
23.98p 1000TV lines or more (1920 × 1080i mode)
HD SP 1440 mode:
Gain
MPEG-2 MP@H-14, 25 Mbps/CBR
–3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42 dB, AGC
1440 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 23.98p (2-3 pull
Shutter speed
down)
1
SD DVCAM mode: /60 to 1/2000 sec. + ECS (Extended Clear Scan)
720 × 480/59.94i, 29.97PsF Shutter speed (Slow shutter (SLS))
720 × 576/50i, 25PsF 2 to 8, 16, 32, 64 frames
Continuous operation time Slow & Quick Motion
With the BP-L80S 720: Frame rate is selectable from 1 fps to 60 fps
Approx. 180 min. 1080p: Frame rate is selectable from 1 fps to 30 fps
Mass White balance
Main body only: 3.4 kg (7 lb 7.9 oz) Preset (3200K), Memory A, Memory B/ATW
Dimensions
See page 200.
Audio Block

Appendix
Supplied accessories
See page 199. Sampling frequency
48 kHz
Quantization
Camera Block 16 bits
Pickup device Headroom
2/ -type, 3-“Exmor” Full HD CMOS image sensors 20 dB (the factory default setting)
3
Effective picture elements: (20, 18, 16, 12 dB)
1920 (H) × 1080 (V) Frequency response
Format MIC: 50 Hz to 20 kHz (within ±3 dB)
3-chip RGB LINE: 20 Hz to 20 kHz (within ±3 dB)
Optical system WRR Analog: 50 Hz to 20 kHz (within ±3 dB)
F1.4 prism system WRR Digital: 20 Hz to 20 kHz (within ±3 dB)

Built-in filters Dynamic range

1: Clear 90 dB (typical)
2: 1/4ND Distortion
3: 1/16ND 0.08% max. (with input level 40dBu)
4: 1/ ND Built-in speaker
64
Sensitivity Monaural
Output: 300 mW
F12 (System frequency: 59.94i)
F13 (System frequency: 50i)
(2000lx, 89.9% reflection) Display
Minimum illumination
PMW-400K:
Viewfinder
0.006 lx (standard) (1920 × 1080/59.94i
3.5-inch color LCD monitor: 960 (H) × 540 (V),
mode, F1.9, +42 dB input, 64-frame
1/4 HD size
accumulation)
LCD screen
PMW-400L:
0.003 lx (standard) (1920 × 1080/59.94i Black and white LCD (displays audio level, TC,
mode, F1.4, +42 dB input, 64-frame and remaining of the battery and media)
accumulation)

Specifications 197
 Others
Media Block DC input: XLR type, 4-pin, male
11 to 17 V DC
Card slots DC output: 4-pin
Type: Express Card34 11 to 17 V DC, maximum rated current:
Number of slots: 2 0.5 A
Connector: Conforms to PCMCIA Express Card Lens: 12-pin
Standard Supplying power to the lens
Writing rate 11 to 17 V DC, maximum rated current:
50 Mbps or more 1.0 A
Reading rate Remote: 8-pin
50 Mbps or more LIGHT: 2-pin
USB: 4-pin, Type B (1), Host Type A (1)
i.LINK: 6-pin (1), complies with IEEE1394
Inputs/Outputs HDV (HDV1080i)/DVCAM stream input/
output, S400
Input/Output Connectors VF: 26-pin, rectangular, 20-pin round
Signal inputs For wireless receiver: D-sub 15-pin
Audio input: XLR type, 3-pin, female (2), Line/
Appendix

Mic/Mic +48 V selectable

Lens Block (PMW-400K Only)
–60 dBu/–4 dBu (0 dBu=0.775 Vrms)
Microphone input: XLR type, 5-pin, female
Lens mount
–60 dBu
GENLOCK input: BNC type (1) Sony 2/3-type bayonet mount
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced Focal length
Timecode input: BNC type (1) 8 mm (11/32 inches) to 128 mm (5 1/8 inches)
0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 kΩ (35 mm equivalent: 31.5 mm (1 1/4 inches) to
Signal outputs 503 mm (19 7/8 inches)
Video output: BNC type (1), HD-Y or analog Zoom
composite Servo/Manual selectable
HDMI: Type A, 19-pin (1) Zoom ratio
SDI output: BNC type (2), HD-SDI/SD-SDI 16×
selectable Maximum relative aperture
Audio output: XLR type, 5-pin, male 1:1.9
0 dBu
Iris
Timecode output: BNC type (1)
Auto/Manual selectable
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω
F1.9 to F16 and C (close)
Earphone output (stereo minijack) (1)
Focus range
8 Ω, – ∞ to –18 dBs variable
Auto/Manual selectable
Ranges:
800 mm (31 1/2 inches) to ∞ (Macro OFF)
50 mm (2 inches) to ∞ (Macro ON, Wide)
732 mm (28 7/8 inches) to ∞ (Macro ON,
Telephoto)
Filter thread
M82 mm, pitch 0.75 mm
Macro
ON/OFF switchable

198 Specifications
 HD Camera Adaptor
Supplied Accessories CA-FB70/TX70 (when an optional CBK- CE01
is installed)
Viewfinder (1)
Shoulder strap (1) Note
Stereo microphone (1) When using SDIOUT2 with the CA-FB70
Windscreen (1) attached to the camcorder, use an L angle
Cold shoe kit (1 set) bracket.
Lens mount cap MPEG TS Adaptor
Flange back adjustment chart HDCA-702 (when an optional CBK- CE01 is
Auto focus lens (1) installed)
Before Using this Unit (1)
Operating Instructions (CD-ROM) (1) Note
SDIOUT2 cannot be used when the MPEG
TS adaptor is attached.
Recommended Additional
Wi-Fi Adapter
Equipment CBK-WA01
Wireless Adapter
Power Supply and Related Equipment
CBK-WA101

Appendix
AC Adaptor
USB Wireless LAN Module
AC-DN10/DN2B
IFU-WLM3
Battery Pack
BP-L80S Media Adaptor
Battery Charger
MEAD-SD02 (for SDHC card)
BC-L160/L500/L70
XQD ExpressCard Adapter
Lens, Viewfinder and Related Equipment
QDA-EX1 (for XQD memory card)
Lens
2/
3-type bayonet mount lenses only Media
Viewfinder SxS Memory Card
DXF-20W/51/C50WA SxS PRO+ series
Viewfinder Rotation Bracket SxS PRO series
BKW-401 SxS-1 series

Note Audio Equipment

The BKW-401 can only be used with the viewfinder Microphone
supplied with the camcorder or the DXF-20W. ECM-678/674/673/680S
Equipment for Remote Control Microphone Holder
Remote Control Unit CAC-12
RM-B170/B750 Wireless Microphone
RCP-1000/1500/1530 DWR-S01D
RCP-751/921 WRR-855S/860C/861/862
RCP-1001/1501
Other Peripheral Devices
Note
Tripod adaptor
The command network unit (CNU) is not VCT-14/U14
supported.
Video Light
50 Pin Interface and Digital Extender
UC-D200A (PROTECH)
CBK-CE01
Ultralight (Anton Bauer)

Specifications 199
 Pad
Notes
CBK-SP01 Soft Type Shoulder Pad
• Always make a test recording, and verify that it was
Equipment for Maintenance and Easier Handling recorded successfully.
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES
Hard Carrying Case
OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LC-H300
LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR
Soft Carrying Case REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF
LC-DS300SFT FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS RECORDING
MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR
Dimensions ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS
TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
• Always verify that the unit is operating properly
before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR
REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE
LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE
PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT,
Appendix

EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD

OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE
WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON
WHATSOEVER.
• SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CLAIMS OF
ANY KIND MADE BY USERS OF THIS UNIT
OR MADE BY THIRD PARTIES.
• SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS,
(in mm (inches)) REPAIR, OR REPRODUCTION OF ANY DATA
RECORDED ON THE INTERNAL STORAGE
SYSTEM, RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
Design and specifications are subject to change STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA
without notice. OR STORAGE SYSTEMS.
• SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE
TERMINATION OR DISCONTINUATION OF
ANY SERVICES RELATED TO THIS UNIT
THAT MAY RESULT DUE TO
CIRCUMSTANCES OF ANY KIND.

200 Specifications
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories

Portable light HD monitor/SD monitor

ECM-680S/678/
673 Microphone

CAC-12 PMW-EX30, PDW-HR1

Microphone Holder XDCAM HD series recorder

DXF-20W HDCAM series recorder

Viewfinder

WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit

DXF-51/DXF-C50WA DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver
Viewfinder

SxS memory card

Appendix
MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor

QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adapter

CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adapter
CBK-WA101 Wireless Adapter
PMW-400 IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module

RM-B170/B750 CBK-CE01 50 Pin Interface and Digital

RCP-1001/1501 Extender + HDCA-702 MPEG TS Adaptor
Remote Control Unit
CBK-CE01 50 Pin Interface and Digital Extender +
VCT-14/U14 CA-FB70/TX70 HD Camera Adaptor
Tripod adaptor
CCU (Camera Control Unit)

Tripod

LC-DS300 SFT a) BP-L80S BC-L70

Soft carrying case BC-L160
Battery Pack Battery Battery
Charger Charger

LC-H300
AC-DN10/DN2B BC-L500 Battery
Hard carrying case
AC Adaptor Charger

CBK-DCB01
Demand Converter Box

a) The carrying case is large enough to hold the camcorder with lens and microphone mounted. However,
remove them if they protrude more than 25 cm (9 7/8 inches) from the front of the main unit.

Chart of Optional Components and Accessories 201

 About data transfer speed of i.LINK
About i.LINK i.LINK defines a maximum data transfer speed of
approximately 100, 200 and 400 Mbps 1) that are
described as S100, S200 and S400 respectively.
For i.LINK devices, a maximum data transfer
speed that the device supports is identified on
This section explains the specifications and “Specifications” page of the operating
features of i.LINK. instructions supplied with the device or near its
i.LINK connector.
1) When connecting with the device that support
What is i.LINK? different data transfer speed, the actual data transfer
i.LINK is a digital serial interface designed to speed may be different from those described on the
integrate devices equipped with i.LINK i.LINK connectors.
connectors. i.LINK allows your device to: What is Mbps?
• Perform two-way transmission and reception of Mega bits per second. A measure of the rate at
data such as digital audio and digital video which data is transmitted per second. In case of
signals. 100 Mbps, 100 Mega bits of data can be
• Control other i.LINK devices. transmitted per second.
Appendix

• Easily connect multiple devices with a single

i.LINK cable. i.LINK operation with your camcorder
Your i.LINK device is capable of connecting to a
wide range of digital AV devices for data transfer For details on operation when other equipment
and other operations. with i.LINK (HDV or DV) connector is
Other advantages include the following feature. connected, see page 172.
When connected to multiple i.LINK devices, For details on connection with i.LINK cable and
your i.LINK device can perform data transfer and necessary software, refer to the operating
other operations not only instructions supplied with the connected device.
with the directly connected devices but also with
any of the devices that are connected to those About the required i.LINK cable
devices. Therefore, you do not need to be Use the Sony 6-pin-to-4-pin or 6-pin-to-6-pin
concerned with device connection order. i.LINK cable to connect the i.LINK devices.
However, depending on the features and
specifications of the connected devices, you may i.LINK and are trademarks.
need to use certain functions differently, and you
may not be able to transfer data or perform certain
operations.

i.LINK, a nickname for IEEE 1394 proposed by

Sony, is a trademark supported by many
companies worldwide.
IEEE 1394 is an international standard defined by
IEEE, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers, Inc.
Note
The camcorder can be connected to one device with the
i.LINK cable (DV cable). When you connect with an
HDV or DV device that has two or more i.LINK
connectors, refer to the operating instructions supplied
with the connected device.

202 About i.LINK

 consumers. Disc replicators or sellers of the
About License PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses for
their own business from MPEG LA. Please
contact MPEG LA for any further information.
MPEG LA. L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206
http://www.mpegla.com

MPEG-4 AVC Patent Portfolio

License About Bitmap Fonts
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR
OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT
RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO This product uses RICOH Bitmap Fonts
produced and sold by Ricoh Company, Ltd.
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/

Appendix
OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN
A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.

NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE

IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM

MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio

License
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN
CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY
MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE
MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING
VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED
MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED
WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250
STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,
COLORADO 80206.

“PACKAGED MEDIA” means any storage

media storing MPEG-2 video information such as
DVD movie which are sold/distributed to general

About License / About Bitmap Fonts 203

 About OpenSSL

Because it uses the OpenSSL Toolkit, this product uses software developed by the OpenSSL Project
(http://www.openssl.org/).

OpenSSL License
---------------

/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
Appendix

* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* [email protected].
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

204 About OpenSSL

* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson ([email protected]).
*
*/

Original SSLeay License

-----------------------

/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected])

* All rights reserved.
*

Appendix
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young ([email protected]).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young ([email protected])"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from

About OpenSSL 205

 * the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
Appendix

*/

206 About OpenSSL

 About JQuery,Sizzle.js

This product uses the following software, released under MIT License.

jQuery JavaScript Library v1.7.2

http://jquery.com/
Copyright 2011, John Resig

Sizzle.js
http://sizzlejs.com/
Copyright 2011, The Dojo Foundation
Date: Wed Mar 21 12:46:34 2012 -0700

MIT License

Appendix
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

About JQuery,Sizzle.js 207

 C
Index Camera adaptor 11
Clip(s)
batch copy 104
copying 104
cue up 98
defining names 94
A
deleting 86, 105
AC power 29 displaying properties 103
ACCESS lamps 16, 19 dividing 107
Accessories (optional) 201 operating with a computer 170
Accessory fitting shoe 12 operations 96
Adaptor connector 11 playing 85, 98
ALARM knob 14 selecting 97
Area setting 35 Clock setting 35
Arrow buttons (K, k, J, j) 17 Color LCD 16
ASSIGN. 0 switch 14 COLOR TEMP. button 14
ASSIGN. 1/2/3 switches 14 Color temperature 26
ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches 19 Connection 168
Assignable switches, assigning functions 158 monitors 168
ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) 15 using i.LINK 172
Audio control section 17 using USB 170
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors 21 CONTRAST control 24
Index

AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 Cover 15

switches 18
AUDIO IN selectors 21
Audio input system 38
D
Audio level Date, setting 35
adjusting 55 DC IN connector 11
adjusting playback level 14 DC OUT 12V connector 11
meters 28 DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control) 15
AUDIO OUT connector 21 Depth of field 26
AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches 18 Diopter adjustment ring 24
AUTO W/B BAL switch 13 DISPLAY switches 17, 24

B E
BACKLIGHT button 17 EARPHONE jack 20
Battery EJECT buttons 19
attachment shoe 11 Electric color temperature filter 27
of the internal clock, exchanging 188 ESSENCE MARK button 18
pack 29 EXPAND button 17
remaining 26 Expand thumbnail screen
BKW-401 33 displaying 105
Black balance, adjusting 47 to increase the number of divisions 106
BRIGHT control 24 Extender 25
External device connector 19
External devices 168
control 27

208 Index
External input 27 position 28
External power source 26 ring 23
Eyecup 24 IRIS switch 23

F L
F FWD button/indicator 16 Lens
F REV button/indicator 16 cable clamp 12
Filter position 28 locking lever 12
FILTER selector 13 mount 12
Fitting for optional microphone holder 12 mount cap 12
Flange focal length, adjusting 23, 36 mount securing rubber 12
Focus mounting 36
adjusting 54 LENS connector 12
adjustment mode 27 Lens file(s)
position 25 loading 167
ring 23 loading automatically 167
FOCUS switch 22 saving 166
Frame Rec 89 setting data 166
Framing shots 92 LEVEL CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 knobs 18
Freeze Mix 92 LIGHT connector 12
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch 18 LIGHT switch 11

Index
G M
GAIN selector 15 MACRO switch 23
Gain value 28 Maintenance 177
GENLOCK IN connector 20 Media
Green tally 25 remaining capacity 22, 28
status 25
MENU button 18
H
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch 15
HD/SD SDI OUT connector 21 MENU knob 13
HDMI output connector 19 MENU ON/OFF switch 15
Histogram 28 MIC IN (+48 V) connector 12
HOLD button 17 MIC LEVEL control 13
Microphone holder 24
fitting 12
I Microphone, connecting 38
i.LINK 202 MIRROR switch 24
cable 202 MONITOR knob 14
connection 172 MONITOR switches 14
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector 21 Monitor, connecting 168
Index picture Monochrome LCD Panel 21
changing 107
Initial value 112
N
Input source 27
Internal clock 35 ND filter 13
Interval Rec 88 NEXT button 16
Iris Nonlinear editing 171, 173

Index 209
 Number of system lines 26 S
S×S memory card slots 19
O S×S memory cards 60
ejecting 60
OK mark(s) 97
formatting 61
setting 86
loading 60
OK/NG/KP mark(s) 103
restoring 62
Operation status 25
selecting 61
of i.LINK device 27
Scene files
Optional components 201
loading 166
OUTPUT/DCC switch 15
saving 165
Search
P with the expand thumbnail screen 98
with the shot mark thumbnail screen 99
PC connector 19
SET button 17
PEAKING control 24
Setup menu 109
Picture Cache 87
basic operations 110
Planning metadata 93
FILE menu 154
PLAY/PAUSE button/indicator 16
MAINTENANCE menu 137
Plug 24
menu list 113
Power source voltage/battery remaining
OPERATION menu 113
capacity 26
PAINT menu 131
Power supply 29
SHIFT button 18
POWER switch 11
Index

Shooting 60
Preset values, resetting 165
basic operations 84
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch 18
stop motion animations 89
PREV button 16
with Slow & Quick motion 90
PUSH AF button 22
Shot mark thumbnail screen 106
PUSH AUTO button 23
Shot mark(s)
adding 107
R adding during playback 98
defining names 95
REC START button 13
deleting 107
Recording
recording 86
external input signals 173
Shoulder pad 12
from pre-stored video 87
adjusting the position 43
on an external device 172
Shoulder strap fitting 12
remaining time 61
Shoulder strap, using 42
review 84
Shutter
time-lapse video 88
setting 50
Recording mode 25, 47
speed 51
special settings indication 26
SHUTTER switch 13
REMOTE connector 21, 65
Slot cover 19
Remote Control Unit 65
SLOT SELECT button 19
Reset 112, 165
Speaker 16
RESET/RETURN button 17
Specifications 195
RET button 23
Status information 59
RM-B750 65
STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch 15
Status screens 59

210 Index
 ASSIGN SWITCH 59 Video light, connecting 42
AUDIO 59 VIDEO OUT connector 20
BATTERY/MEDIA 59 Viewfinder 24
CAMERA 59 adjusting focus 32
VIDEO 59 adjusting position 30
STOP button 16 adjusting screen 32
Stopper 24 adjusting the angle 31
attaching 30
attaching a 5-inch viewfinder 34
T cable 24
TALLY indicators 20 cleaning 177
Tally indicators 24 connectors 12
TALLY switch 20, 24 fitting shoe 12
TC IN connector 20 positioning knob 12
TC OUT connector 20 positioning lever 12
Testing 177 positioning ring 12
THUMBNAIL button 17 raising up the barrel and eyepiece 31
THUMBNAIL indicator 17 screen display 25
THUMBNAIL menu 100 Voltage capacity 26
operations 102
Thumbnail screen 96
W
displaying OK clip thumbnails only 102
displaying the all clips thumbnail 102 WARNING indicator 16
Thumbnail(s) Warnings 178

Index
changing the screen type 102 WHITE BAL switch 15
operations 100 White balance memory 28
Time, setting 35 White balance, adjusting 48
Timecode 27 Wi-Fi adapter 19
setting 56 Wi-Fi remote commander 82
synchronizing 57 Wireless microphone reception level 26
TLCS automatic adjustment 52 Write protect 22
TLCS control mode 27
Tripod mount 12
Z
Tripod, mounting 41
ZEBRA switch 24
Zoom 53
U
control connector 23
UHF portable tuner, attaching 40 position 25
USB connection 170 power zoom lever 23
User bits setting 57 ring 23
User setting data ZOOM switch 23
loading 164
saving 163

V
VF connector 12
Video format 26, 104
setting 44
Video level indication 27

Index 211